bc-1.07.1HEADbc-1.07.1master

10 files changed, 8810 insertions, 4090 deletions

diff --git a/doc/Makefile.am b/doc/Makefile.am
index a729cee..1bdc478 100644
--- a/doc/Makefile.am
+++ b/doc/Makefile.am
@@ -5,8 +5,7 @@ MAKEINFO = makeinfo --no-split
 
 MAINTAINERCLEANFILES = Makefile.in
 
-# FIXME: remove this when automake has been fixed to include these
-# files automatically
-EXTRA_DIST = bc.1 dc.1
+dist_man_MANS = bc.1 dc.1
 
-man_MANS = bc.1 dc.1
+bc.dvi bc.pdf bc.html $(srcdir)/bc.info \
+dc.dvi dc.pdf dc.html $(srcdir)/dc.info :  texi-ver.incl
diff --git a/doc/Makefile.in b/doc/Makefile.in
index 840d007..55aa316 100644
--- a/doc/Makefile.in
+++ b/doc/Makefile.in
@@ -1,6 +1,8 @@
-# Makefile.in generated automatically by automake 1.4 from Makefile.am
+# Makefile.in generated by automake 1.14.1 from Makefile.am.
+# @configure_input@
+
+# Copyright (C) 1994-2013 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
 
-# Copyright (C) 1994, 1995-8, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
 # This Makefile.in is free software; the Free Software Foundation
 # gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it,
 # with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved.
@@ -10,345 +12,756 @@
 # even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A
 # PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
 
-
-SHELL = @SHELL@
-
-srcdir = @srcdir@
-top_srcdir = @top_srcdir@
+@SET_MAKE@
 VPATH = @srcdir@
-prefix = @prefix@
-exec_prefix = @exec_prefix@
-
-bindir = @bindir@
-sbindir = @sbindir@
-libexecdir = @libexecdir@
-datadir = @datadir@
-sysconfdir = @sysconfdir@
-sharedstatedir = @sharedstatedir@
-localstatedir = @localstatedir@
-libdir = @libdir@
-infodir = @infodir@
-mandir = @mandir@
-includedir = @includedir@
-oldincludedir = /usr/include
-
-DESTDIR =
-
+am__is_gnu_make = test -n '$(MAKEFILE_LIST)' && test -n '$(MAKELEVEL)'
+am__make_running_with_option = \
+  case $${target_option-} in \
+      ?) ;; \
+      *) echo "am__make_running_with_option: internal error: invalid" \
+              "target option '$${target_option-}' specified" >&2; \
+         exit 1;; \
+  esac; \
+  has_opt=no; \
+  sane_makeflags=$$MAKEFLAGS; \
+  if $(am__is_gnu_make); then \
+    sane_makeflags=$$MFLAGS; \
+  else \
+    case $$MAKEFLAGS in \
+      *\\[\ \	]*) \
+        bs=\\; \
+        sane_makeflags=`printf '%s\n' "$$MAKEFLAGS" \
+          | sed "s/$$bs$$bs[$$bs $$bs	]*//g"`;; \
+    esac; \
+  fi; \
+  skip_next=no; \
+  strip_trailopt () \
+  { \
+    flg=`printf '%s\n' "$$flg" | sed "s/$$1.*$$//"`; \
+  }; \
+  for flg in $$sane_makeflags; do \
+    test $$skip_next = yes && { skip_next=no; continue; }; \
+    case $$flg in \
+      *=*|--*) continue;; \
+        -*I) strip_trailopt 'I'; skip_next=yes;; \
+      -*I?*) strip_trailopt 'I';; \
+        -*O) strip_trailopt 'O'; skip_next=yes;; \
+      -*O?*) strip_trailopt 'O';; \
+        -*l) strip_trailopt 'l'; skip_next=yes;; \
+      -*l?*) strip_trailopt 'l';; \
+      -[dEDm]) skip_next=yes;; \
+      -[JT]) skip_next=yes;; \
+    esac; \
+    case $$flg in \
+      *$$target_option*) has_opt=yes; break;; \
+    esac; \
+  done; \
+  test $$has_opt = yes
+am__make_dryrun = (target_option=n; $(am__make_running_with_option))
+am__make_keepgoing = (target_option=k; $(am__make_running_with_option))
 pkgdatadir = $(datadir)/@PACKAGE@
-pkglibdir = $(libdir)/@PACKAGE@
 pkgincludedir = $(includedir)/@PACKAGE@
-
-top_builddir = ..
-
-ACLOCAL = @ACLOCAL@
-AUTOCONF = @AUTOCONF@
-AUTOMAKE = @AUTOMAKE@
-AUTOHEADER = @AUTOHEADER@
-
-INSTALL = @INSTALL@
-INSTALL_PROGRAM = @INSTALL_PROGRAM@ $(AM_INSTALL_PROGRAM_FLAGS)
-INSTALL_DATA = @INSTALL_DATA@
-INSTALL_SCRIPT = @INSTALL_SCRIPT@
-transform = @program_transform_name@
-
+pkglibdir = $(libdir)/@PACKAGE@
+pkglibexecdir = $(libexecdir)/@PACKAGE@
+am__cd = CDPATH="$${ZSH_VERSION+.}$(PATH_SEPARATOR)" && cd
+install_sh_DATA = $(install_sh) -c -m 644
+install_sh_PROGRAM = $(install_sh) -c
+install_sh_SCRIPT = $(install_sh) -c
+INSTALL_HEADER = $(INSTALL_DATA)
+transform = $(program_transform_name)
 NORMAL_INSTALL = :
 PRE_INSTALL = :
 POST_INSTALL = :
 NORMAL_UNINSTALL = :
 PRE_UNINSTALL = :
 POST_UNINSTALL = :
+subdir = doc
+DIST_COMMON = $(srcdir)/Makefile.in $(srcdir)/Makefile.am \
+	$(srcdir)/texi-ver.incl.in texinfo.tex $(dist_man_MANS)
+ACLOCAL_M4 = $(top_srcdir)/aclocal.m4
+am__aclocal_m4_deps = $(top_srcdir)/configure.ac
+am__configure_deps = $(am__aclocal_m4_deps) $(CONFIGURE_DEPENDENCIES) \
+	$(ACLOCAL_M4)
+mkinstalldirs = $(install_sh) -d
+CONFIG_HEADER = $(top_builddir)/config.h
+CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES = texi-ver.incl
+CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES =
+AM_V_P = $(am__v_P_@AM_V@)
+am__v_P_ = $(am__v_P_@AM_DEFAULT_V@)
+am__v_P_0 = false
+am__v_P_1 = :
+AM_V_GEN = $(am__v_GEN_@AM_V@)
+am__v_GEN_ = $(am__v_GEN_@AM_DEFAULT_V@)
+am__v_GEN_0 = @echo "  GEN     " $@;
+am__v_GEN_1 = 
+AM_V_at = $(am__v_at_@AM_V@)
+am__v_at_ = $(am__v_at_@AM_DEFAULT_V@)
+am__v_at_0 = @
+am__v_at_1 = 
+SOURCES =
+DIST_SOURCES =
+AM_V_DVIPS = $(am__v_DVIPS_@AM_V@)
+am__v_DVIPS_ = $(am__v_DVIPS_@AM_DEFAULT_V@)
+am__v_DVIPS_0 = @echo "  DVIPS   " $@;
+am__v_DVIPS_1 = 
+AM_V_MAKEINFO = $(am__v_MAKEINFO_@AM_V@)
+am__v_MAKEINFO_ = $(am__v_MAKEINFO_@AM_DEFAULT_V@)
+am__v_MAKEINFO_0 = @echo "  MAKEINFO" $@;
+am__v_MAKEINFO_1 = 
+AM_V_INFOHTML = $(am__v_INFOHTML_@AM_V@)
+am__v_INFOHTML_ = $(am__v_INFOHTML_@AM_DEFAULT_V@)
+am__v_INFOHTML_0 = @echo "  INFOHTML" $@;
+am__v_INFOHTML_1 = 
+AM_V_TEXI2DVI = $(am__v_TEXI2DVI_@AM_V@)
+am__v_TEXI2DVI_ = $(am__v_TEXI2DVI_@AM_DEFAULT_V@)
+am__v_TEXI2DVI_0 = @echo "  TEXI2DVI" $@;
+am__v_TEXI2DVI_1 = 
+AM_V_TEXI2PDF = $(am__v_TEXI2PDF_@AM_V@)
+am__v_TEXI2PDF_ = $(am__v_TEXI2PDF_@AM_DEFAULT_V@)
+am__v_TEXI2PDF_0 = @echo "  TEXI2PDF" $@;
+am__v_TEXI2PDF_1 = 
+AM_V_texinfo = $(am__v_texinfo_@AM_V@)
+am__v_texinfo_ = $(am__v_texinfo_@AM_DEFAULT_V@)
+am__v_texinfo_0 = -q
+am__v_texinfo_1 = 
+AM_V_texidevnull = $(am__v_texidevnull_@AM_V@)
+am__v_texidevnull_ = $(am__v_texidevnull_@AM_DEFAULT_V@)
+am__v_texidevnull_0 = > /dev/null
+am__v_texidevnull_1 = 
+INFO_DEPS = $(srcdir)/bc.info $(srcdir)/dc.info
+am__TEXINFO_TEX_DIR = $(srcdir)
+DVIS = bc.dvi dc.dvi
+PDFS = bc.pdf dc.pdf
+PSS = bc.ps dc.ps
+HTMLS = bc.html dc.html
+TEXINFOS = bc.texi dc.texi
+TEXI2DVI = texi2dvi
+TEXI2PDF = $(TEXI2DVI) --pdf --batch
+MAKEINFOHTML = $(MAKEINFO) --html
+AM_MAKEINFOHTMLFLAGS = $(AM_MAKEINFOFLAGS)
+DVIPS = dvips
+am__can_run_installinfo = \
+  case $$AM_UPDATE_INFO_DIR in \
+    n|no|NO) false;; \
+    *) (install-info --version) >/dev/null 2>&1;; \
+  esac
+am__installdirs = "$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)" "$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)"
+am__vpath_adj_setup = srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's|.|.|g'`;
+am__vpath_adj = case $$p in \
+    $(srcdir)/*) f=`echo "$$p" | sed "s|^$$srcdirstrip/||"`;; \
+    *) f=$$p;; \
+  esac;
+am__strip_dir = f=`echo $$p | sed -e 's|^.*/||'`;
+am__install_max = 40
+am__nobase_strip_setup = \
+  srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*|]/\\\\&/g'`
+am__nobase_strip = \
+  for p in $$list; do echo "$$p"; done | sed -e "s|$$srcdirstrip/||"
+am__nobase_list = $(am__nobase_strip_setup); \
+  for p in $$list; do echo "$$p $$p"; done | \
+  sed "s| $$srcdirstrip/| |;"' / .*\//!s/ .*/ ./; s,\( .*\)/[^/]*$$,\1,' | \
+  $(AWK) 'BEGIN { files["."] = "" } { files[$$2] = files[$$2] " " $$1; \
+    if (++n[$$2] == $(am__install_max)) \
+      { print $$2, files[$$2]; n[$$2] = 0; files[$$2] = "" } } \
+    END { for (dir in files) print dir, files[dir] }'
+am__base_list = \
+  sed '$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;s/\n/ /g' | \
+  sed '$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;s/\n/ /g'
+am__uninstall_files_from_dir = { \
+  test -z "$$files" \
+    || { test ! -d "$$dir" && test ! -f "$$dir" && test ! -r "$$dir"; } \
+    || { echo " ( cd '$$dir' && rm -f" $$files ")"; \
+         $(am__cd) "$$dir" && rm -f $$files; }; \
+  }
+man1dir = $(mandir)/man1
+NROFF = nroff
+MANS = $(dist_man_MANS)
+am__tagged_files = $(HEADERS) $(SOURCES) $(TAGS_FILES) $(LISP)
+DISTFILES = $(DIST_COMMON) $(DIST_SOURCES) $(TEXINFOS) $(EXTRA_DIST)
+ACLOCAL = @ACLOCAL@
+AMTAR = @AMTAR@
+AM_DEFAULT_VERBOSITY = @AM_DEFAULT_VERBOSITY@
+AR = @AR@
+AUTOCONF = @AUTOCONF@
+AUTOHEADER = @AUTOHEADER@
+AUTOMAKE = @AUTOMAKE@
+AWK = @AWK@
+BC_VERSION = @BC_VERSION@
 CC = @CC@
+CCDEPMODE = @CCDEPMODE@
+CFLAGS = @CFLAGS@
+CPP = @CPP@
+CPPFLAGS = @CPPFLAGS@
+CYGPATH_W = @CYGPATH_W@
+DC_VERSION = @DC_VERSION@
+DEFS = @DEFS@
+DEPDIR = @DEPDIR@
+ECHO_C = @ECHO_C@
+ECHO_N = @ECHO_N@
+ECHO_T = @ECHO_T@
+EGREP = @EGREP@
+EXEEXT = @EXEEXT@
+GREP = @GREP@
+INSTALL = @INSTALL@
+INSTALL_DATA = @INSTALL_DATA@
+INSTALL_PROGRAM = @INSTALL_PROGRAM@
+INSTALL_SCRIPT = @INSTALL_SCRIPT@
+INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM = @INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM@
+LDFLAGS = @LDFLAGS@
 LEX = @LEX@
+LEXLIB = @LEXLIB@
+LEX_OUTPUT_ROOT = @LEX_OUTPUT_ROOT@
+LIBOBJS = @LIBOBJS@
+LIBS = @LIBS@
+LTLIBOBJS = @LTLIBOBJS@
+MAKEINFO = makeinfo --no-split
+MKDIR_P = @MKDIR_P@
+OBJEXT = @OBJEXT@
 PACKAGE = @PACKAGE@
+PACKAGE_BUGREPORT = @PACKAGE_BUGREPORT@
+PACKAGE_NAME = @PACKAGE_NAME@
+PACKAGE_STRING = @PACKAGE_STRING@
+PACKAGE_TARNAME = @PACKAGE_TARNAME@
+PACKAGE_URL = @PACKAGE_URL@
+PACKAGE_VERSION = @PACKAGE_VERSION@
+PATH_SEPARATOR = @PATH_SEPARATOR@
 RANLIB = @RANLIB@
 READLINELIB = @READLINELIB@
+SET_MAKE = @SET_MAKE@
+SHELL = @SHELL@
+STRIP = @STRIP@
 VERSION = @VERSION@
 YACC = @YACC@
-
+YFLAGS = @YFLAGS@
+abs_builddir = @abs_builddir@
+abs_srcdir = @abs_srcdir@
+abs_top_builddir = @abs_top_builddir@
+abs_top_srcdir = @abs_top_srcdir@
+ac_ct_AR = @ac_ct_AR@
+ac_ct_CC = @ac_ct_CC@
+am__include = @am__include@
+am__leading_dot = @am__leading_dot@
+am__quote = @am__quote@
+am__tar = @am__tar@
+am__untar = @am__untar@
+bindir = @bindir@
+build_alias = @build_alias@
+builddir = @builddir@
+datadir = @datadir@
+datarootdir = @datarootdir@
+docdir = @docdir@
+dvidir = @dvidir@
+exec_prefix = @exec_prefix@
+host_alias = @host_alias@
+htmldir = @htmldir@
+includedir = @includedir@
+infodir = @infodir@
+install_sh = @install_sh@
+libdir = @libdir@
+libexecdir = @libexecdir@
+localedir = @localedir@
+localstatedir = @localstatedir@
+mandir = @mandir@
+mkdir_p = @mkdir_p@
+oldincludedir = @oldincludedir@
+pdfdir = @pdfdir@
+prefix = @prefix@
+program_transform_name = @program_transform_name@
+psdir = @psdir@
+sbindir = @sbindir@
+sharedstatedir = @sharedstatedir@
+srcdir = @srcdir@
+sysconfdir = @sysconfdir@
+target_alias = @target_alias@
+top_build_prefix = @top_build_prefix@
+top_builddir = @top_builddir@
+top_srcdir = @top_srcdir@
 info_TEXINFOS = bc.texi dc.texi
-MAKEINFO = makeinfo --no-split
-
 MAINTAINERCLEANFILES = Makefile.in
+dist_man_MANS = bc.1 dc.1
+all: all-am
 
-# FIXME: remove this when automake has been fixed to include these
-# files automatically
-EXTRA_DIST = bc.1 dc.1
-
-man_MANS = bc.1 dc.1
-mkinstalldirs = $(SHELL) $(top_srcdir)/mkinstalldirs
-CONFIG_HEADER = ../config.h
-CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES = 
-TEXI2DVI = texi2dvi
-INFO_DEPS = bc.info dc.info
-DVIS = bc.dvi dc.dvi
-TEXINFOS = bc.texi dc.texi
-man1dir = $(mandir)/man1
-MANS = $(man_MANS)
-
-NROFF = nroff
-DIST_COMMON =  Makefile.am Makefile.in texinfo.tex
-
-
-DISTFILES = $(DIST_COMMON) $(SOURCES) $(HEADERS) $(TEXINFOS) $(EXTRA_DIST)
-
-TAR = tar
-GZIP_ENV = --best
-all: all-redirect
 .SUFFIXES:
-.SUFFIXES: .dvi .info .ps .texi .texinfo .txi
-$(srcdir)/Makefile.in: Makefile.am $(top_srcdir)/configure.in $(ACLOCAL_M4) 
-	cd $(top_srcdir) && $(AUTOMAKE) --gnu --include-deps doc/Makefile
-
-Makefile: $(srcdir)/Makefile.in  $(top_builddir)/config.status
-	cd $(top_builddir) \
-	  && CONFIG_FILES=$(subdir)/$@ CONFIG_HEADERS= $(SHELL) ./config.status
-
-
-bc.info: bc.texi
-bc.dvi: bc.texi
-
-
-dc.info: dc.texi
-dc.dvi: dc.texi
-
-
-DVIPS = dvips
+.SUFFIXES: .dvi .html .info .pdf .ps .texi
+$(srcdir)/Makefile.in:  $(srcdir)/Makefile.am  $(am__configure_deps)
+	@for dep in $?; do \
+	  case '$(am__configure_deps)' in \
+	    *$$dep*) \
+	      ( cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh ) \
+	        && { if test -f $@; then exit 0; else break; fi; }; \
+	      exit 1;; \
+	  esac; \
+	done; \
+	echo ' cd $(top_srcdir) && $(AUTOMAKE) --gnu doc/Makefile'; \
+	$(am__cd) $(top_srcdir) && \
+	  $(AUTOMAKE) --gnu doc/Makefile
+.PRECIOUS: Makefile
+Makefile: $(srcdir)/Makefile.in $(top_builddir)/config.status
+	@case '$?' in \
+	  *config.status*) \
+	    cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh;; \
+	  *) \
+	    echo ' cd $(top_builddir) && $(SHELL) ./config.status $(subdir)/$@ $(am__depfiles_maybe)'; \
+	    cd $(top_builddir) && $(SHELL) ./config.status $(subdir)/$@ $(am__depfiles_maybe);; \
+	esac;
+
+$(top_builddir)/config.status: $(top_srcdir)/configure $(CONFIG_STATUS_DEPENDENCIES)
+	cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh
+
+$(top_srcdir)/configure:  $(am__configure_deps)
+	cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh
+$(ACLOCAL_M4):  $(am__aclocal_m4_deps)
+	cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh
+$(am__aclocal_m4_deps):
+texi-ver.incl: $(top_builddir)/config.status $(srcdir)/texi-ver.incl.in
+	cd $(top_builddir) && $(SHELL) ./config.status $(subdir)/$@
 
 .texi.info:
-	@cd $(srcdir) && rm -f $@ $@-[0-9] $@-[0-9][0-9]
-	cd $(srcdir) \
-	  && $(MAKEINFO) `echo $< | sed 's,.*/,,'`
+	$(AM_V_MAKEINFO)restore=: && backupdir="$(am__leading_dot)am$$$$" && \
+	am__cwd=`pwd` && $(am__cd) $(srcdir) && \
+	rm -rf $$backupdir && mkdir $$backupdir && \
+	if ($(MAKEINFO) --version) >/dev/null 2>&1; then \
+	  for f in $@ $@-[0-9] $@-[0-9][0-9] $(@:.info=).i[0-9] $(@:.info=).i[0-9][0-9]; do \
+	    if test -f $$f; then mv $$f $$backupdir; restore=mv; else :; fi; \
+	  done; \
+	else :; fi && \
+	cd "$$am__cwd"; \
+	if $(MAKEINFO) $(AM_MAKEINFOFLAGS) $(MAKEINFOFLAGS) -I $(srcdir) \
+	 -o $@ $<; \
+	then \
+	  rc=0; \
+	  $(am__cd) $(srcdir); \
+	else \
+	  rc=$$?; \
+	  $(am__cd) $(srcdir) && \
+	  $$restore $$backupdir/* `echo "./$@" | sed 's|[^/]*$$||'`; \
+	fi; \
+	rm -rf $$backupdir; exit $$rc
 
 .texi.dvi:
-	TEXINPUTS=.:$$TEXINPUTS \
-	  MAKEINFO='$(MAKEINFO) -I $(srcdir)' $(TEXI2DVI) $<
-
-.texi:
-	@cd $(srcdir) && rm -f $@ $@-[0-9] $@-[0-9][0-9]
-	cd $(srcdir) \
-	  && $(MAKEINFO) `echo $< | sed 's,.*/,,'`
-
-.texinfo.info:
-	@cd $(srcdir) && rm -f $@ $@-[0-9] $@-[0-9][0-9]
-	cd $(srcdir) \
-	  && $(MAKEINFO) `echo $< | sed 's,.*/,,'`
-
-.texinfo:
-	@cd $(srcdir) && rm -f $@ $@-[0-9] $@-[0-9][0-9]
-	cd $(srcdir) \
-	  && $(MAKEINFO) `echo $< | sed 's,.*/,,'`
-
-.texinfo.dvi:
-	TEXINPUTS=.:$$TEXINPUTS \
-	  MAKEINFO='$(MAKEINFO) -I $(srcdir)' $(TEXI2DVI) $<
-
-.txi.info:
-	@cd $(srcdir) && rm -f $@ $@-[0-9] $@-[0-9][0-9]
-	cd $(srcdir) \
-	  && $(MAKEINFO) `echo $< | sed 's,.*/,,'`
-
-.txi.dvi:
-	TEXINPUTS=.:$$TEXINPUTS \
-	  MAKEINFO='$(MAKEINFO) -I $(srcdir)' $(TEXI2DVI) $<
-
-.txi:
-	@cd $(srcdir) && rm -f $@ $@-[0-9] $@-[0-9][0-9]
-	cd $(srcdir) \
-	  && $(MAKEINFO) `echo $< | sed 's,.*/,,'`
+	$(AM_V_TEXI2DVI)TEXINPUTS="$(am__TEXINFO_TEX_DIR)$(PATH_SEPARATOR)$$TEXINPUTS" \
+	MAKEINFO='$(MAKEINFO) $(AM_MAKEINFOFLAGS) $(MAKEINFOFLAGS) -I $(srcdir)' \
+	$(TEXI2DVI) $(AM_V_texinfo) --build-dir=$(@:.dvi=.t2d) -o $@ $(AM_V_texidevnull) \
+	$<
+
+.texi.pdf:
+	$(AM_V_TEXI2PDF)TEXINPUTS="$(am__TEXINFO_TEX_DIR)$(PATH_SEPARATOR)$$TEXINPUTS" \
+	MAKEINFO='$(MAKEINFO) $(AM_MAKEINFOFLAGS) $(MAKEINFOFLAGS) -I $(srcdir)' \
+	$(TEXI2PDF) $(AM_V_texinfo) --build-dir=$(@:.pdf=.t2p) -o $@ $(AM_V_texidevnull) \
+	$<
+
+.texi.html:
+	$(AM_V_MAKEINFO)rm -rf $(@:.html=.htp)
+	$(AM_V_at)if $(MAKEINFOHTML) $(AM_MAKEINFOHTMLFLAGS) $(MAKEINFOFLAGS) -I $(srcdir) \
+	 -o $(@:.html=.htp) $<; \
+	then \
+	  rm -rf $@ && mv $(@:.html=.htp) $@; \
+	else \
+	  rm -rf $(@:.html=.htp); exit 1; \
+	fi
+$(srcdir)/bc.info: bc.texi 
+bc.dvi: bc.texi 
+bc.pdf: bc.texi 
+bc.html: bc.texi 
+$(srcdir)/dc.info: dc.texi 
+dc.dvi: dc.texi 
+dc.pdf: dc.texi 
+dc.html: dc.texi 
 .dvi.ps:
-	$(DVIPS) $< -o $@
+	$(AM_V_DVIPS)TEXINPUTS="$(am__TEXINFO_TEX_DIR)$(PATH_SEPARATOR)$$TEXINPUTS" \
+	$(DVIPS) $(AM_V_texinfo) -o $@ $<
 
-install-info-am: $(INFO_DEPS)
-	@$(NORMAL_INSTALL)
-	$(mkinstalldirs) $(DESTDIR)$(infodir)
-	@list='$(INFO_DEPS)'; \
-	for file in $$list; do \
-	  d=$(srcdir); \
-	  for ifile in `cd $$d && echo $$file $$file-[0-9] $$file-[0-9][0-9]`; do \
-	    if test -f $$d/$$ifile; then \
-	      echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) $$d/$$ifile $(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/$$ifile"; \
-	      $(INSTALL_DATA) $$d/$$ifile $(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/$$ifile; \
-	    else : ; fi; \
-	  done; \
+uninstall-dvi-am:
+	@$(NORMAL_UNINSTALL)
+	@list='$(DVIS)'; test -n "$(dvidir)" || list=; \
+	for p in $$list; do \
+	  $(am__strip_dir) \
+	  echo " rm -f '$(DESTDIR)$(dvidir)/$$f'"; \
+	  rm -f "$(DESTDIR)$(dvidir)/$$f"; \
 	done
-	@$(POST_INSTALL)
-	@if $(SHELL) -c 'install-info --version | sed 1q | fgrep -s -v -i debian' >/dev/null 2>&1; then \
+
+uninstall-html-am:
+	@$(NORMAL_UNINSTALL)
+	@list='$(HTMLS)'; test -n "$(htmldir)" || list=; \
+	for p in $$list; do \
+	  $(am__strip_dir) \
+	  echo " rm -rf '$(DESTDIR)$(htmldir)/$$f'"; \
+	  rm -rf "$(DESTDIR)$(htmldir)/$$f"; \
+	done
+
+uninstall-info-am:
+	@$(PRE_UNINSTALL)
+	@if test -d '$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)' && $(am__can_run_installinfo); then \
 	  list='$(INFO_DEPS)'; \
 	  for file in $$list; do \
-	    echo " install-info --info-dir=$(DESTDIR)$(infodir) $(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/$$file";\
-	    install-info --info-dir=$(DESTDIR)$(infodir) $(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/$$file || :;\
+	    relfile=`echo "$$file" | sed 's|^.*/||'`; \
+	    echo " install-info --info-dir='$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)' --remove '$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/$$relfile'"; \
+	    if install-info --info-dir="$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)" --remove "$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/$$relfile"; \
+	    then :; else test ! -f "$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/$$relfile" || exit 1; fi; \
 	  done; \
-	else : ; fi
-
-uninstall-info:
-	$(PRE_UNINSTALL)
-	@if $(SHELL) -c 'install-info --version | sed 1q | fgrep -s -v -i debian' >/dev/null 2>&1; then \
-	  ii=yes; \
-	else ii=; fi; \
-	list='$(INFO_DEPS)'; \
+	else :; fi
+	@$(NORMAL_UNINSTALL)
+	@list='$(INFO_DEPS)'; \
 	for file in $$list; do \
-	  test -z "$ii" \
-	    || install-info --info-dir=$(DESTDIR)$(infodir) --remove $$file; \
+	  relfile=`echo "$$file" | sed 's|^.*/||'`; \
+	  relfile_i=`echo "$$relfile" | sed 's|\.info$$||;s|$$|.i|'`; \
+	  (if test -d "$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)" && cd "$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)"; then \
+	     echo " cd '$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)' && rm -f $$relfile $$relfile-[0-9] $$relfile-[0-9][0-9] $$relfile_i[0-9] $$relfile_i[0-9][0-9]"; \
+	     rm -f $$relfile $$relfile-[0-9] $$relfile-[0-9][0-9] $$relfile_i[0-9] $$relfile_i[0-9][0-9]; \
+	   else :; fi); \
 	done
+
+uninstall-pdf-am:
 	@$(NORMAL_UNINSTALL)
-	list='$(INFO_DEPS)'; \
-	for file in $$list; do \
-	  (cd $(DESTDIR)$(infodir) && rm -f $$file $$file-[0-9] $$file-[0-9][0-9]); \
+	@list='$(PDFS)'; test -n "$(pdfdir)" || list=; \
+	for p in $$list; do \
+	  $(am__strip_dir) \
+	  echo " rm -f '$(DESTDIR)$(pdfdir)/$$f'"; \
+	  rm -f "$(DESTDIR)$(pdfdir)/$$f"; \
+	done
+
+uninstall-ps-am:
+	@$(NORMAL_UNINSTALL)
+	@list='$(PSS)'; test -n "$(psdir)" || list=; \
+	for p in $$list; do \
+	  $(am__strip_dir) \
+	  echo " rm -f '$(DESTDIR)$(psdir)/$$f'"; \
+	  rm -f "$(DESTDIR)$(psdir)/$$f"; \
 	done
 
 dist-info: $(INFO_DEPS)
+	@srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's|.|.|g'`; \
 	list='$(INFO_DEPS)'; \
 	for base in $$list; do \
-	  d=$(srcdir); \
-	  for file in `cd $$d && eval echo $$base*`; do \
-	    test -f $(distdir)/$$file \
-	    || ln $$d/$$file $(distdir)/$$file 2> /dev/null \
-	    || cp -p $$d/$$file $(distdir)/$$file; \
+	  case $$base in \
+	    $(srcdir)/*) base=`echo "$$base" | sed "s|^$$srcdirstrip/||"`;; \
+	  esac; \
+	  if test -f $$base; then d=.; else d=$(srcdir); fi; \
+	  base_i=`echo "$$base" | sed 's|\.info$$||;s|$$|.i|'`; \
+	  for file in $$d/$$base $$d/$$base-[0-9] $$d/$$base-[0-9][0-9] $$d/$$base_i[0-9] $$d/$$base_i[0-9][0-9]; do \
+	    if test -f $$file; then \
+	      relfile=`expr "$$file" : "$$d/\(.*\)"`; \
+	      test -f "$(distdir)/$$relfile" || \
+		cp -p $$file "$(distdir)/$$relfile"; \
+	    else :; fi; \
 	  done; \
 	done
 
 mostlyclean-aminfo:
-	-rm -f bc.aux bc.cp bc.cps bc.dvi bc.fn bc.fns bc.ky bc.kys bc.ps \
-	  bc.log bc.pg bc.toc bc.tp bc.tps bc.vr bc.vrs bc.op bc.tr \
-	  bc.cv bc.cn dc.aux dc.cp dc.cps dc.dvi dc.fn dc.fns dc.ky \
-	  dc.kys dc.ps dc.log dc.pg dc.toc dc.tp dc.tps dc.vr dc.vrs \
-	  dc.op dc.tr dc.cv dc.cn
+	-rm -rf bc.t2d bc.t2p dc.t2d dc.t2p
 
 clean-aminfo:
-
-distclean-aminfo:
+	-test -z "bc.dvi bc.pdf bc.ps bc.html dc.dvi dc.pdf dc.ps dc.html" \
+	|| rm -rf bc.dvi bc.pdf bc.ps bc.html dc.dvi dc.pdf dc.ps dc.html
 
 maintainer-clean-aminfo:
-	cd $(srcdir) && for i in $(INFO_DEPS); do \
-	  rm -f $$i; \
-	  if test "`echo $$i-[0-9]*`" != "$$i-[0-9]*"; then \
-	    rm -f $$i-[0-9]*; \
-	  fi; \
+	@list='$(INFO_DEPS)'; for i in $$list; do \
+	  i_i=`echo "$$i" | sed 's|\.info$$||;s|$$|.i|'`; \
+	  echo " rm -f $$i $$i-[0-9] $$i-[0-9][0-9] $$i_i[0-9] $$i_i[0-9][0-9]"; \
+	  rm -f $$i $$i-[0-9] $$i-[0-9][0-9] $$i_i[0-9] $$i_i[0-9][0-9]; \
 	done
-
-install-man1:
-	$(mkinstalldirs) $(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)
-	@list='$(man1_MANS)'; \
-	l2='$(man_MANS)'; for i in $$l2; do \
-	  case "$$i" in \
-	    *.1*) list="$$list $$i" ;; \
-	  esac; \
+install-man1: $(dist_man_MANS)
+	@$(NORMAL_INSTALL)
+	@list1=''; \
+	list2='$(dist_man_MANS)'; \
+	test -n "$(man1dir)" \
+	  && test -n "`echo $$list1$$list2`" \
+	  || exit 0; \
+	echo " $(MKDIR_P) '$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)'"; \
+	$(MKDIR_P) "$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)" || exit 1; \
+	{ for i in $$list1; do echo "$$i"; done;  \
+	if test -n "$$list2"; then \
+	  for i in $$list2; do echo "$$i"; done \
+	    | sed -n '/\.1[a-z]*$$/p'; \
+	fi; \
+	} | while read p; do \
+	  if test -f $$p; then d=; else d="$(srcdir)/"; fi; \
+	  echo "$$d$$p"; echo "$$p"; \
+	done | \
+	sed -e 'n;s,.*/,,;p;h;s,.*\.,,;s,^[^1][0-9a-z]*$$,1,;x' \
+	      -e 's,\.[0-9a-z]*$$,,;$(transform);G;s,\n,.,' | \
+	sed 'N;N;s,\n, ,g' | { \
+	list=; while read file base inst; do \
+	  if test "$$base" = "$$inst"; then list="$$list $$file"; else \
+	    echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) '$$file' '$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)/$$inst'"; \
+	    $(INSTALL_DATA) "$$file" "$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)/$$inst" || exit $$?; \
+	  fi; \
 	done; \
-	for i in $$list; do \
-	  if test -f $(srcdir)/$$i; then file=$(srcdir)/$$i; \
-	  else file=$$i; fi; \
-	  ext=`echo $$i | sed -e 's/^.*\\.//'`; \
-	  inst=`echo $$i | sed -e 's/\\.[0-9a-z]*$$//'`; \
-	  inst=`echo $$inst | sed '$(transform)'`.$$ext; \
-	  echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) $$file $(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)/$$inst"; \
-	  $(INSTALL_DATA) $$file $(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)/$$inst; \
-	done
+	for i in $$list; do echo "$$i"; done | $(am__base_list) | \
+	while read files; do \
+	  test -z "$$files" || { \
+	    echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files '$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)'"; \
+	    $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files "$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)" || exit $$?; }; \
+	done; }
 
 uninstall-man1:
-	@list='$(man1_MANS)'; \
-	l2='$(man_MANS)'; for i in $$l2; do \
-	  case "$$i" in \
-	    *.1*) list="$$list $$i" ;; \
-	  esac; \
-	done; \
-	for i in $$list; do \
-	  ext=`echo $$i | sed -e 's/^.*\\.//'`; \
-	  inst=`echo $$i | sed -e 's/\\.[0-9a-z]*$$//'`; \
-	  inst=`echo $$inst | sed '$(transform)'`.$$ext; \
-	  echo " rm -f $(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)/$$inst"; \
-	  rm -f $(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)/$$inst; \
-	done
-install-man: $(MANS)
-	@$(NORMAL_INSTALL)
-	$(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) install-man1
-uninstall-man:
 	@$(NORMAL_UNINSTALL)
-	$(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) uninstall-man1
-tags: TAGS
-TAGS:
+	@list=''; test -n "$(man1dir)" || exit 0; \
+	files=`{ for i in $$list; do echo "$$i"; done; \
+	l2='$(dist_man_MANS)'; for i in $$l2; do echo "$$i"; done | \
+	  sed -n '/\.1[a-z]*$$/p'; \
+	} | sed -e 's,.*/,,;h;s,.*\.,,;s,^[^1][0-9a-z]*$$,1,;x' \
+	      -e 's,\.[0-9a-z]*$$,,;$(transform);G;s,\n,.,'`; \
+	dir='$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)'; $(am__uninstall_files_from_dir)
+tags TAGS:
 
+ctags CTAGS:
 
-distdir = $(top_builddir)/$(PACKAGE)-$(VERSION)/$(subdir)
+cscope cscopelist:
 
-subdir = doc
 
 distdir: $(DISTFILES)
-	@for file in $(DISTFILES); do \
-	  d=$(srcdir); \
+	@srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*]/\\\\&/g'`; \
+	topsrcdirstrip=`echo "$(top_srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*]/\\\\&/g'`; \
+	list='$(DISTFILES)'; \
+	  dist_files=`for file in $$list; do echo $$file; done | \
+	  sed -e "s|^$$srcdirstrip/||;t" \
+	      -e "s|^$$topsrcdirstrip/|$(top_builddir)/|;t"`; \
+	case $$dist_files in \
+	  */*) $(MKDIR_P) `echo "$$dist_files" | \
+			   sed '/\//!d;s|^|$(distdir)/|;s,/[^/]*$$,,' | \
+			   sort -u` ;; \
+	esac; \
+	for file in $$dist_files; do \
+	  if test -f $$file || test -d $$file; then d=.; else d=$(srcdir); fi; \
 	  if test -d $$d/$$file; then \
-	    cp -pr $$/$$file $(distdir)/$$file; \
+	    dir=`echo "/$$file" | sed -e 's,/[^/]*$$,,'`; \
+	    if test -d "$(distdir)/$$file"; then \
+	      find "$(distdir)/$$file" -type d ! -perm -700 -exec chmod u+rwx {} \;; \
+	    fi; \
+	    if test -d $(srcdir)/$$file && test $$d != $(srcdir); then \
+	      cp -fpR $(srcdir)/$$file "$(distdir)$$dir" || exit 1; \
+	      find "$(distdir)/$$file" -type d ! -perm -700 -exec chmod u+rwx {} \;; \
+	    fi; \
+	    cp -fpR $$d/$$file "$(distdir)$$dir" || exit 1; \
 	  else \
-	    test -f $(distdir)/$$file \
-	    || ln $$d/$$file $(distdir)/$$file 2> /dev/null \
-	    || cp -p $$d/$$file $(distdir)/$$file || :; \
+	    test -f "$(distdir)/$$file" \
+	    || cp -p $$d/$$file "$(distdir)/$$file" \
+	    || exit 1; \
 	  fi; \
 	done
-	$(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) top_distdir="$(top_distdir)" distdir="$(distdir)" dist-info
-info-am: $(INFO_DEPS)
-info: info-am
-dvi-am: $(DVIS)
-dvi: dvi-am
+	$(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) \
+	  top_distdir="$(top_distdir)" distdir="$(distdir)" \
+	  dist-info
 check-am: all-am
 check: check-am
-installcheck-am:
-installcheck: installcheck-am
-install-exec-am:
+all-am: Makefile $(INFO_DEPS) $(MANS)
+installdirs:
+	for dir in "$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)" "$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)"; do \
+	  test -z "$$dir" || $(MKDIR_P) "$$dir"; \
+	done
+install: install-am
 install-exec: install-exec-am
-
-install-data-am: install-info-am install-man
 install-data: install-data-am
+uninstall: uninstall-am
 
 install-am: all-am
 	@$(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) install-exec-am install-data-am
-install: install-am
-uninstall-am: uninstall-info uninstall-man
-uninstall: uninstall-am
-all-am: Makefile $(INFO_DEPS) $(MANS)
-all-redirect: all-am
-install-strip:
-	$(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) AM_INSTALL_PROGRAM_FLAGS=-s install
-installdirs:
-	$(mkinstalldirs)  $(DESTDIR)$(infodir) $(DESTDIR)$(mandir)/man1
-
 
+installcheck: installcheck-am
+install-strip:
+	if test -z '$(STRIP)'; then \
+	  $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) INSTALL_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" \
+	    install_sh_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" INSTALL_STRIP_FLAG=-s \
+	      install; \
+	else \
+	  $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) INSTALL_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" \
+	    install_sh_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" INSTALL_STRIP_FLAG=-s \
+	    "INSTALL_PROGRAM_ENV=STRIPPROG='$(STRIP)'" install; \
+	fi
 mostlyclean-generic:
 
 clean-generic:
 
 distclean-generic:
-	-rm -f Makefile $(CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES)
-	-rm -f config.cache config.log stamp-h stamp-h[0-9]*
+	-test -z "$(CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES)" || rm -f $(CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES)
+	-test . = "$(srcdir)" || test -z "$(CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES)" || rm -f $(CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES)
 
 maintainer-clean-generic:
+	@echo "This command is intended for maintainers to use"
+	@echo "it deletes files that may require special tools to rebuild."
 	-test -z "$(MAINTAINERCLEANFILES)" || rm -f $(MAINTAINERCLEANFILES)
-mostlyclean-am:  mostlyclean-aminfo mostlyclean-generic
+clean: clean-am
 
-mostlyclean: mostlyclean-am
+clean-am: clean-aminfo clean-generic mostlyclean-am
 
-clean-am:  clean-aminfo clean-generic mostlyclean-am
+distclean: distclean-am
+	-rm -f Makefile
+distclean-am: clean-am distclean-generic
 
-clean: clean-am
+dvi: dvi-am
 
-distclean-am:  distclean-aminfo distclean-generic clean-am
+dvi-am: $(DVIS)
 
-distclean: distclean-am
+html: html-am
 
-maintainer-clean-am:  maintainer-clean-aminfo maintainer-clean-generic \
-		distclean-am
-	@echo "This command is intended for maintainers to use;"
-	@echo "it deletes files that may require special tools to rebuild."
+html-am: $(HTMLS)
+
+info: info-am
+
+info-am: $(INFO_DEPS)
+
+install-data-am: install-info-am install-man
+
+install-dvi: install-dvi-am
+
+install-dvi-am: $(DVIS)
+	@$(NORMAL_INSTALL)
+	@list='$(DVIS)'; test -n "$(dvidir)" || list=; \
+	if test -n "$$list"; then \
+	  echo " $(MKDIR_P) '$(DESTDIR)$(dvidir)'"; \
+	  $(MKDIR_P) "$(DESTDIR)$(dvidir)" || exit 1; \
+	fi; \
+	for p in $$list; do \
+	  if test -f "$$p"; then d=; else d="$(srcdir)/"; fi; \
+	  echo "$$d$$p"; \
+	done | $(am__base_list) | \
+	while read files; do \
+	  echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files '$(DESTDIR)$(dvidir)'"; \
+	  $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files "$(DESTDIR)$(dvidir)" || exit $$?; \
+	done
+install-exec-am:
+
+install-html: install-html-am
+
+install-html-am: $(HTMLS)
+	@$(NORMAL_INSTALL)
+	@list='$(HTMLS)'; list2=; test -n "$(htmldir)" || list=; \
+	if test -n "$$list"; then \
+	  echo " $(MKDIR_P) '$(DESTDIR)$(htmldir)'"; \
+	  $(MKDIR_P) "$(DESTDIR)$(htmldir)" || exit 1; \
+	fi; \
+	for p in $$list; do \
+	  if test -f "$$p" || test -d "$$p"; then d=; else d="$(srcdir)/"; fi; \
+	  $(am__strip_dir) \
+	  d2=$$d$$p; \
+	  if test -d "$$d2"; then \
+	    echo " $(MKDIR_P) '$(DESTDIR)$(htmldir)/$$f'"; \
+	    $(MKDIR_P) "$(DESTDIR)$(htmldir)/$$f" || exit 1; \
+	    echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) '$$d2'/* '$(DESTDIR)$(htmldir)/$$f'"; \
+	    $(INSTALL_DATA) "$$d2"/* "$(DESTDIR)$(htmldir)/$$f" || exit $$?; \
+	  else \
+	    list2="$$list2 $$d2"; \
+	  fi; \
+	done; \
+	test -z "$$list2" || { echo "$$list2" | $(am__base_list) | \
+	while read files; do \
+	  echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files '$(DESTDIR)$(htmldir)'"; \
+	  $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files "$(DESTDIR)$(htmldir)" || exit $$?; \
+	done; }
+install-info: install-info-am
+
+install-info-am: $(INFO_DEPS)
+	@$(NORMAL_INSTALL)
+	@srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's|.|.|g'`; \
+	list='$(INFO_DEPS)'; test -n "$(infodir)" || list=; \
+	if test -n "$$list"; then \
+	  echo " $(MKDIR_P) '$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)'"; \
+	  $(MKDIR_P) "$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)" || exit 1; \
+	fi; \
+	for file in $$list; do \
+	  case $$file in \
+	    $(srcdir)/*) file=`echo "$$file" | sed "s|^$$srcdirstrip/||"`;; \
+	  esac; \
+	  if test -f $$file; then d=.; else d=$(srcdir); fi; \
+	  file_i=`echo "$$file" | sed 's|\.info$$||;s|$$|.i|'`; \
+	  for ifile in $$d/$$file $$d/$$file-[0-9] $$d/$$file-[0-9][0-9] \
+	               $$d/$$file_i[0-9] $$d/$$file_i[0-9][0-9] ; do \
+	    if test -f $$ifile; then \
+	      echo "$$ifile"; \
+	    else : ; fi; \
+	  done; \
+	done | $(am__base_list) | \
+	while read files; do \
+	  echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files '$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)'"; \
+	  $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files "$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)" || exit $$?; done
+	@$(POST_INSTALL)
+	@if $(am__can_run_installinfo); then \
+	  list='$(INFO_DEPS)'; test -n "$(infodir)" || list=; \
+	  for file in $$list; do \
+	    relfile=`echo "$$file" | sed 's|^.*/||'`; \
+	    echo " install-info --info-dir='$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)' '$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/$$relfile'";\
+	    install-info --info-dir="$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)" "$(DESTDIR)$(infodir)/$$relfile" || :;\
+	  done; \
+	else : ; fi
+install-man: install-man1
+
+install-pdf: install-pdf-am
+
+install-pdf-am: $(PDFS)
+	@$(NORMAL_INSTALL)
+	@list='$(PDFS)'; test -n "$(pdfdir)" || list=; \
+	if test -n "$$list"; then \
+	  echo " $(MKDIR_P) '$(DESTDIR)$(pdfdir)'"; \
+	  $(MKDIR_P) "$(DESTDIR)$(pdfdir)" || exit 1; \
+	fi; \
+	for p in $$list; do \
+	  if test -f "$$p"; then d=; else d="$(srcdir)/"; fi; \
+	  echo "$$d$$p"; \
+	done | $(am__base_list) | \
+	while read files; do \
+	  echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files '$(DESTDIR)$(pdfdir)'"; \
+	  $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files "$(DESTDIR)$(pdfdir)" || exit $$?; done
+install-ps: install-ps-am
+
+install-ps-am: $(PSS)
+	@$(NORMAL_INSTALL)
+	@list='$(PSS)'; test -n "$(psdir)" || list=; \
+	if test -n "$$list"; then \
+	  echo " $(MKDIR_P) '$(DESTDIR)$(psdir)'"; \
+	  $(MKDIR_P) "$(DESTDIR)$(psdir)" || exit 1; \
+	fi; \
+	for p in $$list; do \
+	  if test -f "$$p"; then d=; else d="$(srcdir)/"; fi; \
+	  echo "$$d$$p"; \
+	done | $(am__base_list) | \
+	while read files; do \
+	  echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files '$(DESTDIR)$(psdir)'"; \
+	  $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files "$(DESTDIR)$(psdir)" || exit $$?; done
+installcheck-am:
 
 maintainer-clean: maintainer-clean-am
+	-rm -f Makefile
+maintainer-clean-am: distclean-am maintainer-clean-aminfo \
+	maintainer-clean-generic
+
+mostlyclean: mostlyclean-am
+
+mostlyclean-am: mostlyclean-aminfo mostlyclean-generic
+
+pdf: pdf-am
+
+pdf-am: $(PDFS)
+
+ps: ps-am
+
+ps-am: $(PSS)
+
+uninstall-am: uninstall-dvi-am uninstall-html-am uninstall-info-am \
+	uninstall-man uninstall-pdf-am uninstall-ps-am
+
+uninstall-man: uninstall-man1
+
+.MAKE: install-am install-strip
+
+.PHONY: all all-am check check-am clean clean-aminfo clean-generic \
+	cscopelist-am ctags-am dist-info distclean distclean-generic \
+	distdir dvi dvi-am html html-am info info-am install \
+	install-am install-data install-data-am install-dvi \
+	install-dvi-am install-exec install-exec-am install-html \
+	install-html-am install-info install-info-am install-man \
+	install-man1 install-pdf install-pdf-am install-ps \
+	install-ps-am install-strip installcheck installcheck-am \
+	installdirs maintainer-clean maintainer-clean-aminfo \
+	maintainer-clean-generic mostlyclean mostlyclean-aminfo \
+	mostlyclean-generic pdf pdf-am ps ps-am tags-am uninstall \
+	uninstall-am uninstall-dvi-am uninstall-html-am \
+	uninstall-info-am uninstall-man uninstall-man1 \
+	uninstall-pdf-am uninstall-ps-am
 
-.PHONY: install-info-am uninstall-info mostlyclean-aminfo \
-distclean-aminfo clean-aminfo maintainer-clean-aminfo install-man1 \
-uninstall-man1 install-man uninstall-man tags distdir info-am info \
-dvi-am dvi check check-am installcheck-am installcheck install-exec-am \
-install-exec install-data-am install-data install-am install \
-uninstall-am uninstall all-redirect all-am all installdirs \
-mostlyclean-generic distclean-generic clean-generic \
-maintainer-clean-generic clean mostlyclean distclean maintainer-clean
 
+bc.dvi bc.pdf bc.html $(srcdir)/bc.info \
+dc.dvi dc.pdf dc.html $(srcdir)/dc.info :  texi-ver.incl
 
 # Tell versions [3.59,3.63) of GNU make to not export all variables.
 # Otherwise a system limit (for SysV at least) may be exceeded.
diff --git a/doc/bc.1 b/doc/bc.1
index c0b03f7..eeda08b 100644
--- a/doc/bc.1
+++ b/doc/bc.1
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
 .\" bc.1 - the *roff document processor source for the bc manual
 .\"
 .\" This file is part of GNU bc.
-.\" Copyright (C) 1991-1994, 1997, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+.\" Copyright (C) 1991-1994, 1997, 2000, 2003, 2006, 2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
 .\"
 .\" This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
 .\" it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
@@ -17,8 +17,8 @@
 .\" You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
 .\" along with this program; see the file COPYING.  If not, write to:
 .\"   The Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.\"   59 Temple Place, Suite 330
-.\"   Boston, MA 02111 USA
+.\"   51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor
+.\"   Boston, MA 02110-1301  USA
 .\"
 .\" You may contact the author by:
 .\" e-mail: philnelson@acm.org
@@ -28,13 +28,11 @@
 .\" Bellingham, WA 98226-9062
 .\"
 .\"
-.TH bc 1 .\" "Command Manual" v1.06 "Sept 12, 2000"
+.TH bc 1 "2006-06-11" "GNU Project"
 .SH NAME
 bc - An arbitrary precision calculator language
 .SH SYNTAX
 \fBbc\fR [ \fB-hlwsqv\fR ] [long-options] [ \fI file ...\fR ]
-.SH VERSION
-This man page documents GNU bc version 1.06.
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 \fBbc\fR is a language that supports arbitrary precision numbers
 with interactive execution of statements.  There are some similarities
@@ -75,9 +73,9 @@ part and the fractional part.  All numbers are represented internally
 in decimal and all computation is done in decimal.  (This version
 truncates results from divide and multiply operations.)  There are two
 attributes of numbers, the length and the scale.  The length is the
-total number of significant decimal digits in a number and the scale
-is the total number of decimal digits after the decimal point.  For
-example:
+total number of decimal digits used by \fBbc\fR to represent a number
+and the scale is the total number of decimal digits after the decimal
+point.  For example:
 .nf
 .RS
  .000001 has a length of 6 and scale of 6.
@@ -124,15 +122,16 @@ detail later, are defined when encountered.)
 A simple expression is just a constant. \fBbc\fR converts constants
 into internal decimal numbers using the current input base, specified
 by the variable \fBibase\fR. (There is an exception in functions.)
-The legal values of \fBibase\fR are 2 through 16.  Assigning a
-value outside this range to \fBibase\fR will result in a value of 2
-or 16.  Input numbers may contain the characters 0-9 and A-F. (Note:
-They must be capitals.  Lower case letters are variable names.)
-Single digit numbers always have the value of the digit regardless of
-the value of \fBibase\fR. (i.e. A = 10.)  For multi-digit numbers,
-\fBbc\fR changes all input digits greater or equal to ibase to the
-value of \fBibase\fR-1.  This makes the number \fBFFF\fR always be
-the largest 3 digit number of the input base.
+The legal values of \fBibase\fR are 2 through 36. (Bases greater than
+16 are an extension.) Assigning a value outside this range to
+\fBibase\fR will result in a value of 2 or 36.  Input numbers may
+contain the characters 0-9 and A-Z. (Note: They must be capitals.
+Lower case letters are variable names.)  Single digit numbers always
+have the value of the digit regardless of the value of
+\fBibase\fR. (i.e. A = 10.)  For multi-digit numbers, \fBbc\fR changes
+all input digits greater or equal to ibase to the value of
+\fBibase\fR-1.  This makes the number \fBZZZ\fR always be the largest
+3 digit number of the input base.
 .PP
 Full expressions are similar to many other high level languages.
 Since there is only one kind of number, there are no rules for mixing
@@ -207,7 +206,7 @@ This is equivalent to "var = var <op> expr" with the exception that
 the "var" part is evaluated only once.  This can make a difference if
 "var" is an array.
 .PP
- Relational expressions are a special kind of expression
+Relational expressions are a special kind of expression
 that always evaluate to 0 or 1, 0 if the relation is false and 1 if
 the relation is true.  These may appear in any legal expression.
 (POSIX bc requires that relational expressions are used only in if,
@@ -434,12 +433,12 @@ A function call is just an expression of the form
 .PP
 Parameters are numbers or arrays (an extension).  In the function definition,
 zero or more parameters are defined by listing their names separated by
-commas.  Numbers are only call by value parameters.  Arrays are only
-call by variable.  Arrays are specified in the parameter definition by
+commas.  All parameters are call by value parameters.  
+Arrays are specified in the parameter definition by
 the notation "\fIname\fB[]\fR".   In the function call, actual parameters
 are full expressions for number parameters.  The same notation is used
 for passing arrays as for defining array parameters.  The named array is
-passed by variable to the function.  Since function definitions are dynamic,
+passed by value to the function.  Since function definitions are dynamic,
 parameter numbers and types are checked when a function is called.  Any
 mismatch in number or types of parameters will cause a runtime error.
 A runtime error will also occur for the call to an undefined function.
@@ -478,12 +477,12 @@ will be ignored during the execution of the function except for the
 standard function \fBread\fR, which will always use the current value
 of \fBibase\fR for conversion of numbers.
 .PP
-As an extension, the format of the definition has been slightly relaxed.
-The standard requires the opening brace be on the same line as the 
-\fBdefine\fR keyword and all other parts must be on following lines.
-This version of \fBbc\fR will allow any number of newlines before and
-after the opening brace of the function.  For example, the following
-definitions are legal.
+Several extensions have been added to functions.  First, the format of
+the definition has been slightly relaxed.  The standard requires the
+opening brace be on the same line as the \fBdefine\fR keyword and all
+other parts must be on following lines.  This version of \fBbc\fR will
+allow any number of newlines before and after the opening brace of the
+function.  For example, the following definitions are legal.
 .nf
 .RS
 \f(CW
@@ -493,6 +492,36 @@ define d (n)
 \fR
 .RE
 .fi
+.PP
+Functions may be defined as \fBvoid\fR.  A void
+funtion returns no value and thus may not be used in any place that needs
+a value.  A void function does not produce any output when called by itself
+on an input line.  The key word \fBvoid\fR is placed between the key word
+\fBdefine\fR and the function name.  For example, consider the following
+session.
+.nf
+.RS
+\f(CW
+define py (y) { print "--->", y, "<---", "\en"; }
+define void px (x) { print "--->", x, "<---", "\en"; }
+py(1)
+--->1<---
+0
+px(1)
+--->1<---
+\fR
+.RE
+.fi
+Since \fBpy\fR is not a void function, the call of \fBpy(1)\fR prints
+the desired output and then prints a second line that is the value of
+the function.  Since the value of a function that is not given an
+explicit return statement is zero, the zero is printed.  For \fBpx(1)\fR,
+no zero is printed because the function is a void function.
+.PP
+Also, call by variable for arrays was added.  To declare
+a call by variable array, the declaration of the array parameter in the
+function definition looks like "\fI*name\fB[]\fR".  The call to the
+function remains the same as call by value arrays. 
 .SS MATH LIBRARY
 If \fBbc\fR is invoked with the \fB-l\fR option, a math library is preloaded
 and the default scale is set to 20.   The math functions will calculate their
@@ -509,7 +538,7 @@ The natural logarithm of x.
 .IP "e (\fIx\fR)"
 The exponential function of raising e to the value x.
 .IP "j (\fIn,x\fR)"
-The bessel function of integer order n of x.
+The Bessel function of integer order n of x.
 .SS EXAMPLES
 In /bin/sh,  the following will assign the value of "pi" to the shell
 variable \fBpi\fR.
@@ -639,23 +668,23 @@ A major source of differences is
 extensions, where a feature is extended to add more functionality and
 additions, where new features are added. 
 The following is the list of differences and extensions.
-.IP LANG environment
+.IP "LANG environment"
 This version does not conform to the POSIX standard in the processing
 of the LANG environment variable and all environment variables starting
 with LC_.
-.IP names
+.IP "names"
 Traditional and POSIX
 .B bc
 have single letter names for functions, variables and arrays.  They have
 been extended to be multi-character names that start with a letter and
 may contain letters, numbers and the underscore character.
-.IP Strings
+.IP "Strings"
 Strings are not allowed to contain NUL characters.  POSIX says all characters
 must be included in strings.
-.IP last
+.IP "last"
 POSIX \fBbc\fR does not have a \fBlast\fR variable.  Some implementations
 of \fBbc\fR use the period (.) in a similar way.  
-.IP comparisons
+.IP "comparisons"
 POSIX \fBbc\fR allows comparisons only in the if statement, the while
 statement, and the second expression of the for statement.  Also, only
 one relational operation is allowed in each of those statements.
@@ -737,19 +766,19 @@ The following are the limits currently in place for this
 .B bc
 processor.  Some of them may have been changed by an installation.
 Use the limits statement to see the actual values.
-.IP BC_BASE_MAX
+.IP "BC_BASE_MAX"
 The maximum output base is currently set at 999.  The maximum input base
 is 16.
-.IP BC_DIM_MAX
+.IP "BC_DIM_MAX"
 This is currently an arbitrary limit of 65535 as distributed.  Your
 installation may be different.
-.IP BC_SCALE_MAX
+.IP "BC_SCALE_MAX"
 The number of digits after the decimal point is limited to INT_MAX digits.
 Also, the number of digits before the decimal point is limited to INT_MAX
 digits.
-.IP BC_STRING_MAX
+.IP "BC_STRING_MAX"
 The limit on the number of characters in a string is INT_MAX characters.
-.IP exponent
+.IP "exponent"
 The value of the exponent in the raise operation (^) is limited to LONG_MAX.
 .IP "variable names"
 The current limit on the number of unique names is 32767 for each of
@@ -761,16 +790,18 @@ This is the same as the \fB-s\fR option.
 .IP "BC_ENV_ARGS"
 This is another mechanism to get arguments to \fBbc\fR.  The
 format is the same as the command line arguments.  These arguments
-are processed first, so any files listed in the environent arguments
+are processed first, so any files listed in the environment arguments
 are processed before any command line argument files.  This allows
 the user to set up "standard" options and files to be processed
 at every invocation of \fBbc\fR.  The files in the environment
 variables would typically contain function definitions for functions
 the user wants defined every time \fBbc\fR is run.
 .IP "BC_LINE_LENGTH"
-This should be an integer specifing the number of characters in an
+This should be an integer specifying the number of characters in an
 output line for numbers. This includes the backslash and newline characters
-for long numbers.
+for long numbers.  As an extension, the value of zero disables the 
+multi-line feature.  Any other value of this variable that is less than
+3 sets the line length to 70.
 .SH DIAGNOSTICS
 If any file on the command line can not be opened, \fBbc\fR will report
 that the file is unavailable and terminate.  Also, there are compile
diff --git a/doc/bc.info b/doc/bc.info
index 2aa2685..58bb8d4 100644
--- a/doc/bc.info
+++ b/doc/bc.info
@@ -1,4 +1,9 @@
-This is bc.info, produced by makeinfo version 4.0 from bc.texi.
+This is ../../doc/bc.info, produced by makeinfo version 4.8 from
+../../doc/bc.texi.
+
+START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
+* bc: (bc).                    An arbitrary precision calculator language.
+END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
 
 
 File: bc.info,  Node: Top,  Next: Introduction,  Prev: (dir),  Up: (dir)
@@ -12,15 +17,15 @@ File: bc.info,  Node: Top,  Next: Introduction,  Prev: (dir),  Up: (dir)
 * Functions::
 * Examples::
 * Readline and Libedit Options::
-* GNU `bc' and Other Implementations::
+* Comparison with Other Implementations::
 * Limits::
 * Environment Variables::
 
 
 File: bc.info,  Node: Introduction,  Next: Basic Elements,  Prev: Top,  Up: Top
 
-Introduction
-************
+1 Introduction
+**************
 
 * Menu:
 
@@ -30,10 +35,10 @@ Introduction
 
 File: bc.info,  Node: Description,  Next: Command Line Options,  Prev: Introduction,  Up: Introduction
 
-Description
-===========
+1.1 Description
+===============
 
-   `bc' [ -hlwsqv ] [long-options] [  FILE ... ]
+`bc' [ -hlwsqv ] [long-options] [  FILE ... ]
 
    `bc' is a language that supports arbitrary precision numbers with
 interactive execution of statements.  There are some similarities in
@@ -63,10 +68,10 @@ better product due to his involvement.
 
 File: bc.info,  Node: Command Line Options,  Next: Numbers,  Prev: Description,  Up: Introduction
 
-Command Line Options
-====================
+1.2 Command Line Options
+========================
 
-   `bc' takes the following options from the command line:
+`bc' takes the following options from the command line:
 `-h, --help'
      Print the usage and exit.
 
@@ -85,11 +90,12 @@ Command Line Options
 `-v, --version'
      Print the version number and copyright and quit.
 
+
 
 File: bc.info,  Node: Basic Elements,  Next: Expressions,  Prev: Introduction,  Up: Top
 
-Basic Elements
-**************
+2 Basic Elements
+****************
 
 * Menu:
 
@@ -100,27 +106,27 @@ Basic Elements
 
 File: bc.info,  Node: Numbers,  Next: Variables,  Prev: Command Line Options,  Up: Basic Elements
 
-Numbers
-=======
+2.1 Numbers
+===========
 
-   The most basic element in `bc' is the number.  Numbers are arbitrary
+The most basic element in `bc' is the number.  Numbers are arbitrary
 precision numbers.  This precision is both in the integer part and the
 fractional part.  All numbers are represented internally in decimal and
 all computation is done in decimal.  (This version truncates results
 from divide and multiply operations.)  There are two attributes of
 numbers, the length and the scale.  The length is the total number of
-significant decimal digits in a number and the scale is the total number
-of decimal digits after the decimal point.  For example, .000001 has a
-length of 6 and scale of 6, while 1935.000 has a length of 7 and a scale
-of 3.
+digits used by `bc' to represent a number and the scale is the total
+number of decimal digits after the decimal point.  For example, .000001
+has a length of 6 and scale of 6, while 1935.000 has a length of 7 and
+a scale of 3.
 
 
 File: bc.info,  Node: Variables,  Next: Comments,  Prev: Numbers,  Up: Basic Elements
 
-Variables
-=========
+2.2 Variables
+=============
 
-   Numbers are stored in two types of variables, simple variables and
+Numbers are stored in two types of variables, simple variables and
 arrays.  Both simple variables and array variables are named.  Names
 begin with a letter followed by any number of letters, digits and
 underscores.  All letters must be lower case.  (Full alphanumeric names
@@ -140,10 +146,10 @@ assigned to them as well as used in expressions.
 
 File: bc.info,  Node: Comments,  Prev: Variables,  Up: Basic Elements
 
-Comments
-========
+2.3 Comments
+============
 
-   Comments in `bc' start with the characters `/*' and end with the
+Comments in `bc' start with the characters `/*' and end with the
 characters `*/'.  Comments may start anywhere and appear as a single
 space in the input.  (This causes comments to delimit other input
 items.  For example, a comment can not be found in the middle of a
@@ -158,8 +164,8 @@ character is not part of the comment and is processed normally.
 
 File: bc.info,  Node: Expressions,  Next: Statements,  Prev: Basic Elements,  Up: Top
 
-Expressions
-***********
+3 Expressions
+*************
 
 * Menu:
 
@@ -173,26 +179,27 @@ Expressions
 
 File: bc.info,  Node: About Expressions and Special Variables,  Next: Basic Expressions,  Prev: Expressions,  Up: Expressions
 
-About Expressions and Special Variables
-=======================================
+3.1 About Expressions and Special Variables
+===========================================
 
-   The numbers are manipulated by expressions and statements.  Since
-the language was designed to be interactive, statements and expressions
-are executed as soon as possible.  There is no main program.  Instead,
-code is executed as it is encountered.  (Functions, discussed in detail
+The numbers are manipulated by expressions and statements.  Since the
+language was designed to be interactive, statements and expressions are
+executed as soon as possible.  There is no main program.  Instead, code
+is executed as it is encountered.  (Functions, discussed in detail
 later, are defined when encountered.)
 
    A simple expression is just a constant. `bc' converts constants into
 internal decimal numbers using the current input base, specified by the
 variable IBASE. (There is an exception in functions.)  The legal values
-of IBASE are 2 through 16.  Assigning a value outside this range to
-IBASE will result in a value of 2 or 16.  Input numbers may contain the
-characters 0-9 and A-F. (Note: They must be capitals.  Lower case
-letters are variable names.)  Single digit numbers always have the
-value of the digit regardless of the value of IBASE. (i.e. A = 10.)
-For multi-digit numbers, `bc' changes all input digits greater or equal
-to IBASE to the value of IBASE-1.  This makes the number `FFF' always
-be the largest 3 digit number of the input base.
+of IBASE are 2 through 36.  (Bases greater than 16 are an extension.)
+Assigning a value outside this range to IBASE will result in a value of
+2 or 36.  Input numbers may contain the characters 0-9 and A-Z. (Note:
+They must be capitals.  Lower case letters are variable names.)  Single
+digit numbers always have the value of the digit regardless of the
+value of IBASE. (i.e. A = 10.)  For multi-digit numbers, `bc' changes
+all input digits greater or equal to IBASE to the value of IBASE-1.
+This makes the number `ZZZ' always be the largest 3 digit number of the
+input base.
 
    Full expressions are similar to many other high level languages.
 Since there is only one kind of number, there are no rules for mixing
@@ -205,11 +212,11 @@ number representable by a C integer.
 
 File: bc.info,  Node: Basic Expressions,  Next: Relational Expressions,  Prev: About Expressions and Special Variables,  Up: Expressions
 
-Basic Expressions
-=================
+3.2 Basic Expressions
+=====================
 
-   In the following descriptions of legal expressions, "expr" refers to
-a complete expression and "VAR" refers to a simple or an array variable.
+In the following descriptions of legal expressions, "expr" refers to a
+complete expression and "VAR" refers to a simple or an array variable.
 A simple variable is just a
 
    NAME
@@ -290,10 +297,10 @@ scale of the expressions involved.
 
 File: bc.info,  Node: Relational Expressions,  Next: Boolean Expressions,  Prev: Basic Expressions,  Up: Expressions
 
-Relational Expressions
-======================
+3.3 Relational Expressions
+==========================
 
-   Relational expressions are a special kind of expression that always
+Relational expressions are a special kind of expression that always
 evaluate to 0 or 1, 0 if the relation is false and 1 if the relation is
 true.  These may appear in any legal expression.  (POSIX `bc' requires
 that relational expressions are used only in `if', `while', and `for'
@@ -321,13 +328,13 @@ relational operators are
 
 File: bc.info,  Node: Boolean Expressions,  Next: Precedence,  Prev: Relational Expressions,  Up: Expressions
 
-Boolean Expressions
-===================
+3.4 Boolean Expressions
+=======================
 
-   Boolean operations are also legal.  (POSIX `bc' does NOT have
-boolean operations). The result of all boolean operations are 0 and 1
-(for false and true) as in relational expressions.  The boolean
-operators are:
+Boolean operations are also legal.  (POSIX `bc' does NOT have boolean
+operations). The result of all boolean operations are 0 and 1 (for
+false and true) as in relational expressions.  The boolean operators
+are:
 
 `!expr'
      The result is 1 if expr is 0.
@@ -341,10 +348,10 @@ operators are:
 
 File: bc.info,  Node: Precedence,  Next: Special Expressions,  Prev: Boolean Expressions,  Up: Expressions
 
-Precedence
-==========
+3.5 Precedence
+==============
 
-   The expression precedence is as follows: (lowest to highest)
+The expression precedence is as follows: (lowest to highest)
 
      || operator, left associative
      && operator, left associative
@@ -373,15 +380,15 @@ assignment operators.
 
 File: bc.info,  Node: Special Expressions,  Prev: Precedence,  Up: Expressions
 
-Special Expressions
-===================
+3.6 Special Expressions
+=======================
 
-   There are a few more special expressions that are provided in `bc'.
+There are a few more special expressions that are provided in `bc'.
 These have to do with user-defined functions and standard functions.
 They all appear as "NAME`('PARAMETERS`)'".  *Note Functions::, for
 user-defined functions.  The standard functions are:
 
-`length ( expression )'
+`length ( EXPRESSION )'
      The value of the length function is the number of significant
      digits in the expression.
 
@@ -395,11 +402,11 @@ user-defined functions.  The standard functions are:
      function is the number read from the standard input using the
      current value of the variable IBASE for the conversion base.
 
-`scale ( expression )'
+`scale ( EXPRESSION )'
      The value of the `scale' function is the number of digits after the
      decimal point in the expression.
 
-`sqrt ( expression )'
+`sqrt ( EXPRESSION )'
      The value of the `sqrt' function is the square root of the
      expression.  If the expression is negative, a run time error is
      generated.
@@ -407,8 +414,8 @@ user-defined functions.  The standard functions are:
 
 File: bc.info,  Node: Statements,  Next: Functions,  Prev: Expressions,  Up: Top
 
-Statements
-**********
+4 Statements
+************
 
 * Menu:
 
@@ -428,7 +435,7 @@ statements separated by semicolons and newlines.  The following is a
 list of `bc' statements and what they do: (Things enclosed in brackets
 ( [ ] ) are optional parts of the statement.)
 
-EXPRESSION
+`EXPRESSION'
      This statement does one of two things.  If the expression starts
      with "<variable> <assignment> ...", it is considered to be an
      assignment statement.  If the expression is not an assignment
@@ -459,13 +466,13 @@ EXPRESSION
      may allow the use of a single period (.) which is not part of a
      number as a short hand notation for for LAST.)
 
-STRING
+`STRING'
      The string is printed to the output.  Strings start with a double
      quote character and contain all characters until the next double
      quote character.  All characters are taken literally, including
      any newline.  No newline character is printed after the string.
 
-`PRINT' LIST
+`print LIST'
      The `print' statement (an extension) provides another method of
      output.  The LIST is a list of strings and expressions separated by
      commas.  Each string or expression is printed in the order of the
@@ -479,24 +486,24 @@ STRING
      (tab), and "\e" (backslash).  Any other character following the
      backslash will be ignored.
 
-{ STATEMENT_LIST }
+`{ STATEMENT_LIST }'
      This is the compound statement.  It allows multiple statements to
      be grouped together for execution.
 
-`IF' ( EXPRESSION ) STATEMENT1 [`ELSE' STATEMENT2]
+`if ( EXPRESSION ) STATEMENT1 [else STATEMENT2]'
      The if statement evaluates the expression and executes statement1
      or statement2 depending on the value of the expression.  If the
      expression is non-zero, statement1 is executed.  If statement2 is
      present and the value of the expression is 0, then statement2 is
      executed.  (The `else' clause is an extension.)
 
-`WHILE' ( EXPRESSION ) STATEMENT
+`while ( EXPRESSION ) STATEMENT'
      The while statement will execute the statement while the expression
      is non-zero.  It evaluates the expression before each execution of
      the statement.   Termination of the loop is caused by a zero
      expression value or the execution of a `break' statement.
 
-`FOR' ( [EXPRESSION1] ; [EXPRESSION2] ; [EXPRESSION3] ) STATEMENT
+`for ( [EXPRESSION1] ; [EXPRESSION2] ; [EXPRESSION3] ) STATEMENT'
      The `for' statement controls repeated execution of the statement.
      EXPRESSION1 is evaluated before the loop.  EXPRESSION2 is
      evaluated before each execution of the statement.  If it is
@@ -516,36 +523,35 @@ STRING
              expression3;
           }
 
-`BREAK'
+`break'
      This statement causes a forced exit of the most recent enclosing
      `while' statement or `for' statement.
 
-`CONTINUE'
+`continue'
      The `continue' statement (an extension)  causes the most recent
      enclosing `for' statement to start the next iteration.
 
-`HALT'
+`halt'
      The `halt' statement (an extension) is an executed statement that
      causes the `bc' processor to quit only when it is executed.  For
      example, "if (0 == 1) halt" will not cause `bc' to terminate
      because the `halt' is not executed.
 
-`RETURN'
+`return'
      Return the value 0 from a function.  (*Note Functions::.)
 
-`RETURN' ( EXPRESSION )
+`return ( EXPRESSION )'
      Return the value of the expression from a function.  (*Note
      Functions::.)  As an extension, the parenthesis are not required.
 
 
 File: bc.info,  Node: Pseudo Statements,  Prev: Statements,  Up: Statements
 
-Pseudo Statements
-=================
+4.1 Pseudo Statements
+=====================
 
-   These statements are not statements in the traditional sense.  They
-are not executed statements.  Their function is performed at "compile"
-time.
+These statements are not statements in the traditional sense.  They are
+not executed statements.  Their function is performed at "compile" time.
 
 `limits'
      Print the local limits enforced by the local version of `bc'.  This
@@ -562,8 +568,8 @@ time.
 
 File: bc.info,  Node: Functions,  Next: Examples,  Prev: Statements,  Up: Top
 
-Functions
-*********
+5 Functions
+***********
 
 * Menu:
 
@@ -585,16 +591,16 @@ definition.  A function is defined as follows:
 
    Parameters are numbers or arrays (an extension).  In the function
 definition, zero or more parameters are defined by listing their names
-separated by commas.  Numbers are only call by value parameters.
-Arrays are only call by variable.  Arrays are specified in the
-parameter definition by the notation "NAME`[ ]'".   In the function
-call, actual parameters are full expressions for number parameters.
-The same notation is used for passing arrays as for defining array
-parameters.  The named array is passed by variable to the function.
-Since function definitions are dynamic, parameter numbers and types are
-checked when a function is called.  Any mismatch in number or types of
-parameters will cause a runtime error.  A runtime error will also occur
-for the call to an undefined function.
+separated by commas.  All parameters  are call by value parameters.
+Arrays are specified in the parameter definition by the notation
+"NAME`[ ]'".   In the function call, actual parameters are full
+expressions for number parameters.  The same notation is used for
+passing arrays as for defining array parameters.  The named array is
+passed by value to the function.  Since function definitions are
+dynamic, parameter numbers and types are checked when a function is
+called.  Any mismatch in number or types of parameters will cause a
+runtime error.  A runtime error will also occur for the call to an
+undefined function.
 
    The AUTO_LIST is an optional list of variables that are for "local"
 use.  The syntax of the auto list (if present) is "`auto' NAME, ... ;".
@@ -630,24 +636,49 @@ ignored during the execution of the function except for the standard
 function `read', which will always use the current value of IBASE for
 conversion of numbers.
 
-   As an extension, the format of the definition has been slightly
-relaxed.  The standard requires the opening brace be on the same line
-as the `define' keyword and all other parts must be on following lines.
-This version of `bc' will allow any number of newlines before and after
-the opening brace of the function.  For example, the following
-definitions are legal.
+   Several extensions have been added to functions.  First, the format
+of the definition has been slightly relaxed.  The standard requires the
+opening brace be on the same line as the `define' keyword and all other
+parts must be on following lines.  This version of `bc' will allow any
+number of newlines before and after the opening brace of the function.
+For example, the following definitions are legal.
 
         define d (n) { return (2*n); }
         define d (n)
             { return (2*n); }
 
+   Functions may be defined as `void'.  A void funtion returns no value
+and thus may not be used in any place that needs a value.  A void
+function does not produce any output when called by itself on an input
+line.  The key word `void' is placed between the key word `define' and
+the function name.  For example, consider the following session.
+
+     define py (y) { print "--->", y, "<---", "\n"; }
+     define void px (x) { print "--->", x, "<---", "\n"; }
+     py(1)
+     --->1<---
+     0
+     px(1)
+     --->1<---
+
+   Since `py' is not a void function, the call of `py(1)' prints the
+desired output and then prints a second line that is the value of the
+function.  Since the value of a function that is not given an explicit
+return statement is zero, the zero is printed.  For `px(1)', no zero is
+printed because the function is a void function.
+
+   Also, call by variable for arrays was added.  To declare a call by
+variable array, the declaration of the array parameter in the function
+definition looks like "`*'NAME`[]'".  The call to the function remains
+the same as call by value arrays.
+
 
 File: bc.info,  Node: Math Library Functions,  Prev: Functions,  Up: Functions
 
-Math Library Functions
-======================
+5.1 Math Library Functions
+==========================
 
-   If `bc' is invoked with the `-l' option, a math library is preloaded
+If `bc' is invoked with the `-l' option, a math library is preloaded
 and the default SCALE is set to 20.  The math functions will calculate
 their results to the scale set at the time of their call.  The math
 library defines the following functions:
@@ -664,19 +695,19 @@ library defines the following functions:
 `l (X)'
      The natural logarithm of X.
 
-`E (X)'
+`e (X)'
      The exponential function of raising E to the value X.
 
-`J (N,X)'
-     The bessel function of integer order N of X.
+`j (N, X)'
+     The Bessel function of integer order N of X.
 
 
 File: bc.info,  Node: Examples,  Next: Readline and Libedit Options,  Prev: Functions,  Up: Top
 
-Examples
-********
+6 Examples
+**********
 
-   In /bin/sh,  the following will assign the value of "pi" to the shell
+In /bin/sh,  the following will assign the value of "pi" to the shell
 variable PI.
 
      pi=$(echo "scale=10; 4*a(1)" | bc -l)
@@ -686,21 +717,21 @@ the math library.  This function is written in POSIX `bc'.
 
 
      scale = 20
-     
+
      /* Uses the fact that e^x = (e^(x/2))^2
         When x is small enough, we use the series:
           e^x = 1 + x + x^2/2! + x^3/3! + ...
      */
-     
+
      define e(x) {
        auto  a, d, e, f, i, m, v, z
-     
+
        /* Check the sign of x. */
        if (x<0) {
          m = 1
          x = -x
        }
-     
+
        /* Precondition x. */
        z = scale;
        scale = 4 + z + .44*x;
@@ -708,12 +739,12 @@ the math library.  This function is written in POSIX `bc'.
          f += 1;
          x /= 2;
        }
-     
+
        /* Initialize the variables. */
        v = 1+x
        a = x
        d = 1
-     
+
        for (i=2; 1; i++) {
          e = (a *= x) / (d *= i)
          if (e == 0) {
@@ -736,7 +767,7 @@ without having to retype it at every use.
      print "\nCheck book program\n!"
      print "  Remember, deposits are negative transactions.\n"
      print "  Exit by a 0 transaction.\n\n"
-     
+
      print "Initial balance? "; bal = read()
      bal /= 1
      print "\n"
@@ -758,12 +789,12 @@ without having to retype it at every use.
      }
 
 
-File: bc.info,  Node: Readline and Libedit Options,  Next: GNU `bc' and Other Implementations,  Prev: Examples,  Up: Top
+File: bc.info,  Node: Readline and Libedit Options,  Next: Comparison with Other Implementations,  Prev: Examples,  Up: Top
 
-Readline and Libedit Options
-****************************
+7 Readline and Libedit Options
+******************************
 
-   GNU `bc' can be compiled (via a configure option) to use the GNU
+GNU `bc' can be compiled (via a configure option) to use the GNU
 `readline' input editor library or the BSD `libedit' library.  This
 allows the user to do more editing of lines before sending them to
 `bc'.  It also allows for a history of previous lines typed.  When this
@@ -778,14 +809,14 @@ libraries.  One can not enable both `readline' and `libedit' at the
 same time.
 
 
-File: bc.info,  Node: GNU `bc' and Other Implementations,  Next: Limits,  Prev: Readline and Libedit Options,  Up: Top
+File: bc.info,  Node: Comparison with Other Implementations,  Next: Limits,  Prev: Readline and Libedit Options,  Up: Top
 
-GNU `bc' and Other Implementations
-**********************************
+8 Comparison with Other Implementations
+***************************************
 
-   This version of `bc' was implemented from the POSIX P1003.2/D11
-draft and contains several differences and extensions relative to the
-draft and traditional implementations.  It is not implemented in the
+This version of `bc' was implemented from the POSIX P1003.2/D11 draft
+and contains several differences and extensions relative to the draft
+and traditional implementations.  It is not implemented in the
 traditional way using `dc'.  This version is a single process which
 parses and runs a byte code translation of the program.  There is an
 "undocumented" option (-c) that causes the program to output the byte
@@ -796,51 +827,51 @@ for debugging the parser and preparing the math library.
 extended to add more functionality and additions, where new features
 are added.  The following is the list of differences and extensions.
 
-LANG ENVIRONMENT
+LANG environment
      This version does not conform to the POSIX standard in the
      processing of the LANG environment variable and all environment
      variables starting with LC_.
 
-NAMES
+names
      Traditional and POSIX `bc' have single letter names for functions,
      variables and arrays.  They have been extended to be
      multi-character names that start with a letter and may contain
      letters, numbers and the underscore character.
 
-STRINGS
+Strings
      Strings are not allowed to contain NUL characters.  POSIX says all
      characters must be included in strings.
 
-LAST
+last
      POSIX `bc' does not have a \fBlast variable.  Some implementations
      of `bc' use the period (.) in a similar way.
 
-COMPARISONS
+comparisons
      POSIX `bc' allows comparisons only in the `if' statement, the
      `while' statement, and the second expression of the `for'
      statement.  Also, only one relational operation is allowed in each
      of those statements.
 
-IF STATEMENT, ELSE CLAUSE
+`if' statement, `else' clause
      POSIX `bc' does not have an `else' clause.
 
-FOR STATEMENT
+`for' statement
      POSIX `bc' requires all expressions to be present in the `for'
      statement.
 
-&&, ||, !
+`&&,' `||', `!'
      POSIX `bc' does not have the logical operators.
 
-READ FUNCTION
+`read' function
      POSIX `bc' does not have a `read' function.
 
-PRINT STATEMENT
+`print' statement
      POSIX `bc' does not have a `print' statement.
 
-CONTINUE STATEMENT
+`continue' statement
      POSIX `bc' does not have a continue statement.
 
-ARRAY PARAMETERS
+array parameters
      POSIX `bc' does not (currently) support array parameters in full.
      The POSIX grammar allows for arrays in function definitions, but
      does not provide a method to specify an array as an actual
@@ -848,11 +879,11 @@ ARRAY PARAMETERS
      Traditional implementations of `bc' have only call by value array
      parameters.
 
-FUNCTION FORMAT
+function format
      POSIX `bc' requires the opening brace on the same line as the
      `define' key word and the `auto' statement on the next line.
 
-=+, =-, =*, =/, =%, =^
+`=+', `=-', `=*', `=/', `=%', `=^'
      POSIX `bc' does not require these "old style" assignment operators
      to be defined.  This version may allow these "old style"
      assignments.  Use the `limits' statement to see if the installed
@@ -860,12 +891,12 @@ FUNCTION FORMAT
      assignment operators, the statement "a =- 1" will decrement `a' by
      1 instead of setting `a' to the value -1.
 
-SPACES IN NUMBERS
+spaces in numbers
      Other implementations of `bc' allow spaces in numbers.  For
      example, "x=1 3" would assign the value 13 to the variable x.  The
      same statement would cause a syntax error in this version of `bc'.
 
-ERRORS AND EXECUTION
+errors and execution
      This implementation varies from other implementations in terms of
      what code will be executed when syntax and other errors are found
      in the program.  If a syntax error is found in a function
@@ -889,7 +920,7 @@ ERRORS AND EXECUTION
      execution of the current execution block.  A runtime warning will
      not terminate the current execution block.
 
-INTERRUPTS
+Interrupts
      During an interactive session, the SIGINT signal (usually
      generated by the control-C character from the terminal) will cause
      execution of the current execution block to be interrupted.  It
@@ -903,12 +934,12 @@ INTERRUPTS
      session, the SIGINT signal will terminate the entire run of `bc'.
 
 
-File: bc.info,  Node: Limits,  Next: Environment Variables,  Prev: GNU `bc' and Other Implementations,  Up: Top
+File: bc.info,  Node: Limits,  Next: Environment Variables,  Prev: Comparison with Other Implementations,  Up: Top
 
-Limits
-******
+9 Limits
+********
 
-   The following are the limits currently in place for this `bc'
+The following are the limits currently in place for this `bc'
 processor.  Some of them may have been changed by an installation.  Use
 the `limits' statement to see the actual values.
 
@@ -945,10 +976,10 @@ the `limits' statement to see the actual values.
 
 File: bc.info,  Node: Environment Variables,  Prev: Limits,  Up: Top
 
-Environment Variables
-*********************
+10 Environment Variables
+************************
 
-   The following environment variables are processed by `bc':
+The following environment variables are processed by `bc':
 
 `POSIXLY_CORRECT'
      This is the same as the -s option (*note Command Line Options::).
@@ -956,7 +987,7 @@ Environment Variables
 `BC_ENV_ARGS'
      This is another mechanism to get arguments to `bc'.  The format is
      the same as the command line arguments.  These arguments are
-     processed first, so any files listed in the environent arguments
+     processed first, so any files listed in the environment arguments
      are processed before any command line argument files.  This allows
      the user to set up "standard" options and files to be processed at
      every invocation of `bc'.  The files in the environment variables
@@ -964,36 +995,38 @@ Environment Variables
      wants defined every time `bc' is run.
 
 `BC_LINE_LENGTH'
-     This should be an integer specifing the number of characters in an
+     This should be an integer specifying the number of characters in an
      output line for numbers. This includes the backslash and newline
-     characters for long numbers.
+     characters for long numbers. As an extension, the value of zero
+     disables the multi-line feature.  Any other value of this variable
+     that is less than 3 sets the line length to 70.
 
 
 
 Tag Table:
-Node: Top65
-Node: Introduction354
-Node: Description515
-Node: Command Line Options1969
-Node: Basic Elements2533
-Node: Numbers2704
-Node: Variables3467
-Node: Comments4576
-Node: Expressions5317
-Node: About Expressions and Special Variables5597
-Node: Basic Expressions7333
-Node: Relational Expressions10274
-Node: Boolean Expressions11279
-Node: Precedence11834
-Node: Special Expressions12994
-Node: Statements14376
-Node: Pseudo Statements21001
-Node: Functions21649
-Node: Math Library Functions25703
-Node: Examples26413
-Node: Readline and Libedit Options28431
-Node: GNU `bc' and Other Implementations29458
-Node: Limits34700
-Node: Environment Variables35953
+Node: Top201
+Node: Introduction493
+Node: Description658
+Node: Command Line Options2117
+Node: Basic Elements2687
+Node: Numbers2862
+Node: Variables3633
+Node: Comments4747
+Node: Expressions5493
+Node: About Expressions and Special Variables5777
+Node: Basic Expressions7560
+Node: Relational Expressions10506
+Node: Boolean Expressions11516
+Node: Precedence12076
+Node: Special Expressions13241
+Node: Statements14628
+Node: Pseudo Statements21261
+Node: Functions21914
+Node: Math Library Functions27077
+Node: Examples27793
+Node: Readline and Libedit Options29777
+Node: Comparison with Other Implementations30808
+Node: Limits36090
+Node: Environment Variables37347
 
 End Tag Table
diff --git a/doc/bc.texi b/doc/bc.texi
index a7cb9f6..40034ab 100644
--- a/doc/bc.texi
+++ b/doc/bc.texi
@@ -4,6 +4,8 @@
 @settitle bc Command Manual
 @c %**end of header
 
+@include texi-ver.incl
+
 @c This file has the new style title page commands.
 @c Run `makeinfo' rather than `texinfo-format-buffer'.
 
@@ -13,10 +15,16 @@
 @c \overfullrule=0pt
 @c end tex
 
+@ifinfo
+@direntry
+* bc: (bc).                    An arbitrary precision calculator language.
+@end direntry
+@end ifinfo
+
 @titlepage
 @title @command{bc}
 @subtitle an arbitrary precision calculator language
-@subtitle version 1.06
+@subtitle version @value{BC_VERSION}
 
 @author Philip A. Nelson
 @page
@@ -24,20 +32,20 @@
 This manual documents @command{bc}, an arbitrary precision calculator language.
 
 This manual is part of GNU @command{bc}.@*
-@sp4
-Copyright (C) 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1997 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+@sp 4
+Copyright (C) 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1997, 2003, 2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor,  Boston, MA 02110-1301  USA.
 
 Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
 this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
 are preserved on all copies.
 
-@iftex
+@ignore
 Permission is granted to process this file through TeX and print the
 results, provided the printed document carries copying permission
 notice identical to this one except for the removal of this paragraph
 (this paragraph not being relevant to the printed manual).
-@end iftex
+@end ignore
 
 Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
 manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the entire
@@ -68,7 +76,7 @@ Bellingham, WA 98226-9062
 * Functions::
 * Examples::
 * Readline and Libedit Options::
-* GNU @command{bc} and Other Implementations::
+* Comparison with Other Implementations::
 * Limits::
 * Environment Variables::
 @end menu
@@ -149,15 +157,15 @@ Print the version number and copyright and quit.
 @section Numbers
 
 The most basic element in @command{bc} is the number.  Numbers are
-arbitrary precision numbers.  This precision is both in the integer part
-and the fractional part.  All numbers are represented internally in
-decimal and all computation is done in decimal.  (This version truncates
-results from divide and multiply operations.)  There are two attributes
-of numbers, the length and the scale.  The length is the total number of
-significant decimal digits in a number and the scale is the total number
-of decimal digits after the decimal point.  For example, .000001 has a
-length of 6 and scale of 6, while 1935.000 has a length of 7 and a scale
-of 3.
+arbitrary precision numbers.  This precision is both in the integer
+part and the fractional part.  All numbers are represented internally
+in decimal and all computation is done in decimal.  (This version
+truncates results from divide and multiply operations.)  There are two
+attributes of numbers, the length and the scale.  The length is the
+total number of digits used by @command{bc} to represent a number and
+the scale is the total number of decimal digits after the decimal
+point.  For example, .000001 has a length of 6 and scale of 6, while
+1935.000 has a length of 7 and a scale of 3.
 
 @node Variables, Comments, Numbers, Basic Elements
 @section Variables
@@ -219,14 +227,15 @@ detail later, are defined when encountered.)
 A simple expression is just a constant. @command{bc} converts constants
 into internal decimal numbers using the current input base, specified by
 the variable @var{ibase}. (There is an exception in functions.)  The
-legal values of @var{ibase} are 2 through 16.  Assigning a value outside
-this range to @var{ibase} will result in a value of 2 or 16.  Input
-numbers may contain the characters 0-9 and A-F. (Note: They must be
+legal values of @var{ibase} are 2 through 36.  (Bases greater than
+16 are an extension.)  Assigning a value outside
+this range to @var{ibase} will result in a value of 2 or 36.  Input
+numbers may contain the characters 0-9 and A-Z. (Note: They must be
 capitals.  Lower case letters are variable names.)  Single digit numbers
 always have the value of the digit regardless of the value of
 @var{ibase}. (i.e. A = 10.)  For multi-digit numbers, @command{bc}
 changes all input digits greater or equal to @var{ibase} to the value of
-@var{ibase}-1.  This makes the number @code{FFF} always be the largest
+@var{ibase}-1.  This makes the number @code{ZZZ} always be the largest
 3 digit number of the input base.
 
 Full expressions are similar to many other high level languages.
@@ -412,7 +421,7 @@ functions.  They all appear as
 user-defined functions.  The standard functions are:
 
 @table @code
-@item length ( expression )
+@item length ( @var{expression} )
 The value of the length function is the number of significant digits in the
 expression.
 
@@ -426,11 +435,11 @@ be input from the user.  The value of the @code{read} function is the
 number read from the standard input using the current value of the
 variable @var{ibase} for the conversion base.
 
-@item scale ( expression )
+@item scale ( @var{expression} )
 The value of the @code{scale} function is the number of digits after the
 decimal point in the expression.
 
-@item sqrt ( expression )
+@item sqrt ( @var{expression} )
 The value of the @code{sqrt} function is the square root of the
 expression.  If the expression is negative, a run time error is
 generated.
@@ -457,8 +466,8 @@ series of statements separated by semicolons and newlines.  The
 following is a list of @command{bc} statements and what they do: (Things
 enclosed in brackets ( [ ] ) are optional parts of the statement.)
 
-@table @var
-@item expression
+@table @code
+@item @var{expression}
 This statement does one of two things.  If the expression starts with
 "<variable> <assignment> ...", it is considered to be an assignment
 statement.  If the expression is not an assignment statement, the
@@ -488,13 +497,13 @@ until the next number is printed or another value is assigned to
 (.) which is not part of a number as a short hand notation for for
 @var{last}.)
 
-@item string
+@item @var{string}
 The string is printed to the output.  Strings start with a double quote
 character and contain all characters until the next double quote character.
 All characters are taken literally, including any newline.  No newline
 character is printed after the string.
 
-@item @code{print} @var{list}
+@item print @var{list}
 The @code{print} statement (an extension) provides another method of
 output.  The @var{list} is a list of strings and expressions separated by
 commas.  Each string or expression is printed in the order of the list.
@@ -507,24 +516,24 @@ bell), "b" (backspace), "f" (form feed), "n" (newline), "r" (carriage
 return), "q" (double quote), "t" (tab), and "\e" (backslash).  Any other
 character following the backslash will be ignored.
 
-@item @{ statement_list @}
+@item @{ @var{statement_list} @}
 This is the compound statement.  It allows multiple statements to be
 grouped together for execution.
 
-@item @code{if} ( expression ) statement1 [@code{else} statement2]
+@item if ( @var{expression} ) @var{statement1} [else @var{statement2}]
 The if statement evaluates the expression and executes statement1 or
 statement2 depending on the value of the expression.  If the expression
 is non-zero, statement1 is executed.  If statement2 is present and
 the value of the expression is 0, then statement2 is executed.  (The
 @code{else} clause is an extension.)
 
-@item @code{while} ( expression ) statement
+@item while ( @var{expression} ) @var{statement}
 The while statement will execute the statement while the expression
 is non-zero.  It evaluates the expression before each execution of
 the statement.   Termination of the loop is caused by a zero
 expression value or the execution of a @code{break} statement.
 
-@item @code{for} ( [expression1] ; [expression2] ; [expression3] ) statement
+@item for ( [@var{expression1}] ; [@var{expression2}] ; [@var{expression3}] ) @var{statement}
 The @code{for} statement controls repeated execution of the statement.
 @var{Expression1} is evaluated before the loop.  @var{Expression2} is
 evaluated before each execution of the statement.  If it is non-zero,
@@ -546,24 +555,24 @@ while (expression2) @{
 @}
 @end example
 
-@item @code{break}
+@item break
 This statement causes a forced exit of the most recent enclosing @code{while}
 statement or @code{for} statement.
 
-@item @code{continue}
+@item continue
 The @code{continue} statement (an extension)  causes the most recent enclosing
 @code{for} statement to start the next iteration.
 
-@item @code{halt}
+@item halt
 The @code{halt} statement (an extension) is an executed statement that
 causes the @command{bc} processor to quit only when it is executed.  For
 example, "if (0 == 1) halt" will not cause @command{bc} to terminate
 because the @code{halt} is not executed.
 
-@item @code{return}
+@item return
 Return the value 0 from a function.  (@xref{Functions}.)
 
-@item @code{return} ( expression )
+@item return ( @var{expression} )
 Return the value of the expression from a function.  (@xref{Functions}.)
 As an extension, the parenthesis are not required.
 @end table
@@ -613,12 +622,12 @@ A function call is just an expression of the form
 
 Parameters are numbers or arrays (an extension).  In the function definition,
 zero or more parameters are defined by listing their names separated by
-commas.  Numbers are only call by value parameters.  Arrays are only
-call by variable.  Arrays are specified in the parameter definition by
+commas.  All parameters  are call by value parameters.
+Arrays are specified in the parameter definition by
 the notation "@var{name}@code{[ ]}".   In the function call, actual parameters
 are full expressions for number parameters.  The same notation is used
 for passing arrays as for defining array parameters.  The named array is
-passed by variable to the function.  Since function definitions are dynamic,
+passed by value to the function.  Since function definitions are dynamic,
 parameter numbers and types are checked when a function is called.  Any
 mismatch in number or types of parameters will cause a runtime error.
 A runtime error will also occur for the call to an undefined function.
@@ -658,12 +667,12 @@ will be ignored during the execution of the function except for the
 standard function @code{read}, which will always use the current value
 of @var{ibase} for conversion of numbers.
 
-As an extension, the format of the definition has been slightly relaxed.
-The standard requires the opening brace be on the same line as the 
-@code{define} keyword and all other parts must be on following lines.
-This version of @command{bc} will allow any number of newlines before and
-after the opening brace of the function.  For example, the following
-definitions are legal.
+Several extensions have been added to functions.  First, the format of
+the definition has been slightly relaxed.  The standard requires the
+opening brace be on the same line as the @code{define} keyword and all
+other parts must be on following lines.  This version of @command{bc}
+will allow any number of newlines before and after the opening brace of
+the function.  For example, the following definitions are legal.
 
 @example
    define d (n) @{ return (2*n); @}
@@ -671,6 +680,33 @@ definitions are legal.
        @{ return (2*n); @}
 @end example
 
+Functions may be defined as @code{void}.  A void
+funtion returns no value and thus may not be used in any place that needs
+a value.  A void function does not produce any output when called by itself
+on an input line.  The key word @code{void} is placed between the key word
+@code{define} and the function name.  For example, consider the following
+session.
+
+@example
+define py (y) @{ print "--->", y, "<---", "\n"; @}
+define void px (x) @{ print "--->", x, "<---", "\n"; @}
+py(1)
+--->1<---
+0
+px(1)
+--->1<---
+@end example
+
+Since @code{py} is not a void function, the call of @code{py(1)} prints
+the desired output and then prints a second line that is the value of
+the function.  Since the value of a function that is not given an
+explicit return statement is zero, the zero is printed.  For @code{px(1)},
+no zero is printed because the function is a void function.
+
+Also, call by variable for arrays was added.  To declare a
+call by variable array, the declaration of the array parameter in the
+function definition looks like "@code{*}@var{name}@code{[]}".  The call
+to the function remains the same as call by value arrays.
 
 @node Math Library Functions, , Functions, Functions
 @section Math Library Functions
@@ -693,11 +729,11 @@ The arctangent of @var{x}, arctangent returns radians.
 @item l (@var{x})
 The natural logarithm of @var{x}.
 
-@item @var{e} (@var{x})
+@item e (@var{x})
 The exponential function of raising @var{e} to the value @var{x}.
 
-@item @var{j} (@var{n,x})
-The bessel function of integer order @var{n} of @var{x}.
+@item j (@var{n}, @var{x})
+The Bessel function of integer order @var{n} of @var{x}.
 @end table
 
 @node Examples, Readline and Libedit Options, Functions, Top
@@ -797,7 +833,7 @@ define f (x) @{
 
 @end example
 
-@node Readline and Libedit Options, GNU @command{bc} and Other Implementations, Examples, Top
+@node Readline and Libedit Options, Comparison with Other Implementations, Examples, Top
 @chapter Readline and Libedit Options
 
 GNU @command{bc} can be compiled (via a configure option) to use the GNU
@@ -815,8 +851,8 @@ more information, read the user manuals for the GNU @command{readline},
 @command{history} and BSD @command{libedit} libraries.  One can not
 enable both @command{readline} and @command{libedit} at the same time.
 
-@node GNU @command{bc} and Other Implementations, Limits, Readline and Libedit Options, Top
-@chapter GNU @command{bc} and Other Implementations
+@node Comparison with Other Implementations, Limits, Readline and Libedit Options, Top
+@chapter Comparison with Other Implementations
 
 This version of @command{bc} was implemented from the POSIX P1003.2/D11
 draft and contains several differences and extensions relative to the
@@ -831,7 +867,7 @@ A major source of differences is extensions, where a feature is extended
 to add more functionality and additions, where new features are added.
 The following is the list of differences and extensions.
 
-@table @var
+@table @asis
 
 @item LANG environment
 This version does not conform to the POSIX standard in the processing
@@ -858,23 +894,23 @@ the @code{while} statement, and the second expression of the @code{for}
 statement.  Also, only one relational operation is allowed in each of
 those statements.
 
-@item if statement, else clause
+@item @code{if} statement, @code{else} clause
 POSIX @command{bc} does not have an @code{else} clause.
 
-@item for statement
+@item @code{for} statement
 POSIX @command{bc} requires all expressions to be present in the
 @code{for} statement.
 
-@item &&, ||, !
+@item @code{&&,} @code{||}, @code{!}
 POSIX @command{bc} does not have the logical operators.
 
-@item read function
+@item @code{read} function
 POSIX @command{bc} does not have a @code{read} function.
 
-@item print statement
+@item @code{print} statement
 POSIX @command{bc} does not have a @code{print} statement.
 
-@item continue statement
+@item @code{continue} statement
 POSIX @command{bc} does not have a continue statement.
 
 @item array parameters
@@ -888,7 +924,7 @@ of @command{bc} have only call by value array parameters.
 POSIX @command{bc} requires the opening brace on the same line as the 
 @code{define} key word and the @code{auto} statement on the next line.
 
-@item =+, =-, =*, =/, =%, =^
+@item @code{=+}, @code{=-}, @code{=*}, @code{=/}, @code{=%}, @code{=^}
 POSIX @command{bc} does not require these "old style" assignment
 operators to be defined.  This version may allow these "old style"
 assignments.  Use the @code{limits} statement to see if the installed
@@ -943,7 +979,7 @@ non-interactive session, the SIGINT signal will terminate the entire run
 of @command{bc}.
 @end table
 
-@node Limits, Environment Variables, GNU @command{bc} and Other Implementations, Top
+@node Limits, Environment Variables, Comparison with Other Implementations, Top
 @chapter Limits
 
 The following are the limits currently in place for this @command{bc}
@@ -995,7 +1031,7 @@ This is the same as the -s option (@pxref{Command Line Options}).
 @item BC_ENV_ARGS
 This is another mechanism to get arguments to @command{bc}.  The format
 is the same as the command line arguments.  These arguments are
-processed first, so any files listed in the environent arguments are
+processed first, so any files listed in the environment arguments are
 processed before any command line argument files.  This allows the user
 to set up "standard" options and files to be processed at every
 invocation of @command{bc}.  The files in the environment variables
@@ -1003,12 +1039,12 @@ would typically contain function definitions for functions the user
 wants defined every time @command{bc} is run.
 
 @item BC_LINE_LENGTH
-This should be an integer specifing the number of characters in an
+This should be an integer specifying the number of characters in an
 output line for numbers. This includes the backslash and newline
-characters for long numbers.
+characters for long numbers. As an extension, the value of zero disables the 
+multi-line feature.  Any other value of this variable that is less than
+3 sets the line length to 70.
 @end table
 
 @contents
 @bye
-
-
diff --git a/doc/dc.1 b/doc/dc.1
index 7a136a7..1c66649 100644
--- a/doc/dc.1
+++ b/doc/dc.1
@@ -2,27 +2,18 @@
 .\" dc.1 - the *roff document processor source for the dc manual
 .\"
 .\" This file is part of GNU dc.
-.\" Copyright (C) 1994, 1997, 1998, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+.\" Copyright (C) 1994, 1997, 1998, 2000, 2001, 2005, 2006, 2008, 2013, 2016
+.\" Free Software Foundation, Inc.
 .\"
-.\" This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
-.\" it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
-.\" the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License , or
-.\" (at your option) any later version.
+.\" Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
+.\" under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.2 or
+.\" any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no
+.\" Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no Back-Cover
+.\" Texts.
 .\"
-.\" This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
-.\" but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
-.\" MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
-.\" GNU General Public License for more details.
-.\"
-.\" You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
-.\" along with this program; see the file COPYING.  If not, write to:
-.\"   The Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.\"   59 Temple Place, Suite 330
-.\"   Boston, MA 02111 USA
-.\"
-.TH DC 1 "1997-03-25" "GNU Project"
+.TH dc 1 "2008-05-22" "GNU Project"
 .ds dc \fIdc\fP
-.ds Dc \fIDc\fP
+.ds Dc \fIdc\fP
 .SH NAME
 dc \- an arbitrary precision calculator
 .SH SYNOPSIS
@@ -48,7 +39,14 @@ Arithmetic operations pop arguments off the stack and push the results.
 .PP
 To enter a number in
 .IR dc ,
-type the digits with an optional decimal point.
+type the digits
+(using upper case letters
+.I A
+through
+.I F
+as "digits" when working
+with input bases greater than ten),
+with an optional decimal point.
 Exponential notation is not supported.
 To enter a negative number,
 begin the number with ``_''.
@@ -93,7 +91,8 @@ be processed.
 A file name of
 .B -
 refers to the standard input stream.
-The standard input will processed if no file names are specified.
+The standard input will processed if no script files or
+expressions are specified.
 .PD
 .SH
 Printing Commands
@@ -114,9 +113,14 @@ Otherwise it is a number, and the integer portion of its absolute
 value is printed out as a "base (UCHAR_MAX+1)" byte stream.
 Assuming that (UCHAR_MAX+1) is 256
 (as it is on most machines with 8-bit bytes),
-the sequence \fBKSK 0k1/ [_1*]sx d0>x [256~aPd0<x]dsxx sxLKk\fP
-could also accomplish this function,
-except for the side-effect of clobbering the x register.
+the sequence \fBKSK0k1/_1Ss [ls*]Sxd0>x
+[256~Ssd0<x]dsxxsx[q]Sq[Lsd0>qaPlxx]
+dsxxsx0sqLqsxLxLK+k\fP
+could also accomplish this function.
+(Much of the complexity of the above native-dc code is due
+to the ~ computing the characters backwards,
+and the desire to ensure that all registers wind up back
+in their original states.)
 .TP
 .B f
 Prints the entire contents of the stack
@@ -197,7 +201,8 @@ but, unlike \fB^\fP, this command will work with arbitrarily large exponents.
 Pops one value,
 computes its square root,
 and pushes that.
-The precision value specifies the number of fraction digits in the result.
+The maximum of the precision value and the precision of the argument
+is used to determine the number of fraction digits in the result.
 .PP
 Most arithmetic operations are affected by the ``precision value'',
 which you can set with the
@@ -219,6 +224,27 @@ Thus, ``4d*p'' computes 4 squared and prints it.
 .TP
 .B r
 Reverses the order of (swaps) the top two values on the stack.
+(This can also be accomplished with the sequence \fBSaSbLaLb\fP.)
+.TP
+.B R
+Pops the top-of-stack as an integer
+.IR n .
+Cyclically rotates the top
+.I n
+items on the updated stack.
+If
+.I n
+is positive, then the rotation direction will make the topmost
+element the second-from top;
+if
+.I n
+is negative, then the rotation will make the topmost element the
+.IR n -th
+element from the top.
+If the stack depth is less than
+.IR n ,
+then the entire stack is rotated (in the appropriate direction),
+without any error being reported.
 .SH
 Registers
 .PP
@@ -235,6 +261,7 @@ it into register
 Copy the value in register
 .I r
 and push it onto the stack.
+The value 0 is retrieved if the register is uninitialized.
 This does not alter the contents of
 .IR r .
 .PP
@@ -311,8 +338,9 @@ Pushes the current precision on the stack.
 .SH
 Strings
 .PP
-\*(Dc can operate on strings as well as on numbers.
-The only things you can do with strings are
+\*(Dc has a limited ability to operate on strings
+as well as on numbers;
+the only things you can do with strings are
 print them and execute them as macros
 (which means that the contents of the string are processed as
 \*(dc commands).
@@ -434,9 +462,13 @@ Status Inquiry
 .TP
 .B Z
 Pops a value off the stack,
-calculates the number of digits it has
+calculates the number of decimal digits it has
 (or number of characters, if it is a string)
 and pushes that number.
+The digit count for a number does
+.I not
+include any leading zeros,
+even if those appear to the right of the radix point.
 .TP
 .B X
 Pops a value off the stack,
diff --git a/doc/dc.info b/doc/dc.info
index 050a6b3..c2a6532 100644
--- a/doc/dc.info
+++ b/doc/dc.info
@@ -1,32 +1,41 @@
-This is dc.info, produced by makeinfo version 4.0 from dc.texi.
+This is ../../doc/dc.info, produced by makeinfo version 4.8 from
+../../doc/dc.texi.
 
 START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
-* dc: (dc).                   Arbritrary precision RPN "Desktop Calculator".
+* dc: (dc).                   Arbitrary precision RPN "Desktop Calculator".
 END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
-   This file documents DC, an arbitrary precision calculator.
 
-   Published by the Free Software Foundation, Inc.  59 Temple Place,
-Suite 330 Boston, MA 02111 USA
+   This manual documents version 1.4.1 of GNU `dc', an arbitrary
+precision calculator.
 
-   Copyright (C) 1984, 1994, 1997, 1998, 2000 Free Software Foundation,
-Inc.
+   Copyright (C) 1984, 1994, 1997, 1998, 2000, 2005, 2006, 2008, 2013,
+2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
 
-   Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this
-manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are
-preserved on all copies.
+     Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this
+     document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License,
+     Version 1.2 or any later version published by the Free Software
+     Foundation; with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts,
+     and with no Back-Cover Texts.  A copy of the license can be found
+     at `http://www.gnu.org/licenses/fdl.html' .
 
-   Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of
-this manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that
-the entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
-permission notice identical to this one.
+
+File: dc.info,  Node: Top,  Next: Introduction,  Up: (dir)
 
-   Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
-manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
-versions, except that this permission notice may be stated in a
-translation approved by the Foundation.
+GNU dc
+******
 
-
-File: dc.info,  Node: Top,  Next: Introduction,  Prev: (dir),  Up: (dir)
+This manual documents version 1.4.1 of GNU `dc', an arbitrary precision
+calculator.
+
+   Copyright (C) 1984, 1994, 1997, 1998, 2000, 2005, 2006, 2008, 2013,
+2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+     Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this
+     document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License,
+     Version 1.2 or any later version published by the Free Software
+     Foundation; with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts,
+     and with no Back-Cover Texts.  A copy of the license can be found
+     at `http://www.gnu.org/licenses/fdl.html' .
 
 * Menu:
 
@@ -45,46 +54,49 @@ File: dc.info,  Node: Top,  Next: Introduction,  Prev: (dir),  Up: (dir)
 
 File: dc.info,  Node: Introduction,  Next: Invocation,  Prev: Top,  Up: Top
 
-Introduction
-************
+1 Introduction
+**************
 
-   DC is a reverse-polish desk calculator which supports unlimited
+`dc' is a reverse-polish desk calculator which supports unlimited
 precision arithmetic.  It also allows you to define and call macros.
-Normally DC reads from the standard input; if any command arguments are
-given to it, they are filenames, and DC reads and executes the contents
-of the files instead of reading from standard input.  All normal output
-is to standard output; all error messages are written to standard error.
+Normally `dc' reads from the standard input; if any command arguments
+are given to it, they are filenames, and `dc' reads and executes the
+contents of the files instead of reading from standard input.  All
+normal output is to standard output; all error messages are written to
+standard error.
 
-   To exit, use `q'.  `C-c' does not exit; it is used to abort macros
-that are looping, etc.  (Currently this is not true; `C-c' does exit.)
+   To exit, use `q'.  `C-c' (or whatever other keystroke your system
+uses to generate a `SIGINT') does not exit; it is used to abort macros
+that are looping, etc.
 
    A reverse-polish calculator stores numbers on a stack.  Entering a
 number pushes it on the stack.  Arithmetic operations pop arguments off
 the stack and push the results.
 
-   To enter a number in DC, type the digits, with an optional decimal
-point.  Exponential notation is not supported.  To enter a negative
-number, begin the number with `_'.  `-' cannot be used for this, as it
-is a binary operator for subtraction instead.  To enter two numbers in
-succession, separate them with spaces or newlines.  These have no
-meaning as commands.
+   To enter a number in `dc', type the digits (using upper case letters
+`A' through `F' as "digits" when working with input bases greater than
+ten), with an optional decimal point.  Exponential notation is not
+supported.  To enter a negative number, begin the number with `_'.  `-'
+cannot be used for this, as it is a binary operator for subtraction
+instead.  To enter two numbers in succession, separate them with spaces
+or newlines; these have no meaning as commands.
 
 
 File: dc.info,  Node: Invocation,  Next: Printing Commands,  Prev: Introduction,  Up: Top
 
-Invocation
-**********
+2 Invocation
+************
 
-   DC may be invoked with the following command-line options:
+`dc' may be invoked with the following command-line options:
 `-e EXPR'
 
 `--expression=EXPR'
-     Evaluate EXPR as DC commands.
+     Evaluate EXPR as `dc' commands.
 
 `-f FILE'
 
 `--file=FILE'
-     Read and evaluate DC commands from FILE.
+     Read and evaluate `dc' commands from FILE.
 
 `-h'
 
@@ -106,8 +118,8 @@ then the standard input will be read for commands to evaluate.
 
 File: dc.info,  Node: Printing Commands,  Next: Arithmetic,  Prev: Invocation,  Up: Top
 
-Printing Commands
-*****************
+3 Printing Commands
+*******************
 
 `p'
      Prints the value on the top of the stack, without altering the
@@ -123,21 +135,35 @@ Printing Commands
      number, and the integer portion of its absolute value is printed
      out as a "base (UCHAR_MAX+1)" byte stream.  Assuming that
      (UCHAR_MAX+1) is 256 (as it is on most machines with 8-bit bytes),
-     the sequence `KSK 0k1/ [_1*]sx d0>x [256~aPd0<x]dsxx sxLKk' could
-     also accomplish this function, except for the side-effect of
-     clobbering the x register.  (Details of the behavior with a number
-     are a GNU extension.)
+     the sequence `KSK0k1/ _1Ss[ls*]Sxd0>x [256~Ssd0<x]dsxx
+     sx[q]Sq[Lsd0>qaPlxx]dsxx sx0sqLqsxLxLK+k' could also accomplish
+     this function.  (Much of the complexity of the above native-dc
+     code is due to the ~ computing the characters backwards, and the
+     desire to ensure that all registers wind up back in their original
+     states.)  (Details of the behavior with a number are a GNU
+     extension.  Traditional `dc' happened to "support" similar
+     functionality for a limited range of inputs as an accidental
+     side-effect of its internal representation of numbers.)
 
 `f'
      Prints the entire contents of the stack without altering anything.
      This is a good command to use if you are lost or want to figure
      out what the effect of some command has been.
 
+   All numeric output is split to fit within 70 columns, by default.
+When a number is broken up in this way, the split is indicated by a "\"
+at the end of the to-be-continued output lines.  The column width at
+which output is split can be overridden by setting the DC_LINE_LENGTH
+environment variable to the desired width.  A DC_LINE_LENGTH of 0
+(zero) disables the line-split feature altogether.  Invalid values of
+DC_LINE_LENGTH are silently ignored.  (The DC_LINE_LENGTH variable is a
+GNU extension.)
+
 
 File: dc.info,  Node: Arithmetic,  Next: Stack Control,  Prev: Printing Commands,  Up: Top
 
-Arithmetic
-**********
+4 Arithmetic
+************
 
 `+'
      Pops two values off the stack, adds them, and pushes the result.
@@ -188,13 +214,13 @@ Arithmetic
      fractional part of this exponent will be ignored.  The third value
      popped is the base which gets exponentiated, which should be an
      integer.  For small integers this is like the sequence `Sm^Lm%',
-     but, unlike `^', this command will work with arbritrarily large
+     but, unlike `^', this command will work with arbitrarily large
      exponents.  (This command is a GNU extension.)
 
 `v'
      Pops one value, computes its square root, and pushes that.  The
-     precision value specifies the number of fraction digits in the
-     result.
+     maximum of the precision value and the precision of the argument
+     is used to determine the number of fraction digits in the result.
 
    Most arithmetic operations are affected by the _precision value_,
 which you can set with the `k' command.  The default precision value is
@@ -204,8 +230,8 @@ subtraction produces integer results.
 
 File: dc.info,  Node: Stack Control,  Next: Registers,  Prev: Arithmetic,  Up: Top
 
-Stack Control
-*************
+5 Stack Control
+***************
 
 `c'
      Clears the stack, rendering it empty.
@@ -216,15 +242,26 @@ Stack Control
 
 `r'
      Reverses the order of (swaps) the top two values on the stack.
+     (This can also be accomplished with the sequence `SaSbLaLb'.)
      (This command is a GNU extension.)
 
+`R'
+     Pops the top-of-stack as an integer N.  Cyclically rotates the top
+     N items on the updated stack.  If N is positive, then the rotation
+     direction will make the topmost element the second-from top; if N
+     is negative, then the rotation will make the topmost element the
+     N-th element from the top.  If the stack depth is less than N then
+     the entire stack is rotated (in the appropriate direction),
+     without any error being reported.  (This command is a GNU
+     extension.)
+
 
 File: dc.info,  Node: Registers,  Next: Parameters,  Prev: Stack Control,  Up: Top
 
-Registers
-*********
+6 Registers
+***********
 
-   DC provides at least 256 memory registers, each named by a single
+`dc' provides at least 256 memory registers(1), each named by a single
 character.  You can store a number in a register and retrieve it later.
 
 `sR'
@@ -232,8 +269,9 @@ character.  You can store a number in a register and retrieve it later.
      R.
 
 `lR'
-     Copy the value in register R, and push it onto the stack.  This
-     does not alter the contents of R.
+     Copy the value in register R, and push it onto the stack.  The
+     value `0' is retrieved if the register is uninitialized or its
+     stack has become empty.  This does not alter the contents of R.
 
      Each register also contains its own stack.  The current register
      value is the top of the register's stack.
@@ -248,13 +286,19 @@ character.  You can store a number in a register and retrieve it later.
      the main stack.  The previous value in register R's stack, if any,
      is now accessible via the `lR' command.
 
+   ---------- Footnotes ----------
+
+   (1) The exact number of registers provided by `dc' depends on the
+range of an `unsigned char' in the C compiler used to create the `dc'
+executable.
+
 
 File: dc.info,  Node: Parameters,  Next: Strings,  Prev: Registers,  Up: Top
 
-Parameters
-**********
+7 Parameters
+************
 
-   DC has three parameters that control its operation: the precision,
+`dc' has three parameters that control its operation: the precision,
 the input radix, and the output radix.  The precision specifies the
 number of fraction digits to keep in the result of most arithmetic
 operations.  The input radix controls the interpretation of numbers
@@ -289,34 +333,37 @@ radix.
 `K'
      Pushes the current precision on the stack.
 
+
 
 File: dc.info,  Node: Strings,  Next: Status Inquiry,  Prev: Parameters,  Up: Top
 
-Strings
-*******
+8 Strings
+*********
 
-   DC can operate on strings as well as on numbers.  The only things
-you can do with strings are print them and execute them as macros
-(which means that the contents of the string are processed as DC
-commands).  Both registers and the stack can hold strings, and DC
-always knows whether any given object is a string or a number.  Some
-commands such as arithmetic operations demand numbers as arguments and
-print errors if given strings.  Other commands can accept either a
+`dc' has a limited ability to operate on strings as well as on numbers;
+the only things you can do with strings are print them and execute them
+as macros (which means that the contents of the string are processed as
+`dc' commands).  Both registers and the stack can hold strings, and
+`dc' always knows whether any given object is a string or a number.
+Some commands such as arithmetic operations demand numbers as arguments
+and print errors if given strings.  Other commands can accept either a
 number or a string; for example, the `p' command can accept either and
 prints the object according to its type.
 
 `[CHARACTERS]'
      Makes a string containing CHARACTERS and pushes it on the stack.
      For example, `[foo]P' prints the characters `foo' (with no
-     newline).
+     newline).  Note that all square brackets (`['s and `]'s) must be
+     balanced; there is no mechanism provided for handling unbalanced
+     square brackets.
 
 `a'
      The mnemonic for this is somewhat erroneous: asciify.  The
      top-of-stack is popped.  If it was a number, then the low-order
-     byte of this number is converted into a string and pushed onto the
-     stack.  Otherwise the top-of-stack was a string, and the first
-     character of that string is pushed back.  (This command is a GNU
-     extension.)
+     byte of this number is converted into a 1-character string and
+     pushed onto the stack.  Otherwise the top-of-stack was a string,
+     and the first character of that string is pushed back.  (This
+     command is a GNU extension.)
 
 `x'
      Pops a value off the stack and executes it as a macro.  Normally
@@ -359,7 +406,7 @@ prints the object according to its type.
      During the execution of a macro, this command exits from the macro
      and also from the macro which invoked it.  If called from the top
      level, or from a macro which was called directly from the top
-     level, the `q' command will cause DC to exit.
+     level, the `q' command will cause `dc' to exit.
 
 `Q'
      Pops a value off the stack and uses it as a count of levels of
@@ -368,13 +415,22 @@ prints the object according to its type.
 
 File: dc.info,  Node: Status Inquiry,  Next: Miscellaneous,  Prev: Strings,  Up: Top
 
-Status Inquiry
-**************
+9 Status Inquiry
+****************
 
 `Z'
-     Pops a value off the stack, calculates the number of digits it has
-     (or number of characters, if it is a string) and pushes that
-     number.
+     Pops a value off the stack, calculates the number of decimal
+     digits it has (or number of characters, if it is a string) and
+     pushes that number.
+
+     Note that the digit count for a number does _not_ include any
+     leading zeros, even if those appear to the right of the radix
+     point.  This may seem a bit strange at first, but it is compatible
+     with historical implementations of `dc', and can be argued to be
+     useful for computing the magnitude of a value: `dSaXLaZ-' will
+     compute the power-of-ten multiplier which would be needed to shift
+     the decimal point to be immediately before the leftmost non-zero
+     digit.
 
 `X'
      Pops a value off the stack, calculates the number of fraction
@@ -388,12 +444,12 @@ Status Inquiry
 
 File: dc.info,  Node: Miscellaneous,  Next: Reporting bugs,  Prev: Status Inquiry,  Up: Top
 
-Miscellaneous
-*************
+10 Miscellaneous
+****************
 
 `!'
      Will run the rest of the line as a system command.  Note that
-     parsing of the !<, !=, and !> commands take precidence, so if you
+     parsing of the !<, !=, and !> commands take precedence, so if you
      want to run a command starting with <, =, or > you will need to
      add a space after the !.
 
@@ -417,25 +473,26 @@ because the 2 was stored in an instance of 0:A that was later popped.
 
 File: dc.info,  Node: Reporting bugs,  Prev: Miscellaneous,  Up: Top
 
-Reporting bugs
-**************
+11 Reporting bugs
+*****************
 
-   Email bug reports to <bug-dc@gnu.org>.
+Email bug reports to <bug-dc@gnu.org>.  
 
 
 
 Tag Table:
-Node: Top1084
-Node: Introduction1663
-Node: Invocation2880
-Node: Printing Commands3724
-Node: Arithmetic4902
-Node: Stack Control7815
-Node: Registers8228
-Node: Parameters9154
-Node: Strings10415
-Node: Status Inquiry13385
-Node: Miscellaneous13942
-Node: Reporting bugs14909
+Node: Top795
+Node: Introduction1965
+Node: Invocation3314
+Node: Printing Commands4165
+Node: Arithmetic6210
+Node: Stack Control9186
+Node: Registers10177
+Ref: Registers-Footnote-111242
+Node: Parameters11394
+Node: Strings12659
+Node: Status Inquiry15816
+Node: Miscellaneous16884
+Node: Reporting bugs17857
 
 End Tag Table
diff --git a/doc/dc.texi b/doc/dc.texi
index 0a4d973..0ee77f3 100644
--- a/doc/dc.texi
+++ b/doc/dc.texi
@@ -4,11 +4,9 @@
 @settitle dc, an arbitrary precision calculator
 @c %**end of header
 
-@c This file has the new style title page commands.
-@c Run `makeinfo' rather than `texinfo-format-buffer'.
+@include texi-ver.incl
 
 @c smallbook
-
 @c tex
 @c \overfullrule=0pt
 @c end tex
@@ -20,74 +18,46 @@
 @syncodeindex pg fn
 @syncodeindex tp fn
 
-@ifinfo
 @direntry
-* dc: (dc).                   Arbritrary precision RPN ``Desktop Calculator''.
+* dc: (dc).                   Arbitrary precision RPN ``Desktop Calculator''.
 @end direntry
-This file documents @sc{dc}, an arbitrary precision calculator.
-
-Published by the Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-59 Temple Place, Suite 330
-Boston, MA 02111 USA
-
-Copyright (C) 1984, 1994, 1997, 1998, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-
-Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
-this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
-are preserved on all copies.
 
-@ignore
-Permission is granted to process this file through TeX and print the
-results, provided the printed document carries copying permission
-notice identical to this one except for the removal of this paragraph
-(this paragraph not being relevant to the printed manual).
+@copying
+This manual documents version @value{DC_VERSION} of
+@sc{gnu} @command{dc}, an arbitrary precision calculator.
 
-@end ignore
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
-manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the entire
-resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a permission
-notice identical to this one.
+Copyright (C) 1984, 1994, 1997, 1998, 2000, 2005, 2006, 2008, 2013, 2016
+Free Software Foundation, Inc.
 
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual
-into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions,
-except that this permission notice may be stated in a translation approved
-by the Foundation.
-@end ifinfo
+@quotation
+Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
+under the terms of the @sc{gnu} Free Documentation License,
+Version 1.2 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
+with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts,
+and with no Back-Cover Texts.
+A copy of the license can be found at
+@url{http://www.gnu.org/licenses/fdl.html} .
+@end quotation
+@end copying
 
 @setchapternewpage off
 
 @titlepage
-@title dc, an arbitrary precision calculator
-
+@title @sc{gnu} @code{dc}
+@subtitle an arbitrary precision calculator
+@subtitle version @value{DC_VERSION}
 @author by Ken Pizzini
 @author original manual by Richard Stallman
 @page
 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
-Copyright @copyright{} 1994, 1997, 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-
-@sp 2
-Published by the Free Software Foundation, @*
-59 Temple Place, Suite 330 @*
-Boston, MA 02111 USA
-
-Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
-this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
-are preserved on all copies.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
-manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the entire
-resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a permission
-notice identical to this one.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual
-into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions,
-except that this permission notice may be stated in a translation approved
-by the Foundation.
-
+@insertcopying
 @end titlepage
-@page
 
-@node Top, Introduction, (dir), (dir)
+@ifnottex
+@node Top
+@top GNU dc
+@insertcopying
+@end ifnottex
 
 @menu
 * Introduction::                Introduction
@@ -107,48 +77,51 @@ by the Foundation.
 @comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
 @chapter Introduction
 
-@sc{dc} is a reverse-polish desk calculator
+@command{dc} is a reverse-polish desk calculator
 which supports unlimited precision arithmetic.
 It also allows you to define and call macros.
-Normally @sc{dc} reads from the standard input;
+Normally @command{dc} reads from the standard input;
 if any command arguments are given to it, they are filenames,
-and @sc{dc} reads and executes the contents of the files
+and @command{dc} reads and executes the contents of the files
 instead of reading from standard input.
 All normal output is to standard output;
 all error messages are written to standard error.
 
 To exit, use @samp{q}.
-@kbd{C-c} does not exit;
+@kbd{C-c}
+(or whatever other keystroke your system uses to generate a @code{SIGINT})
+does not exit;
 it is used to abort macros that are looping, etc.
-(Currently this is not true; @kbd{C-c} does exit.)
 
 A reverse-polish calculator stores numbers on a stack.
 Entering a number pushes it on the stack.
 Arithmetic operations pop arguments off the stack and push the results.
 
-To enter a number in @sc{dc}, type the digits,
+To enter a number in @command{dc}, type the digits (using upper
+case letters @code{A} through @code{F} as "digits" when working
+with input bases greater than ten),
 with an optional decimal point.
 Exponential notation is not supported.
 To enter a negative number, begin the number with @samp{_}.
 @samp{-} cannot be used for this, as it is a binary operator
 for subtraction instead.
 To enter two numbers in succession,
-separate them with spaces or newlines.
-These have no meaning as commands.
+separate them with spaces or newlines;
+these have no meaning as commands.
 
 @node Invocation, Printing Commands, Introduction, Top
 @chapter Invocation
 
-@sc{dc} may be invoked with the following command-line options:
+@command{dc} may be invoked with the following command-line options:
 @table @samp
 
 @item -e @var{expr}
 @item --expression=@var{expr}
-Evaluate @var{expr} as @sc{dc} commands.
+Evaluate @var{expr} as @command{dc} commands.
 
 @item -f @var{file}
 @item --file=@var{file}
-Read and evaluate @sc{dc} commands from @var{file}.
+Read and evaluate @command{dc} commands from @var{file}.
 
 @item -h
 @item --help
@@ -178,7 +151,7 @@ A newline is printed after the value.
 @item n
 Prints the value on the top of the stack, popping it off,
 and does not print a newline after.
-(This command is a GNU extension.)
+(This command is a @sc{gnu} extension.)
 
 @item P
 Pops off the value on top of the stack.
@@ -188,10 +161,19 @@ value is printed out as a "base (UCHAR_MAX+1)" byte stream.
 Assuming that (UCHAR_MAX+1) is 256
 (as it is on most machines with 8-bit bytes),
 the sequence
-@code{KSK 0k1/ [_1*]sx d0>x [256~aPd0<x]dsxx sxLKk}
-could also accomplish this function,
-except for the side-effect of clobbering the x register.
-(Details of the behavior with a number are a GNU extension.)
+@code{KSK0k1/ _1Ss[ls*]Sxd0>x
+[256~Ssd0<x]dsxx
+sx[q]Sq[Lsd0>qaPlxx]dsxx
+sx0sqLqsxLxLK+k}
+could also accomplish this function.
+(Much of the complexity of the above native-dc code is due
+to the ~ computing the characters backwards,
+and the desire to ensure that all registers wind up back
+in their original states.)
+(Details of the behavior with a number are a @sc{gnu} extension.
+Traditional @command{dc} happened to "support" similar functionality
+for a limited range of inputs as an accidental side-effect of its
+internal representation of numbers.)
 
 @item f
 Prints the entire contents of the stack
@@ -201,6 +183,17 @@ This is a good command to use if you are lost or want
 to figure out what the effect of some command has been.
 @end table
 
+All numeric output is split to fit within 70 columns, by default.
+When a number is broken up in this way, the split is indicated
+by a "\" at the end of the to-be-continued output lines.
+The column width at which output is split can be overridden
+by setting the @var{DC_LINE_LENGTH} environment variable to
+the desired width.
+A @var{DC_LINE_LENGTH} of 0 (zero) disables the line-split
+feature altogether.
+Invalid values of @var{DC_LINE_LENGTH} are silently ignored.
+(The @var{DC_LINE_LENGTH} variable is a @sc{gnu} extension.)
+
 @node Arithmetic, Stack Control, Printing Commands, Top
 @chapter Arithmetic
 
@@ -244,7 +237,7 @@ The number of fraction digits used in the division
 is specified by the precision value.
 (The sequence @code{SdSn lnld/ LnLd%} could also accomplish
 this function, with slightly different error checking.)
-(This command is a GNU extension.)
+(This command is a @sc{gnu} extension.)
 
 @item ^
 Pops two values and exponentiates,
@@ -266,13 +259,14 @@ and any fractional part of this exponent will be ignored.
 The third value popped is the base which gets exponentiated,
 which should be an integer.
 For small integers this is like the sequence @code{Sm^Lm%},
-but, unlike @code{^}, this command will work with arbritrarily large exponents.
-(This command is a GNU extension.)
+but, unlike @code{^},
+this command will work with arbitrarily large exponents.
+(This command is a @sc{gnu} extension.)
 
 @item v
 Pops one value, computes its square root, and pushes that.
-The precision value specifies the number of fraction digits
-in the result.
+The maximum of the precision value and the precision of the argument
+is used to determine the number of fraction digits in the result.
 @end table
 
 Most arithmetic operations are affected by the @emph{precision value},
@@ -295,13 +289,31 @@ Thus, @samp{4d*p} computes 4 squared and prints it.
 
 @item r
 Reverses the order of (swaps) the top two values on the stack.
-(This command is a GNU extension.)
+(This can also be accomplished with the sequence @code{SaSbLaLb}.)
+(This command is a @sc{gnu} extension.)
+
+@item R
+Pops the top-of-stack as an integer @var{n}.
+Cyclically rotates the top @var{n} items on the updated stack.
+If @var{n} is positive,
+then the rotation direction will make the topmost
+element the second-from top;
+if @var{n} is negative,
+then the rotation will make the topmost element the
+@var{n}-th element from the top.
+If the stack depth is less than @var{n}
+then the entire stack is rotated (in the appropriate direction),
+without any error being reported.
+(This command is a @sc{gnu} extension.)
 @end table
 
 @node Registers, Parameters, Stack Control, Top
 @chapter Registers
 
-@sc{dc} provides at least 256 memory registers,
+@command{dc} provides at least 256 memory registers@footnote{The
+exact number of registers provided by @command{dc} depends
+on the range of an @code{unsigned char} in the C compiler
+used to create the @command{dc} executable.},
 each named by a single character.
 You can store a number in a register and retrieve it later.
 
@@ -313,6 +325,8 @@ store it into register @var{r}.
 @item l@var{r}
 Copy the value in register @var{r},
 and push it onto the stack.
+The value @code{0} is retrieved if the
+register is uninitialized or its stack has become empty.
 This does not alter the contents of @var{r}.
 
 Each register also contains its own stack.
@@ -338,7 +352,7 @@ is now accessible via the @samp{l@var{r}} command.
 @node Parameters, Strings, Registers, Top
 @chapter Parameters
 
-@sc{dc} has three parameters that control its operation:
+@command{dc} has three parameters that control its operation:
 the precision, the input radix, and the output radix.
 The precision specifies the number of fraction digits
 to keep in the result of most arithmetic operations.
@@ -381,12 +395,15 @@ Pushes the current precision on the stack.
 @node Strings, Status Inquiry, Parameters, Top
 @chapter Strings
 
-@sc{dc} can operate on strings as well as on numbers.
-The only things you can do with strings are print them
+@command{dc} has a limited ability
+to operate on strings as well as on numbers;
+the only things you can do with strings are print them
 and execute them as macros
-(which means that the contents of the string are processed as @sc{dc} commands).
+(which means that the contents of the string are processed
+as @command{dc} commands).
 Both registers and the stack can hold strings,
-and @sc{dc} always knows whether any given object is a string or a number.
+and @command{dc} always knows whether any given object is
+a string or a number.
 Some commands such as arithmetic operations demand numbers
 as arguments and print errors if given strings.
 Other commands can accept either a number or a string;
@@ -398,15 +415,18 @@ according to its type.
 Makes a string containing @var{characters} and pushes it on the stack.
 For example, @samp{[foo]P} prints the characters @samp{foo}
 (with no newline).
+Note that all square brackets (@samp{[}s and @samp{]}s) must be balanced;
+there is no mechanism provided for handling unbalanced square brackets.
 
 @item a
 The mnemonic for this is somewhat erroneous: asciify.
 The top-of-stack is popped.
 If it was a number, then the low-order byte of this number
-is converted into a string and pushed onto the stack.
+is converted into a 1-character string
+and pushed onto the stack.
 Otherwise the top-of-stack was a string,
 and the first character of that string is pushed back.
-(This command is a GNU extension.)
+(This command is a @sc{gnu} extension.)
 
 @item x
 Pops a value off the stack and executes it as a macro.
@@ -455,7 +475,7 @@ During the execution of a macro,
 this command exits from the macro and also from the macro which invoked it.
 If called from the top level,
 or from a macro which was called directly from the top level,
-the @samp{q} command will cause @sc{dc} to exit.
+the @samp{q} command will cause @command{dc} to exit.
 
 @item Q
 Pops a value off the stack and uses it as a count
@@ -469,10 +489,20 @@ Thus, @samp{3Q} exits three levels.
 @table @samp
 @item Z
 Pops a value off the stack,
-calculates the number of digits it has
+calculates the number of decimal digits it has
 (or number of characters, if it is a string)
 and pushes that number.
 
+Note that the digit count for a number does
+@emph{not} include any leading zeros,
+even if those appear to the right of the radix point.
+This may seem a bit strange at first,
+but it is compatible with historical implementations of @command{dc},
+and can be argued to be useful for computing the magnitude of a value:
+@code{dSaXLaZ-} will compute the power-of-ten multiplier
+which would be needed to shift the decimal point
+to be immediately before the leftmost non-zero digit.
+
 @item X
 Pops a value off the stack,
 calculates the number of fraction digits it has,
@@ -493,13 +523,13 @@ before the execution of the @samp{z} command.
 @table @samp
 @item !
 Will run the rest of the line as a system command.
-Note that parsing of the !<, !=, and !> commands take precidence,
+Note that parsing of the !<, !=, and !> commands take precedence,
 so if you want to run a command starting with <, =, or > you will
 need to add a space after the !.
 
 @item #
 Will interpret the rest of the line as a comment.
-(This command is a GNU extension.)
+(This command is a @sc{gnu} extension.)
 
 @item :@var{r}
 Will pop the top two values off of the stack.
diff --git a/doc/texi-ver.incl.in b/doc/texi-ver.incl.in
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6373f4f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/texi-ver.incl.in
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+@set BC_VERSION @BC_VERSION@
+@set DC_VERSION @DC_VERSION@
diff --git a/doc/texinfo.tex b/doc/texinfo.tex
index c49af9f..85f184c 100644
--- a/doc/texinfo.tex
+++ b/doc/texinfo.tex
@@ -1,17 +1,18 @@
 % texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files.
-%
+% 
 % Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex.
 \expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi
 %
-\def\texinfoversion{1999-09-25.10}
+\def\texinfoversion{2013-02-01.11}
 %
-% Copyright (C) 1985, 86, 88, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99
-% Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+% Copyright 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995,
+% 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006,
+% 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2012, 2013 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
 %
-% This texinfo.tex file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+% This texinfo.tex file is free software: you can redistribute it and/or
 % modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
-% published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at
-% your option) any later version.
+% published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the
+% License, or (at your option) any later version.
 %
 % This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be
 % useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty
@@ -19,25 +20,20 @@
 % General Public License for more details.
 %
 % You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
-% along with this texinfo.tex file; see the file COPYING.  If not, write
-% to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
-% Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+% along with this program.  If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
 %
-% In other words, you are welcome to use, share and improve this program.
-% You are forbidden to forbid anyone else to use, share and improve
-% what you give them.   Help stamp out software-hoarding!
+% As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing
+% a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without
+% restriction. This Exception is an additional permission under section 7
+% of the GNU General Public License, version 3 ("GPLv3").
 %
 % Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug
 % reports; you can get the latest version from:
-%   ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo.tex
-%   (and all GNU mirrors, see http://www.gnu.org/order/ftp.html)
-%   ftp://texinfo.org/tex/texinfo.tex
-%   ftp://us.ctan.org/macros/texinfo/texinfo.tex
-%   (and all CTAN mirrors, finger ctan@us.ctan.org for a list).
-%   /home/gd/gnu/doc/texinfo.tex on the GNU machines.
-% The texinfo.tex in any given Texinfo distribution could well be out
+%   http://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo/ (the Texinfo release area), or
+%   http://ftpmirror.gnu.org/texinfo/ (same, via a mirror), or
+%   http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page)
+% The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out
 % of date, so if that's what you're using, please check.
-% Texinfo has a small home page at http://texinfo.org/.
 %
 % Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org.  Please include including a
 % complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the
@@ -50,13 +46,17 @@
 %   texindex foo.??
 %   tex foo.texi
 %   tex foo.texi
-%   dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever, to process the dvi file; this makes foo.ps.
-% The extra runs of TeX get the cross-reference information correct.
+%   dvips foo.dvi -o  # or whatever; this makes foo.ps.
+% The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct.
 % Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more
 % than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary.
 %
-% It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages.  You can get
-% the existing language-specific files from ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo/.
+% It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some
+% extent.  You can get the existing language-specific files from the
+% full Texinfo distribution.
+%
+% The GNU Texinfo home page is http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo.
+
 
 \message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:}
 
@@ -66,7 +66,13 @@
 \everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}%
   \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active}
 
-% Save some parts of plain tex whose names we will redefine.
+\chardef\other=12
+
+% We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo.
+% For @tex, we can use \tabalign.
+\let\+ = \relax
+
+% Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine.
 \let\ptexb=\b
 \let\ptexbullet=\bullet
 \let\ptexc=\c
@@ -76,30 +82,46 @@
 \let\ptexend=\end
 \let\ptexequiv=\equiv
 \let\ptexexclam=\!
+\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote
+\let\ptexgtr=>
+\let\ptexhat=^
 \let\ptexi=\i
+\let\ptexindent=\indent
+\let\ptexinsert=\insert
 \let\ptexlbrace=\{
+\let\ptexless=<
+\let\ptexnewwrite\newwrite
+\let\ptexnoindent=\noindent
+\let\ptexplus=+
+\let\ptexraggedright=\raggedright
 \let\ptexrbrace=\}
+\let\ptexslash=\/
 \let\ptexstar=\*
 \let\ptext=\t
-
-% We never want plain's outer \+ definition in Texinfo.
-% For @tex, we can use \tabalign.
-\let\+ = \relax
-
-\message{Basics,}
-\chardef\other=12
+\let\ptextop=\top
+{\catcode`\'=\active \global\let\ptexquoteright'}% active in plain's math mode
 
 % If this character appears in an error message or help string, it
 % starts a new line in the output.
 \newlinechar = `^^J
 
+% Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error
+% messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.
+%
+\ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined
+  \let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0.
+\else
+  \def\linenumber{l.\the\inputlineno:\space}
+\fi
+
 % Set up fixed words for English if not already set.
 \ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined  \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi
 \ifx\putwordChapter\undefined   \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi
+\ifx\putworderror\undefined     \gdef\putworderror{error}\fi
 \ifx\putwordfile\undefined      \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi
 \ifx\putwordin\undefined        \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi
-\ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined     \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi
-\ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi
+\ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined       \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi
+\ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined   \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi
 \ifx\putwordInfo\undefined      \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi
 \ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi
 \ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined  \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi
@@ -131,46 +153,101 @@
 \ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined   \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi
 \ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi
 \ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi
-\ifx\putwordDeftypevar\undefined\gdef\putwordDeftypevar{Variable}\fi
 \ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined   \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi
-\ifx\putwordDeftypefun\undefined\gdef\putwordDeftypefun{Function}\fi
+
+% Since the category of space is not known, we have to be careful.
+\chardef\spacecat = 10
+\def\spaceisspace{\catcode`\ =\spacecat}
+
+% sometimes characters are active, so we need control sequences.
+\chardef\ampChar   = `\&
+\chardef\colonChar = `\:
+\chardef\commaChar = `\,
+\chardef\dashChar  = `\-
+\chardef\dotChar   = `\.
+\chardef\exclamChar= `\!
+\chardef\hashChar  = `\#
+\chardef\lquoteChar= `\`
+\chardef\questChar = `\?
+\chardef\rquoteChar= `\'
+\chardef\semiChar  = `\;
+\chardef\slashChar = `\/
+\chardef\underChar = `\_
 
 % Ignore a token.
 %
 \def\gobble#1{}
 
-\hyphenation{ap-pen-dix}
-\hyphenation{mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers}
-\hyphenation{eshell}
-\hyphenation{white-space}
+% The following is used inside several \edef's.
+\def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}
+
+% Hyphenation fixes.
+\hyphenation{
+  Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS Post-Script
+  ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps
+  data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script
+  man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm
+  par-a-digms rath-er rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces
+  spell-ing spell-ings
+  stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space
+  wide-spread wrap-around
+}
 
 % Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages.
-\newdimen \bindingoffset
-\newdimen \normaloffset
+\newdimen\bindingoffset
+\newdimen\normaloffset
 \newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight
 
+% For a final copy, take out the rectangles
+% that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided
+% that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).
+%
+\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt }
+
 % Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file
 % and nothing on the terminal.  We don't just call \tracingall here,
-% since that produces some useless output on the terminal.
+% since that produces some useless output on the terminal.  We also make
+% some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log
+% file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX.
 %
 \def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}%
-\ifx\eTeXversion\undefined
-\def\loggingall{\tracingcommands2 \tracingstats2
-   \tracingpages1 \tracingoutput1 \tracinglostchars1
-   \tracingmacros2 \tracingparagraphs1 \tracingrestores1
-   \showboxbreadth\maxdimen\showboxdepth\maxdimen
-}%
-\else
-\def\loggingall{\tracingcommands3 \tracingstats2
-   \tracingpages1 \tracingoutput1 \tracinglostchars1
-   \tracingmacros2 \tracingparagraphs1 \tracingrestores1
-   \tracingscantokens1 \tracingassigns1 \tracingifs1
-   \tracinggroups1 \tracingnesting2
-   \showboxbreadth\maxdimen\showboxdepth\maxdimen
+\def\loggingall{%
+  \tracingstats2
+  \tracingpages1
+  \tracinglostchars2  % 2 gives us more in etex
+  \tracingparagraphs1
+  \tracingoutput1
+  \tracingmacros2
+  \tracingrestores1
+  \showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen
+  \ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined\else % etex gives us more logging
+    \tracingscantokens1
+    \tracingifs1
+    \tracinggroups1
+    \tracingnesting2
+    \tracingassigns1
+  \fi
+  \tracingcommands3  % 3 gives us more in etex
+  \errorcontextlines16
 }%
-\fi
 
-% For @cropmarks command.
+% @errormsg{MSG}.  Do the index-like expansions on MSG, but if things
+% aren't perfect, it's not the end of the world, being an error message,
+% after all.
+% 
+\def\errormsg{\begingroup \indexnofonts \doerrormsg}
+\def\doerrormsg#1{\errmessage{#1}}
+
+% add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions.  If the last thing
+% we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space.
+%
+\def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount
+  \removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi}
+\def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount
+  \removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi}
+\def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount
+  \removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi}
+
 % Do @cropmarks to get crop marks.
 %
 \newif\ifcropmarks
@@ -184,6 +261,50 @@
 \newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt
 \newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in
 
+% Output a mark which sets \thischapter, \thissection and \thiscolor.
+% We dump everything together because we only have one kind of mark.
+% This works because we only use \botmark / \topmark, not \firstmark.
+%
+% A mark contains a subexpression of the \ifcase ... \fi construct.
+% \get*marks macros below extract the needed part using \ifcase.
+%
+% Another complication is to let the user choose whether \thischapter
+% (\thissection) refers to the chapter (section) in effect at the top
+% of a page, or that at the bottom of a page.  The solution is
+% described on page 260 of The TeXbook.  It involves outputting two
+% marks for the sectioning macros, one before the section break, and
+% one after.  I won't pretend I can describe this better than DEK...
+\def\domark{%
+  \toks0=\expandafter{\lastchapterdefs}%
+  \toks2=\expandafter{\lastsectiondefs}%
+  \toks4=\expandafter{\prevchapterdefs}%
+  \toks6=\expandafter{\prevsectiondefs}%
+  \toks8=\expandafter{\lastcolordefs}%
+  \mark{%
+                   \the\toks0 \the\toks2
+      \noexpand\or \the\toks4 \the\toks6
+    \noexpand\else \the\toks8
+  }%
+}
+% \topmark doesn't work for the very first chapter (after the title
+% page or the contents), so we use \firstmark there -- this gets us
+% the mark with the chapter defs, unless the user sneaks in, e.g.,
+% @setcolor (or @url, or @link, etc.) between @contents and the very
+% first @chapter.
+\def\gettopheadingmarks{%
+  \ifcase0\topmark\fi
+  \ifx\thischapter\empty \ifcase0\firstmark\fi \fi
+}
+\def\getbottomheadingmarks{\ifcase1\botmark\fi}
+\def\getcolormarks{\ifcase2\topmark\fi}
+
+% Avoid "undefined control sequence" errors.
+\def\lastchapterdefs{}
+\def\lastsectiondefs{}
+\def\prevchapterdefs{}
+\def\prevsectiondefs{}
+\def\lastcolordefs{}
+
 % Main output routine.
 \chardef\PAGE = 255
 \output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}
@@ -201,7 +322,9 @@
   %
   % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in
   % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code).
+  \ifodd\pageno \getoddheadingmarks \else \getevenheadingmarks \fi
   \setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}%
+  \ifodd\pageno \getoddfootingmarks \else \getevenfootingmarks \fi
   \setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}%
   %
   {%
@@ -209,11 +332,18 @@
     % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends
     % before the \shipout runs.
     %
-    \escapechar = `\\     % use backslash in output files.
     \indexdummies         % don't expand commands in the output.
     \normalturnoffactive  % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if
-                   % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example.
+               % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example.
+               % We don't want .vr (or whatever) entries like this:
+               % \entry{{\tt \indexbackslash }acronym}{32}{\code {\acronym}}
+               % "\acronym" won't work when it's read back in;
+               % it needs to be
+               % {\code {{\tt \backslashcurfont }acronym}
     \shipout\vbox{%
+      % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page.
+      \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi
+      %
       \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup
         \hsize = \outerhsize
         \vskip-\topandbottommargin
@@ -237,14 +367,12 @@
       \pagebody{#1}%
       \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt
         % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty.
-        % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingxxx.)
+        % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingyyy.)
         % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect.
-        \vskip 2\baselineskip
+        \vskip 24pt
         \unvbox\footlinebox
       \fi
       %
-      \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfmkdest{\the\pageno} \fi
-      %
       \ifcropmarks
           \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup
         \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup
@@ -262,7 +390,7 @@
       \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause
       \fi
     }% end of \shipout\vbox
-  }% end of group with \turnoffactive
+  }% end of group with \indexdummies
   \advancepageno
   \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi
 }
@@ -275,7 +403,7 @@
 % marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala)
 \ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present
   \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi
-\dimen@=\dp#1 \unvbox#1
+\dimen@=\dp#1\relax \unvbox#1\relax
 \ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi
 \ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi}
 }
@@ -295,195 +423,161 @@
 % the input line (except we remove a trailing comment).  #1 should be a
 % macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument.
 %
-\def\parsearg#1{%
-  \let\next = #1%
+\def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}}
+\def\parseargusing#1#2{%
+  \def\argtorun{#2}%
   \begingroup
     \obeylines
-    \futurelet\temp\parseargx
-}
-
-% If the next token is an obeyed space (from an @example environment or
-% the like), remove it and recurse.  Otherwise, we're done.
-\def\parseargx{%
-  % \obeyedspace is defined far below, after the definition of \sepspaces.
-  \ifx\obeyedspace\temp
-    \expandafter\parseargdiscardspace
-  \else
-    \expandafter\parseargline
-  \fi
+    \spaceisspace
+    #1%
+    \parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below.
 }
 
-% Remove a single space (as the delimiter token to the macro call).
-{\obeyspaces %
- \gdef\parseargdiscardspace {\futurelet\temp\parseargx}}
-
 {\obeylines %
   \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{%
     \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg.
-    %
-    % First remove any @c comment, then any @comment.
-    % Result of each macro is put in \toks0.
-    \argremovec #1\c\relax %
-    \expandafter\argremovecomment \the\toks0 \comment\relax %
-    %
-    % Call the caller's macro, saved as \next in \parsearg.
-    \expandafter\next\expandafter{\the\toks0}%
+    \argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm%
   }%
 }
 
-% Since all \c{,omment} does is throw away the argument, we can let TeX
-% do that for us.  The \relax here is matched by the \relax in the call
-% in \parseargline; it could be more or less anything, its purpose is
-% just to delimit the argument to the \c.
-\def\argremovec#1\c#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}}
-\def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}}
+% First remove any @comment, then any @c comment.
+\def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm}
+\def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M\ArgTerm}
 
-% \argremovec{,omment} might leave us with trailing spaces, though; e.g.,
+% Each occurrence of `\^^M' or `<space>\^^M' is replaced by a single space.
+%
+% \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, e.g.,
 %    @end itemize  @c foo
-% will have two active spaces as part of the argument with the
-% `itemize'.  Here we remove all active spaces from #1, and assign the
-% result to \toks0.
-%
-% This loses if there are any *other* active characters besides spaces
-% in the argument -- _ ^ +, for example -- since they get expanded.
-% Fortunately, Texinfo does not define any such commands.  (If it ever
-% does, the catcode of the characters in questionwill have to be changed
-% here.)  But this means we cannot call \removeactivespaces as part of
-% \argremovec{,omment}, since @c uses \parsearg, and thus the argument
-% that \parsearg gets might well have any character at all in it.
-%
-\def\removeactivespaces#1{%
-  \begingroup
-    \ignoreactivespaces
-    \edef\temp{#1}%
-    \global\toks0 = \expandafter{\temp}%
-  \endgroup
+% This space token undergoes the same procedure and is eventually removed
+% by \finishparsearg.
+%
+\def\argcheckspaces#1\^^M{\argcheckspacesX#1\^^M \^^M}
+\def\argcheckspacesX#1 \^^M{\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M}
+\def\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M#2\^^M#3\ArgTerm{%
+  \def\temp{#3}%
+  \ifx\temp\empty
+    % Do not use \next, perhaps the caller of \parsearg uses it; reuse \temp:
+    \let\temp\finishparsearg
+  \else
+    \let\temp\argcheckspaces
+  \fi
+  % Put the space token in:
+  \temp#1 #3\ArgTerm
 }
 
-% Change the active space to expand to nothing.
+% If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so
+% to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation.
+% We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it now,
+% just before passing the control to \argtorun.
+% (Similarly, we have to think about #3 of \argcheckspacesY above: it is
+% either the null string, or it ends with \^^M---thus there is no danger
+% that a pair of braces would be stripped.
 %
-\begingroup
+% But first, we have to remove the trailing space token.
+%
+\def\finishparsearg#1 \ArgTerm{\expandafter\argtorun\expandafter{#1}}
+
+% \parseargdef\foo{...}
+%	is roughly equivalent to
+% \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo}
+% \def\Xfoo#1{...}
+%
+% Actually, I use \csname\string\foo\endcsname, ie. \\foo, as it is my
+% favourite TeX trick.  --kasal, 16nov03
+
+\def\parseargdef#1{%
+  \expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1%
+}
+\def\doparseargdef#1#2{%
+  \def#2{\parsearg#1}%
+  \def#1##1%
+}
+
+% Several utility definitions with active space:
+{
   \obeyspaces
-  \gdef\ignoreactivespaces{\obeyspaces\let =\empty}
-\endgroup
+  \gdef\obeyedspace{ }
+
+  % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword
+  % space in the output.  Don't allow a line break at this space, as this
+  % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input
+  % should produce a line of output anyway.
+  %
+  \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}
+
+  % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces
+  % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the
+  % expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ).
+  \gdef\unsepspaces{\let =\space}
+}
 
 
 \def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next}
 
-%% These are used to keep @begin/@end levels from running away
-%% Call \inENV within environments (after a \begingroup)
-\newif\ifENV \ENVfalse \def\inENV{\ifENV\relax\else\ENVtrue\fi}
-\def\ENVcheck{%
-\ifENV\errmessage{Still within an environment; press RETURN to continue}
-\endgroup\fi} % This is not perfect, but it should reduce lossage
+% Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex.  It's used like this:
+%
+%   \envdef\foo{...}
+%   \def\Efoo{...}
+%
+% It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the
+% actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo.  \envdef also
+% defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks
+% whether the environment name matches.  The \checkenv macro can also be
+% used to check whether the current environment is the one expected.
+%
+% Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they
+% are not treated as environments; they don't open a group.  (The
+% implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this
+% special case.)
 
-% @begin foo  is the same as @foo, for now.
-\newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.}
 
-\outer\def\begin{\parsearg\beginxxx}
+% At run-time, environments start with this:
+\def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}}
+% initialize
+\let\thisenv\empty
 
-\def\beginxxx #1{%
-\expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\relax
-{\errhelp=\EMsimple \errmessage{Undefined command @begin #1}}\else
-\csname #1\endcsname\fi}
+% ... but they get defined via ``\envdef\foo{...}'':
+\long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
+\def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
 
-% @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo.
-%
-\def\end{\parsearg\endxxx}
-\def\endxxx #1{%
-  \removeactivespaces{#1}%
-  \edef\endthing{\the\toks0}%
-  %
-  \expandafter\ifx\csname E\endthing\endcsname\relax
-    \expandafter\ifx\csname \endthing\endcsname\relax
-      % There's no \foo, i.e., no ``environment'' foo.
-      \errhelp = \EMsimple
-      \errmessage{Undefined command `@end \endthing'}%
-    \else
-      \unmatchedenderror\endthing
-    \fi
+% Check whether we're in the right environment:
+\def\checkenv#1{%
+  \def\temp{#1}%
+  \ifx\thisenv\temp
   \else
-    % Everything's ok; the right environment has been started.
-    \csname E\endthing\endcsname
+    \badenverr
   \fi
 }
 
-% There is an environment #1, but it hasn't been started.  Give an error.
-%
-\def\unmatchedenderror#1{%
+% Environment mismatch, #1 expected:
+\def\badenverr{%
   \errhelp = \EMsimple
-  \errmessage{This `@end #1' doesn't have a matching `@#1'}%
+  \errmessage{This command can appear only \inenvironment\temp,
+    not \inenvironment\thisenv}%
 }
-
-% Define the control sequence \E#1 to give an unmatched @end error.
-%
-\def\defineunmatchedend#1{%
-  \expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\unmatchedenderror{#1}}%
+\def\inenvironment#1{%
+  \ifx#1\empty
+    outside of any environment%
+  \else
+    in environment \expandafter\string#1%
+  \fi
 }
 
-
-% Single-spacing is done by various environments (specifically, in
-% \nonfillstart and \quotations).
-\newskip\singlespaceskip \singlespaceskip = 12.5pt
-\def\singlespace{%
-  % Why was this kern here?  It messes up equalizing space above and below
-  % environments.  --karl, 6may93
-  %{\advance \baselineskip by -\singlespaceskip
-  %\kern \baselineskip}%
-  \setleading \singlespaceskip
+% @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo.
+% But first, it executes a specialized version of \checkenv
+%
+\parseargdef\end{%
+  \if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname
+  \else
+    % The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal.
+    \expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname
+    \csname E#1\endcsname
+    \endgroup
+  \fi
 }
 
-%% Simple single-character @ commands
-
-% @@ prints an @
-% Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr).
-\def\@{{\tt\char64}}
-
-% This is turned off because it was never documented
-% and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures.
-%% Define @` and @' to be the same as ` and '
-%% but suppressing ligatures.
-%\def\`{{`}}
-%\def\'{{'}}
-
-% Used to generate quoted braces.
-\def\mylbrace {{\tt\char123}}
-\def\myrbrace {{\tt\char125}}
-\let\{=\mylbrace
-\let\}=\myrbrace
-\begingroup
-  % Definitions to produce actual \{ & \} command in an index.
-  \catcode`\{ = 12 \catcode`\} = 12
-  \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2
-  \catcode`\@ = 0 \catcode`\\ = 12
-  @gdef@lbracecmd[\{]%
-  @gdef@rbracecmd[\}]%
-@endgroup
-
-% Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent
-% Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @v @H.
-\let\, = \c
-\let\dotaccent = \.
-\def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}}
-\let\tieaccent = \t
-\let\ubaraccent = \b
-\let\udotaccent = \d
+\newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.}
 
-% Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown
-% Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (and lowercase versions) @ss.
-\def\questiondown{?`}
-\def\exclamdown{!`}
-
-% Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents.
-\def\imacro{i}
-\def\jmacro{j}
-\def\dotless#1{%
-  \def\temp{#1}%
-  \ifx\temp\imacro \ptexi
-  \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \j
-  \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}%
-  \fi\fi
-}
 
 % Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space
 % equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space
@@ -501,16 +595,34 @@
 \def\:{\spacefactor=1000 }
 
 % @* forces a line break.
-\def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces}
+\def\*{\unskip\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces}
+
+% @/ allows a line break.
+\let\/=\allowbreak
 
 % @. is an end-of-sentence period.
-\def\.{.\spacefactor=3000 }
+\def\.{.\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
 
 % @! is an end-of-sentence bang.
-\def\!{!\spacefactor=3000 }
+\def\!{!\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
 
 % @? is an end-of-sentence query.
-\def\?{?\spacefactor=3000 }
+\def\?{?\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
+
+% @frenchspacing on|off  says whether to put extra space after punctuation.
+%
+\def\onword{on}
+\def\offword{off}
+%
+\parseargdef\frenchspacing{%
+  \def\temp{#1}%
+  \ifx\temp\onword \plainfrenchspacing
+  \else\ifx\temp\offword \plainnonfrenchspacing
+  \else
+    \errhelp = \EMsimple
+    \errmessage{Unknown @frenchspacing option `\temp', must be on|off}%
+  \fi\fi
+}
 
 % @w prevents a word break.  Without the \leavevmode, @w at the
 % beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would
@@ -525,47 +637,24 @@
 % therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and
 % the text is small, which looks bad.
 %
-\def\group{\begingroup
-  \ifnum\catcode13=\active \else
+% Another complication is that the group might be very large.  This can
+% cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it
+% does not have much material.  In this case, it's better to add an
+% explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom.  The
+% threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit
+% percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex).
+%
+\newbox\groupbox
+\def\vfilllimit{0.7}
+%
+\envdef\group{%
+  \ifnum\catcode`\^^M=\active \else
     \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp
     \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}%
   \fi
+  \startsavinginserts
   %
-  % The \vtop we start below produces a box with normal height and large
-  % depth; thus, TeX puts \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the
-  % next line of text is done) \lineskip glue after it.  (See p.82 of
-  % the TeXbook.)  Thus, space below is not quite equal to space
-  % above.  But it's pretty close.
-  \def\Egroup{%
-    \egroup           % End the \vtop.
-    \endgroup         % End the \group.
-  }%
-  %
-  \vtop\bgroup
-    % We have to put a strut on the last line in case the @group is in
-    % the midst of an example, rather than completely enclosing it.
-    % Otherwise, the interline space between the last line of the group
-    % and the first line afterwards is too small.  But we can't put the
-    % strut in \Egroup, since there it would be on a line by itself.
-    % Hence this just inserts a strut at the beginning of each line.
-    \everypar = {\strut}%
-    %
-    % Since we have a strut on every line, we don't need any of TeX's
-    % normal interline spacing.
-    \offinterlineskip
-    %
-    % OK, but now we have to do something about blank
-    % lines in the input in @example-like environments, which normally
-    % just turn into \lisppar, which will insert no space now that we've
-    % turned off the interline space.  Simplest is to make them be an
-    % empty paragraph.
-    \ifx\par\lisppar
-      \edef\par{\leavevmode \par}%
-      %
-      % Reset ^^M's definition to new definition of \par.
-      \obeylines
-    \fi
-    %
+  \setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup
     % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as
     % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an
     % end-of-line in the output.  We don't want the end-of-line after
@@ -575,6 +664,32 @@
     \comment
 }
 %
+% The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts
+% \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done)
+% \lineskip glue after it.  Thus, space below is not quite equal to space
+% above.  But it's pretty close.
+\def\Egroup{%
+    % To get correct interline space between the last line of the group
+    % and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth.
+    \endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar.
+    \global\dimen1 = \prevdepth
+  \egroup           % End the \vtop.
+  % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box.
+  \dimen0 = \ht\groupbox  \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox
+  % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less).
+  \dimen2 = \pageheight   \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal
+  % if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big
+  % group, force a page break.
+  \ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2
+    \ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\pageheight
+      \page
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \box\groupbox
+  \prevdepth = \dimen1
+  \checkinserts
+}
+%
 % TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help
 % message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'.
 %
@@ -587,18 +702,7 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 
 \newdimen\mil  \mil=0.001in
 
-\def\need{\parsearg\needx}
-
-% Old definition--didn't work.
-%\def\needx #1{\par %
-%% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally
-%% if the depth of the box does not fit.
-%{\baselineskip=0pt%
-%\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\nobreak
-%\prevdepth=-1000pt
-%}}
-
-\def\needx#1{%
+\parseargdef\need{%
   % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a
   % paragraph.
   \par
@@ -637,37 +741,11 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
   \fi
 }
 
-% @br   forces paragraph break
+% @br   forces paragraph break (and is undocumented).
 
 \let\br = \par
 
-% @dots{} output an ellipsis using the current font.
-% We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in a typewriter
-% font as three actual period characters.
-%
-\def\dots{%
-  \leavevmode
-  \hbox to 1.5em{%
-    \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil minus 0.25fil
-    .\hss.\hss.%
-    \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil minus 0.5fil
-  }%
-}
-
-% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis.
-%
-\def\enddots{%
-  \leavevmode
-  \hbox to 2em{%
-    \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil minus 0.25fil
-    .\hss.\hss.\hss.%
-    \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil minus 0.5fil
-  }%
-  \spacefactor=3000
-}
-
-
-% @page    forces the start of a new page
+% @page forces the start of a new page.
 %
 \def\page{\par\vfill\supereject}
 
@@ -679,78 +757,196 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 \newskip\exdentamount
 
 % This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun.
-\def\exdent{\parsearg\exdentyyy}
-\def\exdentyyy #1{{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}}
+\parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}
 
 % This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example.
-\def\nofillexdent{\parsearg\nofillexdentyyy}
-\def\nofillexdentyyy #1{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount
-\leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}}
-
-% @inmargin{TEXT} puts TEXT in the margin next to the current paragraph.
+\parseargdef\nofillexdent{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount
+  \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}}
 
-\def\inmargin#1{%
-\strut\vadjust{\nobreak\kern-\strutdepth
-  \vtop to \strutdepth{\baselineskip\strutdepth\vss
-  \llap{\rightskip=\inmarginspacing \vbox{\noindent #1}}\null}}}
+% @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current
+% paragraph.  For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion
+% class.  WHICH is `l' or `r'.  Not documented, written for gawk manual.
+%
 \newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm
 \def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox}
+%
+\def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{%
+  \nobreak
+  \kern-\strutdepth
+  \vtop to \strutdepth{%
+    \baselineskip=\strutdepth
+    \vss
+    % if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to
+    % make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size.
+    \ifx#1l%
+      \llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}%
+    \else
+      \rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}%
+    \fi
+    \null
+  }%
+}}
+\def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l}
+\def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r}
+%
+% @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]}
+% (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right;
+% else use TEXT for both).
+%
+\def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish}
+\def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing.
+  \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
+  \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
+    \def\lefttext{#1}%  have both texts
+    \def\righttext{#2}%
+  \else
+    \def\lefttext{#1}%  have only one text
+    \def\righttext{#1}%
+  \fi
+  %
+  \ifodd\pageno
+    \def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin
+  \else
+    \def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}%
+  \fi
+  \temp
+}
 
-%\hbox{{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}}
-
-% @include file    insert text of that file as input.
-% Allow normal characters that  we make active in the argument (a file name).
-\def\include{\begingroup
-  \catcode`\\=12
-  \catcode`~=12
-  \catcode`^=12
-  \catcode`_=12
-  \catcode`|=12
-  \catcode`<=12
-  \catcode`>=12
-  \catcode`+=12
-  \parsearg\includezzz}
-% Restore active chars for included file.
-\def\includezzz#1{\endgroup\begingroup
-  % Read the included file in a group so nested @include's work.
+% @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line.  It should
+% surround any changed text.  This approach does *not* work if the
+% change spans more than two lines of output.  To handle that, we would
+% have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main
+% vertical list for the beginning and end of each change).  This command
+% is not documented, not supported, and doesn't work.
+%
+\def\|{%
+  % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode.
+  \leavevmode
+  %
+  % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output.
+  \vadjust{%
+    % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current
+    % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record.
+    \vskip-\baselineskip
+    %
+    % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type.  So
+    % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin.
+    \llap{%
+      %
+      % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'.
+      \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt
+      %
+      % This is the space between the bar and the text.
+      \hskip 12pt
+    }%
+  }%
+}
+
+% @include FILE -- \input text of FILE.
+%
+\def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz}
+\def\includezzz#1{%
+  \pushthisfilestack
   \def\thisfile{#1}%
-  \input\thisfile
-\endgroup}
+  {%
+    \makevalueexpandable  % we want to expand any @value in FILE.
+    \turnoffactive        % and allow special characters in the expansion
+    \indexnofonts         % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names.
+    \wlog{texinfo.tex: doing @include of #1^^J}%
+    \edef\temp{\noexpand\input #1 }%
+    %
+    % This trickery is to read FILE outside of a group, in case it makes
+    % definitions, etc.
+    \expandafter
+  }\temp
+  \popthisfilestack
+}
+\def\filenamecatcodes{%
+  \catcode`\\=\other
+  \catcode`~=\other
+  \catcode`^=\other
+  \catcode`_=\other
+  \catcode`|=\other
+  \catcode`<=\other
+  \catcode`>=\other
+  \catcode`+=\other
+  \catcode`-=\other
+  \catcode`\`=\other
+  \catcode`\'=\other
+}
 
-\def\thisfile{}
+\def\pushthisfilestack{%
+  \expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm
+}
+\def\pushthisfilestackX{%
+  \expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm
+}
+\def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {%
+  \gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}%
+}
 
-% @center line   outputs that line, centered
+\def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty}
+\def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error:
+  the stack of filenames is empty.}}
+%
+\def\thisfile{}
 
-\def\center{\parsearg\centerzzz}
-\def\centerzzz #1{{\advance\hsize by -\leftskip
-\advance\hsize by -\rightskip
-\centerline{#1}}}
+% @center line
+% outputs that line, centered.
+%
+\parseargdef\center{%
+  \ifhmode
+    \let\centersub\centerH
+  \else
+    \let\centersub\centerV
+  \fi
+  \centersub{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}%
+  \let\centersub\relax % don't let the definition persist, just in case
+}
+\def\centerH#1{{%
+  \hfil\break
+  \advance\hsize by -\leftskip
+  \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
+  \line{#1}%
+  \break
+}}
+%
+\newcount\centerpenalty
+\def\centerV#1{%
+  % The idea here is the same as in \startdefun, \cartouche, etc.: if
+  % @center is the first thing after a section heading, we need to wipe
+  % out the negative parskip inserted by \sectionheading, but still
+  % prevent a page break here.
+  \centerpenalty = \lastpenalty
+  \ifnum\centerpenalty>10000 \vskip\parskip \fi
+  \ifnum\centerpenalty>9999 \penalty\centerpenalty \fi
+  \line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}%
+}
 
 % @sp n   outputs n lines of vertical space
-
-\def\sp{\parsearg\spxxx}
-\def\spxxx #1{\vskip #1\baselineskip}
+%
+\parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip}
 
 % @comment ...line which is ignored...
 % @c is the same as @comment
 % @ignore ... @end ignore  is another way to write a comment
-
+%
 \def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other%
 \catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other%
 \commentxxx}
 {\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}}
-
+%
 \let\c=\comment
 
 % @paragraphindent NCHARS
 % We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough.
-% We cannot implement @paragraphindent asis, though.
-% 
+% NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'.
+% We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though.
+%
 \def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords
 \def\noneword{none}
 %
-\def\paragraphindent{\parsearg\doparagraphindent}
-\def\doparagraphindent#1{%
+\parseargdef\paragraphindent{%
   \def\temp{#1}%
   \ifx\temp\asisword
   \else
@@ -767,8 +963,7 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 % We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent.
 % It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but
 % I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent.
-\def\exampleindent{\parsearg\doexampleindent}
-\def\doexampleindent#1{%
+\parseargdef\exampleindent{%
   \def\temp{#1}%
   \ifx\temp\asisword
   \else
@@ -780,26 +975,58 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
   \fi
 }
 
-% @asis just yields its argument.  Used with @table, for example.
+% @firstparagraphindent WORD
+% If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph
+% after a section heading.  If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such
+% paragraphs.
 %
-\def\asis#1{#1}
+% The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling
+% \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do.
+% We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD.
+% By default, we suppress indentation.
+%
+\def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent}
+\def\insertword{insert}
+%
+\parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{%
+  \def\temp{#1}%
+  \ifx\temp\noneword
+    \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent
+  \else\ifx\temp\insertword
+    \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax
+  \else
+    \errhelp = \EMsimple
+    \errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `\temp'}%
+  \fi\fi
+}
 
-% @math means output in math mode.
-% We don't use $'s directly in the definition of \math because control
-% sequences like \math are expanded when the toc file is written.  Then,
-% we read the toc file back, the $'s will be normal characters (as they
-% should be, according to the definition of Texinfo).  So we must use a
-% control sequence to switch into and out of math mode.
+% Here is how we actually suppress indentation.  Redefine \everypar to
+% \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty.
 %
-% This isn't quite enough for @math to work properly in indices, but it
-% seems unlikely it will ever be needed there.
+% We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next
+% paragraph.
 %
-\let\implicitmath = $
-\def\math#1{\implicitmath #1\implicitmath}
+\gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{%
+  \gdef\indent{%
+    \restorefirstparagraphindent
+    \indent
+  }%
+  \gdef\noindent{%
+    \restorefirstparagraphindent
+    \noindent
+  }%
+  \global\everypar = {%
+    \kern -\parindent
+    \restorefirstparagraphindent
+  }%
+}
+
+\gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{%
+  \global \let \indent = \ptexindent
+  \global \let \noindent = \ptexnoindent
+  \global \everypar = {}%
+}
 
-% @bullet and @minus need the same treatment as @math, just above.
-\def\bullet{\implicitmath\ptexbullet\implicitmath}
-\def\minus{\implicitmath-\implicitmath}
 
 % @refill is a no-op.
 \let\refill=\relax
@@ -815,20 +1042,20 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 % So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input.
 % This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo.
 \def\setfilename{%
+   \fixbackslash  % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'.
    \iflinks
-     \readauxfile
+     \tryauxfile
+     % Open the new aux file.  TeX will close it automatically at exit.
+     \immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux
    \fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case.
    \openindices
-   \fixbackslash  % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'.
-   \global\let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds.
+   \let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds.
    %
    % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it.
    % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc.
-   % Just to be on the safe side, close the input stream before the \input.
    \openin 1 texinfo.cnf
-   \ifeof1 \let\temp=\relax \else \def\temp{\input texinfo.cnf }\fi
-   \closein1
-   \temp
+   \ifeof 1 \else \input texinfo.cnf \fi
+   \closein 1
    %
    \comment % Ignore the actual filename.
 }
@@ -864,143 +1091,329 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 \newif\ifpdf
 \newif\ifpdfmakepagedest
 
-\ifx\pdfoutput\undefined
-  \pdffalse
-  \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble
-  \let\pdfurl = \gobble
-  \let\endlink = \relax
-  \let\linkcolor = \relax
-  \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax
+% when pdftex is run in dvi mode, \pdfoutput is defined (so \pdfoutput=1
+% can be set).  So we test for \relax and 0 as well as being undefined.
+\ifx\pdfoutput\thisisundefined
 \else
-  \pdftrue
-  \pdfoutput = 1
-  \input pdfcolor
+  \ifx\pdfoutput\relax
+  \else
+    \ifcase\pdfoutput
+    \else
+      \pdftrue
+    \fi
+  \fi
+\fi
+
+% PDF uses PostScript string constants for the names of xref targets,
+% for display in the outlines, and in other places.  Thus, we have to
+% double any backslashes.  Otherwise, a name like "\node" will be
+% interpreted as a newline (\n), followed by o, d, e.  Not good.
+% 
+% See http://www.ntg.nl/pipermail/ntg-pdftex/2004-July/000654.html and
+% related messages.  The final outcome is that it is up to the TeX user
+% to double the backslashes and otherwise make the string valid, so
+% that's what we do.  pdftex 1.30.0 (ca.2005) introduced a primitive to
+% do this reliably, so we use it.
+
+% #1 is a control sequence in which to do the replacements,
+% which we \xdef.
+\def\txiescapepdf#1{%
+  \ifx\pdfescapestring\thisisundefined
+    % No primitive available; should we give a warning or log?
+    % Many times it won't matter.
+  \else
+    % The expandable \pdfescapestring primitive escapes parentheses,
+    % backslashes, and other special chars.
+    \xdef#1{\pdfescapestring{#1}}%
+  \fi
+}
+
+\newhelp\nopdfimagehelp{Texinfo supports .png, .jpg, .jpeg, and .pdf images
+with PDF output, and none of those formats could be found.  (.eps cannot
+be supported due to the design of the PDF format; use regular TeX (DVI
+output) for that.)}
+
+\ifpdf
+  %
+  % Color manipulation macros based on pdfcolor.tex,
+  % except using rgb instead of cmyk; the latter is said to render as a
+  % very dark gray on-screen and a very dark halftone in print, instead
+  % of actual black.
+  \def\rgbDarkRed{0.50 0.09 0.12}
+  \def\rgbBlack{0 0 0}
+  %
+  % k sets the color for filling (usual text, etc.);
+  % K sets the color for stroking (thin rules, e.g., normal _'s).
+  \def\pdfsetcolor#1{\pdfliteral{#1 rg  #1 RG}}
+  %
+  % Set color, and create a mark which defines \thiscolor accordingly,
+  % so that \makeheadline knows which color to restore.
+  \def\setcolor#1{%
+    \xdef\lastcolordefs{\gdef\noexpand\thiscolor{#1}}%
+    \domark
+    \pdfsetcolor{#1}%
+  }
+  %
+  \def\maincolor{\rgbBlack}
+  \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}
+  \edef\thiscolor{\maincolor}
+  \def\lastcolordefs{}
+  %
+  \def\makefootline{%
+    \baselineskip24pt
+    \line{\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\footline}%
+  }
+  %
+  \def\makeheadline{%
+    \vbox to 0pt{%
+      \vskip-22.5pt
+      \line{%
+        \vbox to8.5pt{}%
+        % Extract \thiscolor definition from the marks.
+        \getcolormarks
+        % Typeset the headline with \maincolor, then restore the color.
+        \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\headline\pdfsetcolor{\thiscolor}%
+      }%
+      \vss
+    }%
+    \nointerlineskip
+  }
+  %
+  %
+  \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines}
+  %
+  % #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto).
   \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{%
-    \def\imagewidth{#2}%
-    \def\imageheight{#3}%
+    \def\pdfimagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
+    \def\pdfimageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
+    %
+    % pdftex (and the PDF format) support .pdf, .png, .jpg (among
+    % others).  Let's try in that order, PDF first since if
+    % someone has a scalable image, presumably better to use that than a
+    % bitmap.
+    \let\pdfimgext=\empty
+    \begingroup
+      \openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1
+        \openin 1 #1.PDF \ifeof 1
+          \openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1
+            \openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1
+              \openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1
+                \openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1
+                  \errhelp = \nopdfimagehelp
+                  \errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for pdf}%
+                \else \gdef\pdfimgext{JPG}%
+                \fi
+              \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpeg}%
+              \fi
+            \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpg}%
+            \fi
+          \else \gdef\pdfimgext{png}%
+          \fi
+        \else \gdef\pdfimgext{PDF}%
+        \fi
+      \else \gdef\pdfimgext{pdf}%
+      \fi
+      \closein 1
+    \endgroup
+    %
+    % without \immediate, ancient pdftex seg faults when the same image is
+    % included twice.  (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.)
     \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
-      \pdfimage
+      \immediate\pdfimage
     \else
-      \pdfximage
+      \immediate\pdfximage
     \fi
-      \ifx\empty\imagewidth\else width \imagewidth \fi
-      \ifx\empty\imageheight\else height \imageheight \fi
-      {#1.pdf}%
+      \ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \pdfimagewidth \fi
+      \ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \pdfimageheight \fi
+      \ifnum\pdftexversion<13
+         #1.\pdfimgext
+       \else
+         {#1.\pdfimgext}%
+       \fi
     \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else
       \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage
     \fi}
-  \def\pdfmkdest#1{\pdfdest name{#1@} xyz}
-  \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1@}
-  \let\linkcolor = \Cyan
-  \def\endlink{\Black\pdfendlink}
+  %
+  \def\pdfmkdest#1{{%
+    % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters
+    % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title.
+    \indexnofonts
+    \turnoffactive
+    \makevalueexpandable
+    \def\pdfdestname{#1}%
+    \txiescapepdf\pdfdestname
+    \safewhatsit{\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz}%
+  }}
+  %
+  % used to mark target names; must be expandable.
+  \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1}
+  %
+  % by default, use a color that is dark enough to print on paper as
+  % nearly black, but still distinguishable for online viewing.
+  \def\urlcolor{\rgbDarkRed}
+  \def\linkcolor{\rgbDarkRed}
+  \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\pdfendlink}
+  %
   % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines
   % come from Petr Olsak
   \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0%
     \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi}
   \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax
-    \advance\tempnum by1
+    \advance\tempnum by 1
     \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}}
-  \def\pdfmakeoutlines{{%
-    \openin 1 \jobname.toc
-    \ifeof 1\else\bgroup
-      \closein 1 
-      \indexnofonts
-      \def\tt{}
-      % thanh's hack / proper braces in bookmarks  
-      \edef\mylbrace{\iftrue \string{\else}\fi}\let\{=\mylbrace
-      \edef\myrbrace{\iffalse{\else\string}\fi}\let\}=\myrbrace
-      %
-      \def\chapentry ##1##2##3{}
-      \def\unnumbchapentry ##1##2{}
-      \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{\advancenumber{chap##2}}
-      \def\unnumbsecentry ##1##2{}
-      \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{\advancenumber{sec##2.##3}}
-      \def\unnumbsubsecentry ##1##2{}
-      \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{\advancenumber{subsec##2.##3.##4}}
-      \def\unnumbsubsubsecentry ##1##2{}
-      \input \jobname.toc
-      \def\chapentry ##1##2##3{%
-        \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##3}}count-\expnumber{chap##2}{##1}}
-      \def\unnumbchapentry ##1##2{%
-        \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##2}}{##1}}
-      \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{%
-        \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##4}}count-\expnumber{sec##2.##3}{##1}}
-      \def\unnumbsecentry ##1##2{%
-        \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##2}}{##1}}
-      \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{%
-        \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##5}}count-\expnumber{subsec##2.##3.##4}{##1}}
-      \def\unnumbsubsecentry ##1##2{%
-        \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##2}}{##1}}
-      \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{%
-        \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##6}}{##1}}
-      \def\unnumbsubsubsecentry ##1##2{%
-        \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##2}}{##1}}
-      \input \jobname.toc
-    \egroup\fi
-  }}
-  \def\makelinks #1,{%
-    \def\params{#1}\def\E{END}%
-    \ifx\params\E
-      \let\nextmakelinks=\relax
+  %
+  % #1 is the section text, which is what will be displayed in the
+  % outline by the pdf viewer.  #2 is the pdf expression for the number
+  % of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections).  #3 is the node text,
+  % which might be empty if this toc entry had no corresponding node.
+  % #4 is the page number
+  %
+  \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{%
+    % Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the
+    % page number.  We could generate a destination for the section
+    % text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't
+    % seem worth the trouble, since most documents are normally structured.
+    \edef\pdfoutlinedest{#3}%
+    \ifx\pdfoutlinedest\empty
+      \def\pdfoutlinedest{#4}%
     \else
-      \let\nextmakelinks=\makelinks
-      \ifnum\lnkcount>0,\fi
-      \picknum{#1}%
-      \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} 
-        goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\the\pgn}}%
-      \linkcolor #1%
-      \advance\lnkcount by 1%
-      \endlink
+      \txiescapepdf\pdfoutlinedest
     \fi
-    \nextmakelinks
+    %
+    % Also escape PDF chars in the display string.
+    \edef\pdfoutlinetext{#1}%
+    \txiescapepdf\pdfoutlinetext
+    %
+    \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfoutlinedest}}#2{\pdfoutlinetext}%
   }
-  \def\picknum#1{\expandafter\pn#1}
-  \def\pn#1{%
-    \def\p{#1}%
-    \ifx\p\lbrace
-      \let\nextpn=\ppn
-    \else
-      \let\nextpn=\ppnn
-      \def\first{#1}
-    \fi
-    \nextpn
+  %
+  \def\pdfmakeoutlines{%
+    \begingroup
+      % Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline.
+      \def\partentry##1##2##3##4{}% ignore parts in the outlines
+      \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
+	\def\thischapnum{##2}%
+	\def\thissecnum{0}%
+	\def\thissubsecnum{0}%
+      }%
+      \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
+	\advancenumber{chap\thischapnum}%
+	\def\thissecnum{##2}%
+	\def\thissubsecnum{0}%
+      }%
+      \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
+	\advancenumber{sec\thissecnum}%
+	\def\thissubsecnum{##2}%
+      }%
+      \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
+	\advancenumber{subsec\thissubsecnum}%
+      }%
+      \def\thischapnum{0}%
+      \def\thissecnum{0}%
+      \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
+      %
+      % use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et
+      % al. a second time, below.
+      \def\appentry{\numchapentry}%
+      \def\appsecentry{\numsecentry}%
+      \def\appsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
+      \def\appsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
+      \def\unnchapentry{\numchapentry}%
+      \def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}%
+      \def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
+      \def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
+      \readdatafile{toc}%
+      %
+      % Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines.
+      % The `-' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of
+      % subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above.
+      %
+      % We use the node names as the destinations.
+      \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
+        \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
+      \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
+        \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{sec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
+      \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
+        \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{subsec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
+      \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% count is always zero
+        \dopdfoutline{##1}{}{##3}{##4}}%
+      %
+      % PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of
+      % document fonts.  Therefore we cannot use special characters,
+      % since the encoding is unknown.  For example, the eogonek from
+      % Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character.  Info from
+      % Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100.
+      %
+      % TODO this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to
+      % their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding.  Too
+      % much work for too little return.  Just use the ASCII equivalents
+      % we use for the index sort strings.
+      % 
+      \indexnofonts
+      \setupdatafile
+      % We can have normal brace characters in the PDF outlines, unlike
+      % Texinfo index files.  So set that up.
+      \def\{{\lbracecharliteral}%
+      \def\}{\rbracecharliteral}%
+      \catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash
+      \input \tocreadfilename
+    \endgroup
   }
-  \def\ppn#1{\pgn=#1\gobble}
-  \def\ppnn{\pgn=\first}
-  \def\pdfmklnk#1{\lnkcount=0\makelinks #1,END,}
-  \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
+  {\catcode`[=1 \catcode`]=2
+   \catcode`{=\other \catcode`}=\other
+   \gdef\lbracecharliteral[{]%
+   \gdef\rbracecharliteral[}]%
+  ]
+  %
   \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}%
     \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax
     \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces
-      \ifx\p\space\else\addtokens{\filename}{\PP}%
-        \advance\filenamelength by 1
-      \fi
+      \addtokens{\filename}{\PP}%
+      \advance\filenamelength by 1
     \fi
     \nextsp}
-  \def\getfilename#1{\filenamelength=0\expandafter\skipspaces#1|\relax}
+  \def\getfilename#1{%
+    \filenamelength=0
+    % If we don't expand the argument now, \skipspaces will get
+    % snagged on things like "@value{foo}".
+    \edef\temp{#1}%
+    \expandafter\skipspaces\temp|\relax
+  }
   \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
     \let \startlink \pdfannotlink
   \else
     \let \startlink \pdfstartlink
   \fi
+  % make a live url in pdf output.
   \def\pdfurl#1{%
     \begingroup
-      \normalturnoffactive\def\@{@}%
-      \leavevmode\Red
+      % it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not
+      % tried to figure out what each command should do in the context
+      % of @url.  for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one
+      % people have actually reported a problem with.
+      %
+      \normalturnoffactive
+      \def\@{@}%
+      \let\/=\empty
+      \makevalueexpandable
+      % do we want to go so far as to use \indexnofonts instead of just
+      % special-casing \var here?
+      \def\var##1{##1}%
+      %
+      \leavevmode\setcolor{\urlcolor}%
       \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
         user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}%
-        % #1
     \endgroup}
   \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}}
   \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
   \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks}
   \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}}
   \def\maketoks{%
-    \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|
+    \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax
     \ifx\first0\adn0
     \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3
     \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6
-    \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9 
+    \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9
     \else
       \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi
       \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else
@@ -1013,43 +1426,367 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
   \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}%
     {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0}
   \def\pdflink#1{%
-    \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\mkpgn{#1}}
-    \linkcolor #1\endlink}
-  \def\mkpgn#1{#1@} 
+    \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}}
+    \setcolor{\linkcolor}#1\endlink}
   \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st}
-\fi % \ifx\pdfoutput
+\else
+  % non-pdf mode
+  \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble
+  \let\pdfurl = \gobble
+  \let\endlink = \relax
+  \let\setcolor = \gobble
+  \let\pdfsetcolor = \gobble
+  \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax
+\fi  % \ifx\pdfoutput
 
 
 \message{fonts,}
-% Font-change commands.
+
+% Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle.
+% For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @b{@i{foo}} prints foo in
+% italics, not bold italics.
+%
+\def\setfontstyle#1{%
+  \def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd.
+  \csname ten#1\endcsname  % change the current font
+}
+
+% Select #1 fonts with the current style.
+%
+\def\selectfonts#1{\csname #1fonts\endcsname \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname}
+
+\def\rm{\fam=0 \setfontstyle{rm}}
+\def\it{\fam=\itfam \setfontstyle{it}}
+\def\sl{\fam=\slfam \setfontstyle{sl}}
+\def\bf{\fam=\bffam \setfontstyle{bf}}\def\bfstylename{bf}
+\def\tt{\fam=\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt}}
+
+% Unfortunately, we have to override this for titles and the like, since
+% in those cases "rm" is bold.  Sigh.
+\def\rmisbold{\rm\def\curfontstyle{bf}}
 
 % Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not.
-% So we set up a \sf analogous to plain's \rm, etc.
+% So we set up a \sf.
 \newfam\sffam
-\def\sf{\fam=\sffam \tensf}
+\def\sf{\fam=\sffam \setfontstyle{sf}}
 \let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf.
 
-% We don't need math for this one.
-\def\ttsl{\tenttsl}
+% We don't need math for this font style.
+\def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}}
 
-% Use Computer Modern fonts at \magstephalf (11pt).
-\newcount\mainmagstep
-\mainmagstep=\magstephalf
 
-% Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the
-% specified font prefix (normally `cm').
-% #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor
-\def\setfont#1#2#3#4{\font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4}
+% Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size
+% correspondingly.  There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers
+% used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined.
+%
+\def\lineskipfactor{.08333}
+\def\strutheightpercent{.70833}
+\def\strutdepthpercent {.29167}
+%
+% can get a sort of poor man's double spacing by redefining this.
+\def\baselinefactor{1}
+%
+\newdimen\textleading
+\def\setleading#1{%
+  \dimen0 = #1\relax
+  \normalbaselineskip = \baselinefactor\dimen0
+  \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip
+  \normalbaselines
+  \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{%
+    \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip
+                    depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip
+  }%
+}
+
+% PDF CMaps.  See also LaTeX's t1.cmap.
+%
+% do nothing with this by default.
+\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1\endcsname\gobble
+\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname\gobble
+\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname\gobble
+
+% if we are producing pdf, and we have \pdffontattr, then define cmaps.
+% (\pdffontattr was introduced many years ago, but people still run
+% older pdftex's; it's easy to conditionalize, so we do.)
+\ifpdf \ifx\pdffontattr\thisisundefined \else
+  \begingroup
+    \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
+    \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
+%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
+%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
+%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1-0)
+%%Title: (TeX-OT1-0 TeX OT1 0)
+%%Version: 1.000
+%%EndComments
+/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
+12 dict begin
+begincmap
+/CIDSystemInfo
+<< /Registry (TeX)
+/Ordering (OT1)
+/Supplement 0
+>> def
+/CMapName /TeX-OT1-0 def
+/CMapType 2 def
+1 begincodespacerange
+<00> <7F>
+endcodespacerange
+8 beginbfrange
+<00> <01> <0393>
+<09> <0A> <03A8>
+<23> <26> <0023>
+<28> <3B> <0028>
+<3F> <5B> <003F>
+<5D> <5E> <005D>
+<61> <7A> <0061>
+<7B> <7C> <2013>
+endbfrange
+40 beginbfchar
+<02> <0398>
+<03> <039B>
+<04> <039E>
+<05> <03A0>
+<06> <03A3>
+<07> <03D2>
+<08> <03A6>
+<0B> <00660066>
+<0C> <00660069>
+<0D> <0066006C>
+<0E> <006600660069>
+<0F> <00660066006C>
+<10> <0131>
+<11> <0237>
+<12> <0060>
+<13> <00B4>
+<14> <02C7>
+<15> <02D8>
+<16> <00AF>
+<17> <02DA>
+<18> <00B8>
+<19> <00DF>
+<1A> <00E6>
+<1B> <0153>
+<1C> <00F8>
+<1D> <00C6>
+<1E> <0152>
+<1F> <00D8>
+<21> <0021>
+<22> <201D>
+<27> <2019>
+<3C> <00A1>
+<3D> <003D>
+<3E> <00BF>
+<5C> <201C>
+<5F> <02D9>
+<60> <2018>
+<7D> <02DD>
+<7E> <007E>
+<7F> <00A8>
+endbfchar
+endcmap
+CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
+end
+end
+%%EndResource
+%%EOF
+    }\endgroup
+  \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1\endcsname#1{%
+    \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
+  }%
+%
+% \cmapOT1IT
+  \begingroup
+    \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
+    \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
+%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
+%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
+%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1IT-0)
+%%Title: (TeX-OT1IT-0 TeX OT1IT 0)
+%%Version: 1.000
+%%EndComments
+/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
+12 dict begin
+begincmap
+/CIDSystemInfo
+<< /Registry (TeX)
+/Ordering (OT1IT)
+/Supplement 0
+>> def
+/CMapName /TeX-OT1IT-0 def
+/CMapType 2 def
+1 begincodespacerange
+<00> <7F>
+endcodespacerange
+8 beginbfrange
+<00> <01> <0393>
+<09> <0A> <03A8>
+<25> <26> <0025>
+<28> <3B> <0028>
+<3F> <5B> <003F>
+<5D> <5E> <005D>
+<61> <7A> <0061>
+<7B> <7C> <2013>
+endbfrange
+42 beginbfchar
+<02> <0398>
+<03> <039B>
+<04> <039E>
+<05> <03A0>
+<06> <03A3>
+<07> <03D2>
+<08> <03A6>
+<0B> <00660066>
+<0C> <00660069>
+<0D> <0066006C>
+<0E> <006600660069>
+<0F> <00660066006C>
+<10> <0131>
+<11> <0237>
+<12> <0060>
+<13> <00B4>
+<14> <02C7>
+<15> <02D8>
+<16> <00AF>
+<17> <02DA>
+<18> <00B8>
+<19> <00DF>
+<1A> <00E6>
+<1B> <0153>
+<1C> <00F8>
+<1D> <00C6>
+<1E> <0152>
+<1F> <00D8>
+<21> <0021>
+<22> <201D>
+<23> <0023>
+<24> <00A3>
+<27> <2019>
+<3C> <00A1>
+<3D> <003D>
+<3E> <00BF>
+<5C> <201C>
+<5F> <02D9>
+<60> <2018>
+<7D> <02DD>
+<7E> <007E>
+<7F> <00A8>
+endbfchar
+endcmap
+CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
+end
+end
+%%EndResource
+%%EOF
+    }\endgroup
+  \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname#1{%
+    \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
+  }%
+%
+% \cmapOT1TT
+  \begingroup
+    \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
+    \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
+%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
+%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
+%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1TT-0)
+%%Title: (TeX-OT1TT-0 TeX OT1TT 0)
+%%Version: 1.000
+%%EndComments
+/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
+12 dict begin
+begincmap
+/CIDSystemInfo
+<< /Registry (TeX)
+/Ordering (OT1TT)
+/Supplement 0
+>> def
+/CMapName /TeX-OT1TT-0 def
+/CMapType 2 def
+1 begincodespacerange
+<00> <7F>
+endcodespacerange
+5 beginbfrange
+<00> <01> <0393>
+<09> <0A> <03A8>
+<21> <26> <0021>
+<28> <5F> <0028>
+<61> <7E> <0061>
+endbfrange
+32 beginbfchar
+<02> <0398>
+<03> <039B>
+<04> <039E>
+<05> <03A0>
+<06> <03A3>
+<07> <03D2>
+<08> <03A6>
+<0B> <2191>
+<0C> <2193>
+<0D> <0027>
+<0E> <00A1>
+<0F> <00BF>
+<10> <0131>
+<11> <0237>
+<12> <0060>
+<13> <00B4>
+<14> <02C7>
+<15> <02D8>
+<16> <00AF>
+<17> <02DA>
+<18> <00B8>
+<19> <00DF>
+<1A> <00E6>
+<1B> <0153>
+<1C> <00F8>
+<1D> <00C6>
+<1E> <0152>
+<1F> <00D8>
+<20> <2423>
+<27> <2019>
+<60> <2018>
+<7F> <00A8>
+endbfchar
+endcmap
+CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
+end
+end
+%%EndResource
+%%EOF
+    }\endgroup
+  \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname#1{%
+    \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
+  }%
+\fi\fi
+
+
+% Set the font macro #1 to the font named \fontprefix#2.
+% #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor, #5 is the CMap
+% encoding (only OT1, OT1IT and OT1TT are allowed, or empty to omit).
+% Example:
+% #1 = \textrm
+% #2 = \rmshape
+% #3 = 10
+% #4 = \mainmagstep
+% #5 = OT1
+%
+\def\setfont#1#2#3#4#5{%
+  \font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4
+  \csname cmap#5\endcsname#1%
+}
+% This is what gets called when #5 of \setfont is empty.
+\let\cmap\gobble
+%
+% (end of cmaps)
 
 % Use cm as the default font prefix.
 % To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix
 % before you read in texinfo.tex.
-\ifx\fontprefix\undefined
+\ifx\fontprefix\thisisundefined
 \def\fontprefix{cm}
 \fi
 % Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM.
 \def\rmshape{r}
-\def\rmbshape{bx}               %where the normal face is bold
+\def\rmbshape{bx}               % where the normal face is bold
 \def\bfshape{b}
 \def\bxshape{bx}
 \def\ttshape{tt}
@@ -1064,196 +1801,618 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 \def\scshape{csc}
 \def\scbshape{csc}
 
-\ifx\bigger\relax
-\let\mainmagstep=\magstep1
-\setfont\textrm\rmshape{12}{1000}
-\setfont\texttt\ttshape{12}{1000}
-\else
-\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
-\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
-\fi
-% Instead of cmb10, you many want to use cmbx10.
-% cmbx10 is a prettier font on its own, but cmb10
-% looks better when embedded in a line with cmr10.
-\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
-\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
-\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
-\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
-\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
-\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+% Definitions for a main text size of 11pt.  (The default in Texinfo.)
+%
+\def\definetextfontsizexi{%
+% Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1).
+\def\textnominalsize{11pt}
+\edef\mainmagstep{\magstephalf}
+\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
+\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
+\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT}
+\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
+\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
+\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
+\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
 \font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
 \font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
+\def\textecsize{1095}
 
-% A few fonts for @defun, etc.
-\setfont\defbf\bxshape{10}{\magstep1} %was 1314
-\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}
-\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \bf}
+% A few fonts for @defun names and args.
+\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
+\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
+\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf}
 
 % Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
-\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}
-\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}
-\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}
-\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}
-\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}
-\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}
-\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}
-\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}
+\def\smallnominalsize{9pt}
+\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
+\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
+\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
+\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
 \font\smalli=cmmi9
 \font\smallsy=cmsy9
-
-% Fonts for title page:
-\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}
-\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}
-\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}
-\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}
-\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}
-\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}
+\def\smallecsize{0900}
+
+% Fonts for small examples (8pt).
+\def\smallernominalsize{8pt}
+\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1}
+\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT}
+\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1}
+\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT}
+\font\smalleri=cmmi8
+\font\smallersy=cmsy8
+\def\smallerecsize{0800}
+
+% Fonts for title page (20.4pt):
+\def\titlenominalsize{20pt}
+\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1}
+\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT}
+\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
+\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1}
 \let\titlebf=\titlerm
-\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}
+\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
 \font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
 \font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
-\def\authorrm{\secrm}
+\def\titleecsize{2074}
 
 % Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt).
-\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}
-\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}
-\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}
-\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}
-\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}
-\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}
+\def\chapnominalsize{17pt}
+\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1}
+\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1IT}
+\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1}
+\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}{OT1}
 \let\chapbf=\chaprm
-\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}
+\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1}
 \font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2
 \font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3
+\def\chapecsize{1728}
 
 % Section fonts (14.4pt).
-\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}
-\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}
-\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}
-\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}
-\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}
-\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}
+\def\secnominalsize{14pt}
+\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
+\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT}
+\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
+\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
 \let\secbf\secrm
-\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}
+\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
 \font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
 \font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
-
-% \setfont\ssecrm\bxshape{10}{\magstep1}    % This size an font looked bad.
-% \setfont\ssecit\itshape{10}{\magstep1}    % The letters were too crowded.
-% \setfont\ssecsl\slshape{10}{\magstep1}
-% \setfont\ssectt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}
-% \setfont\ssecsf\sfshape{10}{\magstep1}
-
-%\setfont\ssecrm\bfshape{10}{1315}      % Note the use of cmb rather than cmbx.
-%\setfont\ssecit\itshape{10}{1315}      % Also, the size is a little larger than
-%\setfont\ssecsl\slshape{10}{1315}      % being scaled magstep1.
-%\setfont\ssectt\ttshape{10}{1315}
-%\setfont\ssecsf\sfshape{10}{1315}
-
-%\let\ssecbf=\ssecrm
+\def\sececsize{1440}
 
 % Subsection fonts (13.15pt).
-\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
-\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}
-\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}
-\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
-\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}
-\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
+\def\ssecnominalsize{13pt}
+\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
+\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}{OT1IT}
+\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}{OT1}
+\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
 \let\ssecbf\ssecrm
-\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}
+\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315}{OT1}
 \font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf
 \font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315
-% The smallcaps and symbol fonts should actually be scaled \magstep1.5,
-% but that is not a standard magnification.
+\def\ssececsize{1200}
+
+% Reduced fonts for @acro in text (10pt).
+\def\reducednominalsize{10pt}
+\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT}
+\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
+\font\reducedi=cmmi10
+\font\reducedsy=cmsy10
+\def\reducedecsize{1000}
+
+\textleading = 13.2pt % line spacing for 11pt CM
+\textfonts            % reset the current fonts
+\rm
+} % end of 11pt text font size definitions, \definetextfontsizexi
+
+
+% Definitions to make the main text be 10pt Computer Modern, with
+% section, chapter, etc., sizes following suit.  This is for the GNU
+% Press printing of the Emacs 22 manual.  Maybe other manuals in the
+% future.  Used with @smallbook, which sets the leading to 12pt.
+%
+\def\definetextfontsizex{%
+% Text fonts (10pt).
+\def\textnominalsize{10pt}
+\edef\mainmagstep{1000}
+\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
+\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
+\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT}
+\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
+\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
+\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
+\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
+\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
+\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
+\def\textecsize{1000}
+
+% A few fonts for @defun names and args.
+\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
+\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
+\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf}
+
+% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
+\def\smallnominalsize{9pt}
+\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
+\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
+\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
+\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
+\font\smalli=cmmi9
+\font\smallsy=cmsy9
+\def\smallecsize{0900}
+
+% Fonts for small examples (8pt).
+\def\smallernominalsize{8pt}
+\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1}
+\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT}
+\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1}
+\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT}
+\font\smalleri=cmmi8
+\font\smallersy=cmsy8
+\def\smallerecsize{0800}
+
+% Fonts for title page (20.4pt):
+\def\titlenominalsize{20pt}
+\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1}
+\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT}
+\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
+\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1}
+\let\titlebf=\titlerm
+\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
+\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
+\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
+\def\titleecsize{2074}
+
+% Chapter fonts (14.4pt).
+\def\chapnominalsize{14pt}
+\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
+\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT}
+\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
+\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
+\let\chapbf\chaprm
+\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
+\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
+\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
+\def\chapecsize{1440}
+
+% Section fonts (12pt).
+\def\secnominalsize{12pt}
+\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1IT}
+\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
+\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
+\let\secbf\secrm
+\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
+\font\seci=cmmi12
+\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep1
+\def\sececsize{1200}
+
+% Subsection fonts (10pt).
+\def\ssecnominalsize{10pt}
+\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT}
+\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
+\let\ssecbf\ssecrm
+\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
+\font\sseci=cmmi10
+\font\ssecsy=cmsy10
+\def\ssececsize{1000}
+
+% Reduced fonts for @acro in text (9pt).
+\def\reducednominalsize{9pt}
+\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
+\setfont\reducedit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
+\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
+\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
+\font\reducedi=cmmi9
+\font\reducedsy=cmsy9
+\def\reducedecsize{0900}
+
+\divide\parskip by 2  % reduce space between paragraphs
+\textleading = 12pt   % line spacing for 10pt CM
+\textfonts            % reset the current fonts
+\rm
+} % end of 10pt text font size definitions, \definetextfontsizex
+
+
+% We provide the user-level command
+%   @fonttextsize 10
+% (or 11) to redefine the text font size.  pt is assumed.
+%
+\def\xiword{11}
+\def\xword{10}
+\def\xwordpt{10pt}
+%
+\parseargdef\fonttextsize{%
+  \def\textsizearg{#1}%
+  %\wlog{doing @fonttextsize \textsizearg}%
+  %
+  % Set \globaldefs so that documents can use this inside @tex, since
+  % makeinfo 4.8 does not support it, but we need it nonetheless.
+  %
+ \begingroup \globaldefs=1
+  \ifx\textsizearg\xword \definetextfontsizex
+  \else \ifx\textsizearg\xiword \definetextfontsizexi
+  \else
+    \errhelp=\EMsimple
+    \errmessage{@fonttextsize only supports `10' or `11', not `\textsizearg'}
+  \fi\fi
+ \endgroup
+}
+
 
 % In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters,
 % we have to define the \textfont of the standard families.  Since
-% texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts, we
-% don't bother to reset \scriptfont and \scriptscriptfont (which would
-% also require loading a lot more fonts).
+% texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts except
+% in the main text, we don't bother to reset \scriptfont and
+% \scriptscriptfont (which would also require loading a lot more fonts).
 %
 \def\resetmathfonts{%
-  \textfont0 = \tenrm \textfont1 = \teni \textfont2 = \tensy
-  \textfont\itfam = \tenit \textfont\slfam = \tensl \textfont\bffam = \tenbf
-  \textfont\ttfam = \tentt \textfont\sffam = \tensf
+  \textfont0=\tenrm \textfont1=\teni \textfont2=\tensy
+  \textfont\itfam=\tenit \textfont\slfam=\tensl \textfont\bffam=\tenbf
+  \textfont\ttfam=\tentt \textfont\sffam=\tensf
 }
 
-
 % The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead
-% of just \STYLE.  We do this so that font changes will continue to work
-% in math mode, where it is the current \fam that is relevant in most
-% cases, not the current font.  Plain TeX does \def\bf{\fam=\bffam
-% \tenbf}, for example.  By redefining \tenbf, we obviate the need to
-% redefine \bf itself.
+% of just \STYLE.  We do this because \STYLE needs to also set the
+% current \fam for math mode.  Our \STYLE (e.g., \rm) commands hardwire
+% \tenSTYLE to set the current font.
+%
+% Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower)
+% and \lllsize (three sizes lower).  These relative commands are used in
+% the LaTeX logo and acronyms.
+%
+% This all needs generalizing, badly.
+%
 \def\textfonts{%
   \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl
   \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc
-  \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy \let\tenttsl=\textttsl
-  \resetmathfonts}
+  \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy
+  \let\tenttsl=\textttsl
+  \def\curfontsize{text}%
+  \def\lsize{reduced}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
+  \resetmathfonts \setleading{\textleading}}
 \def\titlefonts{%
   \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl
   \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc
   \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy
   \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl
-  \resetmathfonts \setleading{25pt}}
-\def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}}
+  \def\curfontsize{title}%
+  \def\lsize{chap}\def\lllsize{subsec}%
+  \resetmathfonts \setleading{27pt}}
+\def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rmisbold #1}}
 \def\chapfonts{%
   \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl
   \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc
-  \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl
+  \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy
+  \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl
+  \def\curfontsize{chap}%
+  \def\lsize{sec}\def\lllsize{text}%
   \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}}
 \def\secfonts{%
   \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl
   \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc
-  \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy \let\tenttsl=\secttsl
+  \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy
+  \let\tenttsl=\secttsl
+  \def\curfontsize{sec}%
+  \def\lsize{subsec}\def\lllsize{reduced}%
   \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}}
 \def\subsecfonts{%
   \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl
   \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc
-  \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl
+  \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy
+  \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl
+  \def\curfontsize{ssec}%
+  \def\lsize{text}\def\lllsize{small}%
   \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}}
-\let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts % Maybe make sssec fonts scaled magstephalf?
+\let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts
+\def\reducedfonts{%
+  \let\tenrm=\reducedrm \let\tenit=\reducedit \let\tensl=\reducedsl
+  \let\tenbf=\reducedbf \let\tentt=\reducedtt \let\reducedcaps=\reducedsc
+  \let\tensf=\reducedsf \let\teni=\reducedi \let\tensy=\reducedsy
+  \let\tenttsl=\reducedttsl
+  \def\curfontsize{reduced}%
+  \def\lsize{small}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
+  \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
 \def\smallfonts{%
   \let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl
   \let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc
   \let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy
   \let\tenttsl=\smallttsl
-  \resetmathfonts \setleading{11pt}}
+  \def\curfontsize{small}%
+  \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
+  \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
+\def\smallerfonts{%
+  \let\tenrm=\smallerrm \let\tenit=\smallerit \let\tensl=\smallersl
+  \let\tenbf=\smallerbf \let\tentt=\smallertt \let\smallcaps=\smallersc
+  \let\tensf=\smallersf \let\teni=\smalleri \let\tensy=\smallersy
+  \let\tenttsl=\smallerttsl
+  \def\curfontsize{smaller}%
+  \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
+  \resetmathfonts \setleading{9.5pt}}
 
-% Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes.
-%
-\textfonts
+% Fonts for short table of contents.
+\setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}  % no cmb12
+\setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT}
 
-% Define these so they can be easily changed for other fonts.
+% Define these just so they can be easily changed for other fonts.
 \def\angleleft{$\langle$}
 \def\angleright{$\rangle$}
 
+% Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments.
+\let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts
+
+% About \smallexamplefonts.  If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample
+% can fit this many characters:
+%   8.5x11=86   smallbook=72  a4=90  a5=69
+% If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters:
+%   8.5x11=90+  smallbook=80  a4=90+  a5=77
+% For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth
+% the additional smallness of 8pt.  So I'm making the default 9pt.
+%
+% By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt):
+%   8.5x11=71  smallbook=60  a4=75  a5=58
+% --karl, 24jan03.
+
+% Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes.
+%
+\definetextfontsizexi
+
+
+\message{markup,}
+
+% Check if we are currently using a typewriter font.  Since all the
+% Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and
+% shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have
+% this property, we can check that font parameter.
+%
+\def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt }
+
+% Markup style infrastructure.  \defmarkupstylesetup\INITMACRO will
+% define and register \INITMACRO to be called on markup style changes.
+% \INITMACRO can check \currentmarkupstyle for the innermost
+% style and the set of \ifmarkupSTYLE switches for all styles
+% currently in effect.
+\newif\ifmarkupvar
+\newif\ifmarkupsamp
+\newif\ifmarkupkey
+%\newif\ifmarkupfile % @file == @samp.
+%\newif\ifmarkupoption % @option == @samp.
+\newif\ifmarkupcode
+\newif\ifmarkupkbd
+%\newif\ifmarkupenv % @env == @code.
+%\newif\ifmarkupcommand % @command == @code.
+\newif\ifmarkuptex % @tex (and part of @math, for now).
+\newif\ifmarkupexample
+\newif\ifmarkupverb
+\newif\ifmarkupverbatim
+
+\let\currentmarkupstyle\empty
+
+\def\setupmarkupstyle#1{%
+  \csname markup#1true\endcsname
+  \def\currentmarkupstyle{#1}%
+  \markupstylesetup
+}
+
+\let\markupstylesetup\empty
+
+\def\defmarkupstylesetup#1{%
+  \expandafter\def\expandafter\markupstylesetup
+    \expandafter{\markupstylesetup #1}%
+  \def#1%
+}
+
+% Markup style setup for left and right quotes.
+\defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuplq{%
+  \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp
+    \csname markupsetuplq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname
+  \ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuplqdefault \else \temp \fi
+}
+
+\defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuprq{%
+  \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp
+    \csname markupsetuprq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname
+  \ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuprqdefault \else \temp \fi
+}
+
+{
+\catcode`\'=\active
+\catcode`\`=\active
+
+\gdef\markupsetuplqdefault{\let`\lq}
+\gdef\markupsetuprqdefault{\let'\rq}
+
+\gdef\markupsetcodequoteleft{\let`\codequoteleft}
+\gdef\markupsetcodequoteright{\let'\codequoteright}
+}
+
+\let\markupsetuplqcode \markupsetcodequoteleft
+\let\markupsetuprqcode \markupsetcodequoteright
+%
+\let\markupsetuplqexample \markupsetcodequoteleft
+\let\markupsetuprqexample \markupsetcodequoteright
+%
+\let\markupsetuplqkbd     \markupsetcodequoteleft
+\let\markupsetuprqkbd     \markupsetcodequoteright
+%
+\let\markupsetuplqsamp \markupsetcodequoteleft
+\let\markupsetuprqsamp \markupsetcodequoteright
+%
+\let\markupsetuplqverb \markupsetcodequoteleft
+\let\markupsetuprqverb \markupsetcodequoteright
+%
+\let\markupsetuplqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteleft
+\let\markupsetuprqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteright
+
+% Allow an option to not use regular directed right quote/apostrophe
+% (char 0x27), but instead the undirected quote from cmtt (char 0x0d).
+% The undirected quote is ugly, so don't make it the default, but it
+% works for pasting with more pdf viewers (at least evince), the
+% lilypond developers report.  xpdf does work with the regular 0x27.
+%
+\def\codequoteright{%
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax
+    \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax
+      '%
+    \else \char'15 \fi
+  \else \char'15 \fi
+}
+%
+% and a similar option for the left quote char vs. a grave accent.
+% Modern fonts display ASCII 0x60 as a grave accent, so some people like
+% the code environments to do likewise.
+%
+\def\codequoteleft{%
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax
+    \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax
+      % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391
+      % \relax disables Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font.
+      \relax`%
+    \else \char'22 \fi
+  \else \char'22 \fi
+}
+
+% Commands to set the quote options.
+% 
+\parseargdef\codequoteundirected{%
+  \def\temp{#1}%
+  \ifx\temp\onword
+    \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname
+      = t%
+  \else\ifx\temp\offword
+    \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname
+      = \relax
+  \else
+    \errhelp = \EMsimple
+    \errmessage{Unknown @codequoteundirected value `\temp', must be on|off}%
+  \fi\fi
+}
+%
+\parseargdef\codequotebacktick{%
+  \def\temp{#1}%
+  \ifx\temp\onword
+    \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname
+      = t%
+  \else\ifx\temp\offword
+    \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname
+      = \relax
+  \else
+    \errhelp = \EMsimple
+    \errmessage{Unknown @codequotebacktick value `\temp', must be on|off}%
+  \fi\fi
+}
+
+% [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391, disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font.
+\def\noligaturesquoteleft{\relax\lq}
+
 % Count depth in font-changes, for error checks
 \newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0
 
-% Fonts for short table of contents.
-\setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}
-\setfont\shortcontbf\bxshape{12}{1000}
-\setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}
+% Font commands.
+
+% #1 is the font command (\sl or \it), #2 is the text to slant.
+% If we are in a monospaced environment, however, 1) always use \ttsl,
+% and 2) do not add an italic correction.
+\def\dosmartslant#1#2{%
+  \ifusingtt 
+    {{\ttsl #2}\let\next=\relax}%
+    {\def\next{{#1#2}\futurelet\next\smartitaliccorrection}}%
+  \next
+}
+\def\smartslanted{\dosmartslant\sl}
+\def\smartitalic{\dosmartslant\it}
+
+% Output an italic correction unless \next (presumed to be the following
+% character) is such as not to need one.
+\def\smartitaliccorrection{%
+  \ifx\next,%
+  \else\ifx\next-%
+  \else\ifx\next.%
+  \else\ptexslash
+  \fi\fi\fi
+  \aftersmartic
+}
+
+% Unconditional use \ttsl, and no ic.  @var is set to this for defuns.
+\def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}}
 
-%% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans
-%% serif) and @ii for TeX italic
+% @cite is like \smartslanted except unconditionally use \sl.  We never want
+% ttsl for book titles, do we?
+\def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitaliccorrection}
 
-% \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction
-% unless the following character is such as not to need one.
-\def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else\/\fi\fi\fi}
-\def\smartslanted#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
-\def\smartitalic#1{{\it #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
+\def\aftersmartic{}
+\def\var#1{%
+  \let\saveaftersmartic = \aftersmartic
+  \def\aftersmartic{\null\let\aftersmartic=\saveaftersmartic}%
+  \smartslanted{#1}%
+}
 
 \let\i=\smartitalic
-\let\var=\smartslanted
+\let\slanted=\smartslanted
 \let\dfn=\smartslanted
 \let\emph=\smartitalic
-\let\cite=\smartslanted
 
+% Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii.
+\def\r#1{{\rm #1}}              % roman font
+\def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}}       % smallcaps font
+\def\ii#1{{\it #1}}             % italic font
+
+% @b, explicit bold.  Also @strong.
 \def\b#1{{\bf #1}}
 \let\strong=\b
 
+% @sansserif, explicit sans.
+\def\sansserif#1{{\sf #1}}
+
 % We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at
 % the end of a paragraph.  Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the
 % group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called.
@@ -1261,30 +2420,39 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 \def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1  \aftergroup\restorehyphenation}
 \def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- }
 
+% Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value.
+% Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and
+% sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up.
+%
+\catcode`@=11
+  \def\plainfrenchspacing{%
+    \sfcode\dotChar  =\@m \sfcode\questChar=\@m \sfcode\exclamChar=\@m
+    \sfcode\colonChar=\@m \sfcode\semiChar =\@m \sfcode\commaChar =\@m
+    \def\endofsentencespacefactor{1000}% for @. and friends
+  }
+  \def\plainnonfrenchspacing{%
+    \sfcode`\.3000\sfcode`\?3000\sfcode`\!3000
+    \sfcode`\:2000\sfcode`\;1500\sfcode`\,1250
+    \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% for @. and friends
+  }
+\catcode`@=\other
+\def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% default
+
+% @t, explicit typewriter.
 \def\t#1{%
-  {\tt \rawbackslash \frenchspacing #1}%
+  {\tt \rawbackslash \plainfrenchspacing #1}%
   \null
 }
-\let\ttfont=\t
-\def\samp#1{`\tclose{#1}'\null}
-\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}
-\font\keysy=cmsy9
-\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{%
-  \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{%
-    \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt
-     \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}%
-    \kern-0.4pt\hrule}%
-  \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}}
-% The old definition, with no lozenge:
-%\def\key #1{{\ttsl \nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null}
-\def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1}
 
-% @file, @option are the same as @samp.
-\let\file=\samp
-\let\option=\samp
+% @samp.
+\def\samp#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{samp}\lq\tclose{#1}\rq\null}}
 
-% @code is a modification of @t,
-% which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text.
+% @indicateurl is \samp, that is, with quotes.
+\let\indicateurl=\samp
+
+% @code (and similar) prints in typewriter, but with spaces the same
+% size as normal in the surrounding text, without hyphenation, etc.
+% This is a subroutine for that.
 \def\tclose#1{%
   {%
     % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font.
@@ -1300,87 +2468,94 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
     \nohyphenation
     %
     \rawbackslash
-    \frenchspacing
+    \plainfrenchspacing
     #1%
   }%
-  \null
+  \null % reset spacefactor to 1000
 }
 
-% We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in \code.
+% We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code.
 % Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes
 % in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc.
-
+%
 % Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control
 % both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words.
 % We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that)
 % and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash.
 %  -- rms.
 {
-  \catcode`\-=\active
-  \catcode`\_=\active
+  \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active
+  \catcode`\'=\active \catcode`\`=\active
+  \global\let'=\rq \global\let`=\lq  % default definitions
   %
   \global\def\code{\begingroup
-    \catcode`\-=\active \let-\codedash
-    \catcode`\_=\active \let_\codeunder
+    \setupmarkupstyle{code}%
+    % The following should really be moved into \setupmarkupstyle handlers.
+    \catcode\dashChar=\active  \catcode\underChar=\active
+    \ifallowcodebreaks
+     \let-\codedash
+     \let_\codeunder
+    \else
+     \let-\normaldash
+     \let_\realunder
+    \fi
     \codex
   }
-  %
-  % If we end up with any active - characters when handling the index,
-  % just treat them as a normal -.
-  \global\def\indexbreaks{\catcode`\-=\active \let-\realdash}
 }
 
-\def\realdash{-}
-\def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}}
-\def\codeunder{\ifusingtt{\normalunderscore\discretionary{}{}{}}{\_}}
 \def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup}
 
-%\let\exp=\tclose  %Was temporary
-
-% @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command,
-% then @kbd has no effect.
-
-% @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always),
-%   `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends),
-%   or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always).
-\def\kbdinputstyle{\parsearg\kbdinputstylexxx}
-\def\kbdinputstylexxx#1{%
-  \def\arg{#1}%
-  \ifx\arg\worddistinct
-    \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}%
-  \else\ifx\arg\wordexample
-    \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
-  \else\ifx\arg\wordcode
-    \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
-  \fi\fi\fi
+\def\normaldash{-}
+\def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}}
+\def\codeunder{%
+  % this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work.  In math mode, _
+  % is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.)
+  % will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us
+  % (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop.
+  \ifusingtt{\ifmmode
+               \mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_.
+             \else\normalunderscore \fi
+             \discretionary{}{}{}}%
+            {\_}%
+}
+
+% An additional complication: the above will allow breaks after, e.g.,
+% each of the four underscores in __typeof__.  This is bad.
+% @allowcodebreaks provides a document-level way to turn breaking at -
+% and _ on and off.
+%
+\newif\ifallowcodebreaks  \allowcodebreakstrue
+
+\def\keywordtrue{true}
+\def\keywordfalse{false}
+
+\parseargdef\allowcodebreaks{%
+  \def\txiarg{#1}%
+  \ifx\txiarg\keywordtrue
+    \allowcodebreakstrue
+  \else\ifx\txiarg\keywordfalse
+    \allowcodebreaksfalse
+  \else
+    \errhelp = \EMsimple
+    \errmessage{Unknown @allowcodebreaks option `\txiarg', must be true|false}%
+  \fi\fi
 }
-\def\worddistinct{distinct}
-\def\wordexample{example}
-\def\wordcode{code}
 
-% Default is kbdinputdistinct.  (Too much of a hassle to call the macro,
-% the catcodes are wrong for parsearg to work.)
-\gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}
-
-\def\xkey{\key}
-\def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}%
-\ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}%
-\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi
-\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi}
-
-% For @url, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code.
-\let\url=\code
-\let\env=\code
+% For @command, @env, @file, @option quotes seem unnecessary,
+% so use \code rather than \samp.
 \let\command=\code
+\let\env=\code
+\let\file=\code
+\let\option=\code
 
 % @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional (comma-separated)
 % second argument specifying the text to display and an optional third
 % arg as text to display instead of (rather than in addition to) the url
-% itself.  First (mandatory) arg is the url.  Perhaps eventually put in
-% a hypertex \special here.
-%
-\def\uref#1{\douref #1,,,\finish}
-\def\douref#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{\begingroup
+% itself.  First (mandatory) arg is the url.
+% (This \urefnobreak definition isn't used now, leaving it for a while
+% for comparison.)
+\def\urefnobreak#1{\dourefnobreak #1,,,\finish}
+\def\dourefnobreak#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{\begingroup
   \unsepspaces
   \pdfurl{#1}%
   \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
@@ -1401,9 +2576,110 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
   \endlink
 \endgroup}
 
+% This \urefbreak definition is the active one.
+\def\urefbreak{\begingroup \urefcatcodes \dourefbreak}
+\let\uref=\urefbreak
+\def\dourefbreak#1{\urefbreakfinish #1,,,\finish}
+\def\urefbreakfinish#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{% doesn't work in @example
+  \unsepspaces
+  \pdfurl{#1}%
+  \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
+  \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
+    \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that
+  \else
+    \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
+    \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
+      \ifpdf
+        \unhbox0             % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it
+      \else
+        \unhbox0\ (\urefcode{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url
+      \fi
+    \else
+      \urefcode{#1}% only url given, so show it
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \endlink
+\endgroup}
+
+% Allow line breaks around only a few characters (only).
+\def\urefcatcodes{%
+  \catcode\ampChar=\active   \catcode\dotChar=\active
+  \catcode\hashChar=\active  \catcode\questChar=\active
+  \catcode\slashChar=\active
+}
+{
+  \urefcatcodes
+  %
+  \global\def\urefcode{\begingroup
+    \setupmarkupstyle{code}%
+    \urefcatcodes
+    \let&\urefcodeamp
+    \let.\urefcodedot
+    \let#\urefcodehash
+    \let?\urefcodequest
+    \let/\urefcodeslash
+    \codex
+  }
+  %
+  % By default, they are just regular characters.
+  \global\def&{\normalamp}
+  \global\def.{\normaldot}
+  \global\def#{\normalhash}
+  \global\def?{\normalquest}
+  \global\def/{\normalslash}
+}
+
+% we put a little stretch before and after the breakable chars, to help
+% line breaking of long url's.  The unequal skips make look better in
+% cmtt at least, especially for dots.
+\def\urefprestretch{\urefprebreak \hskip0pt plus.13em }
+\def\urefpoststretch{\urefpostbreak \hskip0pt plus.1em }
+%
+\def\urefcodeamp{\urefprestretch \&\urefpoststretch}
+\def\urefcodedot{\urefprestretch .\urefpoststretch}
+\def\urefcodehash{\urefprestretch \#\urefpoststretch}
+\def\urefcodequest{\urefprestretch ?\urefpoststretch}
+\def\urefcodeslash{\futurelet\next\urefcodeslashfinish}
+{
+  \catcode`\/=\active
+  \global\def\urefcodeslashfinish{%
+    \urefprestretch \slashChar
+    % Allow line break only after the final / in a sequence of
+    % slashes, to avoid line break between the slashes in http://.
+    \ifx\next/\else \urefpoststretch \fi
+  }
+}
+
+% One more complication: by default we'll break after the special
+% characters, but some people like to break before the special chars, so
+% allow that.  Also allow no breaking at all, for manual control.
+% 
+\parseargdef\urefbreakstyle{%
+  \def\txiarg{#1}%
+  \ifx\txiarg\wordnone
+    \def\urefprebreak{\nobreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\nobreak}
+  \else\ifx\txiarg\wordbefore
+    \def\urefprebreak{\allowbreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\nobreak}
+  \else\ifx\txiarg\wordafter
+    \def\urefprebreak{\nobreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\allowbreak}
+  \else
+    \errhelp = \EMsimple
+    \errmessage{Unknown @urefbreakstyle setting `\txiarg'}%
+  \fi\fi\fi
+}
+\def\wordafter{after}
+\def\wordbefore{before}
+\def\wordnone{none}
+
+\urefbreakstyle after
+
+% @url synonym for @uref, since that's how everyone uses it.
+%
+\let\url=\uref
+
 % rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97.
 % So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf.
-% 
+%
 %\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright}
 \ifpdf
   \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish}
@@ -1418,36 +2694,502 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
   \let\email=\uref
 \fi
 
-% Check if we are currently using a typewriter font.  Since all the
-% Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and
-% shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have
-% this property, we can check that font parameter.
-%
-\def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt }
+% @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always),
+%   `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends),
+%   or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always).
+\parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{%
+  \def\txiarg{#1}%
+  \ifx\txiarg\worddistinct
+    \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}%
+  \else\ifx\txiarg\wordexample
+    \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
+  \else\ifx\txiarg\wordcode
+    \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
+  \else
+    \errhelp = \EMsimple
+    \errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle setting `\txiarg'}%
+  \fi\fi\fi
+}
+\def\worddistinct{distinct}
+\def\wordexample{example}
+\def\wordcode{code}
+
+% Default is `distinct'.
+\kbdinputstyle distinct
+
+% @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command,
+% then @kbd has no effect.
+\def\kbd#1{{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdsub\look??\par}}
+
+\def\xkey{\key}
+\def\kbdsub#1#2#3\par{%
+  \def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}%
+  \ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}%
+  \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi
+  \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi
+}
+
+% definition of @key that produces a lozenge.  Doesn't adjust to text size.
+%\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
+%\font\keysy=cmsy9
+%\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{%
+%  \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{%
+%    \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt
+%     \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}%
+%    \kern-0.4pt\hrule}%
+%  \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}}
+
+% definition of @key with no lozenge.  If the current font is already
+% monospace, don't change it; that way, we respect @kbdinputstyle.  But
+% if it isn't monospace, then use \tt.
+%
+\def\key#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{key}%
+  \nohyphenation
+  \ifmonospace\else\tt\fi
+  #1}\null}
+
+% @clicksequence{File @click{} Open ...}
+\def\clicksequence#1{\begingroup #1\endgroup}
+
+% @clickstyle @arrow   (by default)
+\parseargdef\clickstyle{\def\click{#1}}
+\def\click{\arrow}
 
 % Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'.  The only reason for the
 % argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt.
 %
 \def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1}
 
-\def\kbd#1{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par}
-
 % @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'',
 % and it is not used as such in any manual I can find.  We need it for
 % Polish suppressed-l.  --karl, 22sep96.
 %\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null}
 
-% Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii.
-\def\r#1{{\rm #1}}              % roman font
-\def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}}       % smallcaps font
-\def\ii#1{{\it #1}}             % italic font
+% @acronym for "FBI", "NATO", and the like.
+% We print this one point size smaller, since it's intended for
+% all-uppercase.
+%
+\def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,\finish}
+\def\doacronym#1,#2,#3\finish{%
+  {\selectfonts\lsize #1}%
+  \def\temp{#2}%
+  \ifx\temp\empty \else
+    \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
+  \fi
+  \null % reset \spacefactor=1000
+}
+
+% @abbr for "Comput. J." and the like.
+% No font change, but don't do end-of-sentence spacing.
+%
+\def\abbr#1{\doabbr #1,,\finish}
+\def\doabbr#1,#2,#3\finish{%
+  {\plainfrenchspacing #1}%
+  \def\temp{#2}%
+  \ifx\temp\empty \else
+    \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
+  \fi
+  \null % reset \spacefactor=1000
+}
+
+% @asis just yields its argument.  Used with @table, for example.
+%
+\def\asis#1{#1}
+
+% @math outputs its argument in math mode.
+%
+% One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean
+% an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}.  So make
+% _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam,
+% which is what @var uses.
+{
+  \catcode`\_ = \active
+  \gdef\mathunderscore{%
+    \catcode`\_=\active
+    \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}%
+  }
+}
+% Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a math (or tt) \.
+% FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (for no
+% particular reason), but this is not advertised and we don't care.
+%
+% The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\.
+\def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi}
+%
+\def\math{%
+  \tex
+  \mathunderscore
+  \let\\ = \mathbackslash
+  \mathactive
+  % make the texinfo accent commands work in math mode
+  \let\"=\ddot
+  \let\'=\acute
+  \let\==\bar
+  \let\^=\hat
+  \let\`=\grave
+  \let\u=\breve
+  \let\v=\check
+  \let\~=\tilde
+  \let\dotaccent=\dot
+  $\finishmath
+}
+\def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup}  % Close the group opened by \tex.
+
+% Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math.
+% We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument
+% to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section).
+%
+{
+  \catcode`^ = \active
+  \catcode`< = \active
+  \catcode`> = \active
+  \catcode`+ = \active
+  \catcode`' = \active
+  \gdef\mathactive{%
+    \let^ = \ptexhat
+    \let< = \ptexless
+    \let> = \ptexgtr
+    \let+ = \ptexplus
+    \let' = \ptexquoteright
+  }
+}
+
+% ctrl is no longer a Texinfo command, but leave this definition for fun.
+\def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1}
+
+% @inlinefmt{FMTNAME,PROCESSED-TEXT} and @inlineraw{FMTNAME,RAW-TEXT}.
+% Ignore unless FMTNAME == tex; then it is like @iftex and @tex,
+% except specified as a normal braced arg, so no newlines to worry about.
+% 
+\def\outfmtnametex{tex}
+%
+\long\def\inlinefmt#1{\doinlinefmt #1,\finish}
+\long\def\doinlinefmt#1,#2,\finish{%
+  \def\inlinefmtname{#1}%
+  \ifx\inlinefmtname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\fi
+}
+% For raw, must switch into @tex before parsing the argument, to avoid
+% setting catcodes prematurely.  Doing it this way means that, for
+% example, @inlineraw{html, foo{bar} gets a parse error instead of being
+% ignored.  But this isn't important because if people want a literal
+% *right* brace they would have to use a command anyway, so they may as
+% well use a command to get a left brace too.  We could re-use the
+% delimiter character idea from \verb, but it seems like overkill.
+% 
+\long\def\inlineraw{\tex \doinlineraw}
+\long\def\doinlineraw#1{\doinlinerawtwo #1,\finish}
+\def\doinlinerawtwo#1,#2,\finish{%
+  \def\inlinerawname{#1}%
+  \ifx\inlinerawname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\fi
+  \endgroup % close group opened by \tex.
+}
+
+
+\message{glyphs,}
+% and logos.
+
+% @@ prints an @, as does @atchar{}.
+\def\@{\char64 }
+\let\atchar=\@
+
+% @{ @} @lbracechar{} @rbracechar{} all generate brace characters.
+% Unless we're in typewriter, use \ecfont because the CM text fonts do
+% not have braces, and we don't want to switch into math.
+\def\mylbrace{{\ifmonospace\else\ecfont\fi \char123}}
+\def\myrbrace{{\ifmonospace\else\ecfont\fi \char125}}
+\let\{=\mylbrace \let\lbracechar=\{
+\let\}=\myrbrace \let\rbracechar=\}
+\begingroup
+  % Definitions to produce \{ and \} commands for indices,
+  % and @{ and @} for the aux/toc files.
+  \catcode`\{ = \other \catcode`\} = \other
+  \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2
+  \catcode`\! = 0 \catcode`\\ = \other
+  !gdef!lbracecmd[\{]%
+  !gdef!rbracecmd[\}]%
+  !gdef!lbraceatcmd[@{]%
+  !gdef!rbraceatcmd[@}]%
+!endgroup
+
+% @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems.
+\let\comma = ,
+
+% Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent
+% Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H.
+\let\, = \ptexc
+\let\dotaccent = \ptexdot
+\def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}}
+\let\tieaccent = \ptext
+\let\ubaraccent = \ptexb
+\let\udotaccent = \d
+
+% Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm
+% Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss.
+\def\questiondown{?`}
+\def\exclamdown{!`}
+\def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{a}}}
+\def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{o}}}
+
+% Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents.
+\def\imacro{i}
+\def\jmacro{j}
+\def\dotless#1{%
+  \def\temp{#1}%
+  \ifx\temp\imacro \ifmmode\imath \else\ptexi \fi
+  \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \ifmmode\jmath \else\j \fi
+  \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}%
+  \fi\fi
+}
+
+% The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a
+% period following counts as ending a sentence.  (Idea found in latex.)
+%
+\edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=1000 }
+
+% @LaTeX{} logo.  Not quite the same results as the definition in
+% latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most
+% convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using
+% the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and
+% \scriptscriptstyle).
+%
+\def\LaTeX{%
+  L\kern-.36em
+  {\setbox0=\hbox{T}%
+   \vbox to \ht0{\hbox{%
+     \ifx\textnominalsize\xwordpt
+       % for 10pt running text, \lllsize (8pt) is too small for the A in LaTeX.
+       % Revert to plain's \scriptsize, which is 7pt.
+       \count255=\the\fam $\fam\count255 \scriptstyle A$%
+     \else
+       % For 11pt, we can use our lllsize.
+       \selectfonts\lllsize A%
+     \fi
+     }%
+     \vss
+  }}%
+  \kern-.15em
+  \TeX
+}
+
+% Some math mode symbols.
+\def\bullet{$\ptexbullet$}
+\def\geq{\ifmmode \ge\else $\ge$\fi}
+\def\leq{\ifmmode \le\else $\le$\fi}
+\def\minus{\ifmmode -\else $-$\fi}
+
+% @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font.
+% We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in the cm
+% typewriter fonts as three actual period characters; on the other hand,
+% in other typewriter fonts three periods are wider than 1.5em.  So do
+% whichever is larger.
+%
+\def\dots{%
+  \leavevmode
+  \setbox0=\hbox{...}% get width of three periods
+  \ifdim\wd0 > 1.5em
+    \dimen0 = \wd0
+  \else
+    \dimen0 = 1.5em
+  \fi
+  \hbox to \dimen0{%
+    \hskip 0pt plus.25fil
+    .\hskip 0pt plus1fil
+    .\hskip 0pt plus1fil
+    .\hskip 0pt plus.5fil
+  }%
+}
+
+% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis.
+%
+\def\enddots{%
+  \dots
+  \spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor
+}
+
+% @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}.
+%
+% Since these characters are used in examples, they should be an even number of
+% \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em.
+%
+\def\point{$\star$}
+\def\arrow{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\rightarrow$\hfil}}
+\def\result{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}}
+\def\expansion{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}}
+\def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}}
+\def\equiv{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}}
 
-% @acronym downcases the argument and prints in smallcaps.
-\def\acronym#1{{\smallcaps \lowercase{#1}}}
+% The @error{} command.
+% Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit.
+%
+\newbox\errorbox
+%
+{\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box.
+\dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules
+% The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.)
+\setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \reducedsf \putworderror\kern-1.5pt}
+%
+\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil
+   \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right.
+   \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules.
+   \vbox{%
+      \hrule height\dimen2
+      \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt          % Space to left of text.
+         \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below.
+         \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right.
+      \hrule height\dimen2}
+    \hfil}
+%
+\def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox}
 
-% @pounds{} is a sterling sign.
+% @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which Knuth put in the CM italic font.
+%
 \def\pounds{{\it\$}}
 
+% @euro{} comes from a separate font, depending on the current style.
+% We use the free feym* fonts from the eurosym package by Henrik
+% Theiling, which support regular, slanted, bold and bold slanted (and
+% "outlined" (blackboard board, sort of) versions, which we don't need).
+% It is available from http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/eurosym.
+%
+% Although only regular is the truly official Euro symbol, we ignore
+% that.  The Euro is designed to be slightly taller than the regular
+% font height.
+%
+% feymr - regular
+% feymo - slanted
+% feybr - bold
+% feybo - bold slanted
+%
+% There is no good (free) typewriter version, to my knowledge.
+% A feymr10 euro is ~7.3pt wide, while a normal cmtt10 char is ~5.25pt wide.
+% Hmm.
+%
+% Also doesn't work in math.  Do we need to do math with euro symbols?
+% Hope not.
+%
+%
+\def\euro{{\eurofont e}}
+\def\eurofont{%
+  % We set the font at each command, rather than predefining it in
+  % \textfonts and the other font-switching commands, so that
+  % installations which never need the symbol don't have to have the
+  % font installed.
+  %
+  % There is only one designed size (nominal 10pt), so we always scale
+  % that to the current nominal size.
+  %
+  % By the way, simply using "at 1em" works for cmr10 and the like, but
+  % does not work for cmbx10 and other extended/shrunken fonts.
+  %
+  \def\eurosize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}%
+  %
+  \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename
+    % bold:
+    \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feybo10}{feybr10} at \eurosize
+  \else
+    % regular:
+    \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feymo10}{feymr10} at \eurosize
+  \fi
+  \thiseurofont
+}
+
+% Glyphs from the EC fonts.  We don't use \let for the aliases, because
+% sometimes we redefine the original macro, and the alias should reflect
+% the redefinition.
+%
+% Use LaTeX names for the Icelandic letters.
+\def\DH{{\ecfont \char"D0}} % Eth
+\def\dh{{\ecfont \char"F0}} % eth
+\def\TH{{\ecfont \char"DE}} % Thorn
+\def\th{{\ecfont \char"FE}} % thorn
+%
+\def\guillemetleft{{\ecfont \char"13}}
+\def\guillemotleft{\guillemetleft}
+\def\guillemetright{{\ecfont \char"14}}
+\def\guillemotright{\guillemetright}
+\def\guilsinglleft{{\ecfont \char"0E}}
+\def\guilsinglright{{\ecfont \char"0F}}
+\def\quotedblbase{{\ecfont \char"12}}
+\def\quotesinglbase{{\ecfont \char"0D}}
+%
+% This positioning is not perfect (see the ogonek LaTeX package), but
+% we have the precomposed glyphs for the most common cases.  We put the
+% tests to use those glyphs in the single \ogonek macro so we have fewer
+% dummy definitions to worry about for index entries, etc.
+%
+% ogonek is also used with other letters in Lithuanian (IOU), but using
+% the precomposed glyphs for those is not so easy since they aren't in
+% the same EC font.
+\def\ogonek#1{{%
+  \def\temp{#1}%
+  \ifx\temp\macrocharA\Aogonek
+  \else\ifx\temp\macrochara\aogonek
+  \else\ifx\temp\macrocharE\Eogonek
+  \else\ifx\temp\macrochare\eogonek
+  \else
+    \ecfont \setbox0=\hbox{#1}%
+    \ifdim\ht0=1ex\accent"0C #1%
+    \else\ooalign{\unhbox0\crcr\hidewidth\char"0C \hidewidth}%
+    \fi
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi
+  }%
+}
+\def\Aogonek{{\ecfont \char"81}}\def\macrocharA{A}
+\def\aogonek{{\ecfont \char"A1}}\def\macrochara{a}
+\def\Eogonek{{\ecfont \char"86}}\def\macrocharE{E}
+\def\eogonek{{\ecfont \char"A6}}\def\macrochare{e}
+%
+% Use the ec* fonts (cm-super in outline format) for non-CM glyphs.
+\def\ecfont{%
+  % We can't distinguish serif/sans and italic/slanted, but this
+  % is used for crude hacks anyway (like adding French and German
+  % quotes to documents typeset with CM, where we lose kerning), so
+  % hopefully nobody will notice/care.
+  \edef\ecsize{\csname\curfontsize ecsize\endcsname}%
+  \edef\nominalsize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}%
+  \ifmonospace
+    % typewriter:
+    \font\thisecfont = ectt\ecsize \space at \nominalsize
+  \else
+    \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename
+      % bold:
+      \font\thisecfont = ecb\ifusingit{i}{x}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize
+    \else
+      % regular:
+      \font\thisecfont = ec\ifusingit{ti}{rm}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \thisecfont
+}
+
+% @registeredsymbol - R in a circle.  The font for the R should really
+% be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now.
+% Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright.
+%
+\def\registeredsymbol{%
+  $^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize R}%
+               \hfil\crcr\Orb}}%
+    }$%
+}
+
+% @textdegree - the normal degrees sign.
+%
+\def\textdegree{$^\circ$}
+
+% Laurent Siebenmann reports \Orb undefined with:
+%  Textures 1.7.7 (preloaded format=plain 93.10.14)  (68K)  16 APR 2004 02:38
+% so we'll define it if necessary.
+%
+\ifx\Orb\thisisundefined
+\def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D}
+\fi
+
+% Quotes.
+\chardef\quotedblleft="5C
+\chardef\quotedblright=`\"
+\chardef\quoteleft=`\`
+\chardef\quoteright=`\'
+
 
 \message{page headings,}
 
@@ -1466,87 +3208,116 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 \newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
  \let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
 
-\def\shorttitlepage{\parsearg\shorttitlepagezzz}
-\def\shorttitlepagezzz #1{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}%
-        \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
+\parseargdef\shorttitlepage{%
+  \begingroup \hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}%
+  \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
 
-\def\titlepage{\begingroup \parindent=0pt \textfonts
-   \let\subtitlerm=\tenrm
-   \def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}%
-   %
-   \def\authorfont{\authorrm \normalbaselineskip = 16pt \normalbaselines}%
-   %
-   % Leave some space at the very top of the page.
-   \vglue\titlepagetopglue
-   %
-   % Now you can print the title using @title.
-   \def\title{\parsearg\titlezzz}%
-   \def\titlezzz##1{\leftline{\titlefonts\rm ##1}
-                    % print a rule at the page bottom also.
-                    \finishedtitlepagefalse
-                    \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt}%
-   % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title.
-   \finishedtitlepagetrue
-   %
-   % Now you can put text using @subtitle.
-   \def\subtitle{\parsearg\subtitlezzz}%
-   \def\subtitlezzz##1{{\subtitlefont \rightline{##1}}}%
-   %
-   % @author should come last, but may come many times.
-   \def\author{\parsearg\authorzzz}%
-   \def\authorzzz##1{\ifseenauthor\else\vskip 0pt plus 1filll\seenauthortrue\fi
-      {\authorfont \leftline{##1}}}%
-   %
-   % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space
-   % at the top of the second.  We don't want the ragged left on the second.
-   \let\oldpage = \page
-   \def\page{%
+\envdef\titlepage{%
+  % Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage.
+  \begingroup
+    \parindent=0pt \textfonts
+    % Leave some space at the very top of the page.
+    \vglue\titlepagetopglue
+    % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title.
+    \finishedtitlepagetrue
+    %
+    % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space
+    % at the top of the second.  We don't want the ragged left on the second.
+    \let\oldpage = \page
+    \def\page{%
       \iffinishedtitlepage\else
-         \finishtitlepage
+	 \finishtitlepage
       \fi
-      \oldpage
       \let\page = \oldpage
-      \hbox{}}%
-%   \def\page{\oldpage \hbox{}}
+      \page
+      \null
+    }%
 }
 
 \def\Etitlepage{%
-   \iffinishedtitlepage\else
-      \finishtitlepage
-   \fi
-   % It is important to do the page break before ending the group,
-   % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group.
-   % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page
-   % after the title page, which we certainly don't want.
-   \oldpage
-   \endgroup
-   %
-   % If they want short, they certainly want long too.
-   \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
-     \shortcontents
-     \contents
-     \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
-     \global\let\contents = \relax
-   \fi
-   %
-   \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
-     \contents
-     \global\let\contents = \relax
-     \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
-   \fi
-   %
-   \ifpdf \pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi
-   %
-   \HEADINGSon
+    \iffinishedtitlepage\else
+	\finishtitlepage
+    \fi
+    % It is important to do the page break before ending the group,
+    % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group.
+    % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page
+    % after the title page, which we certainly don't want.
+    \oldpage
+  \endgroup
+  %
+  % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are
+  % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers.
+  \HEADINGSon
+  %
+  % If they want short, they certainly want long too.
+  \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
+    \shortcontents
+    \contents
+    \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
+    \global\let\contents = \relax
+  \fi
+  %
+  \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
+    \contents
+    \global\let\contents = \relax
+    \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
+  \fi
 }
 
 \def\finishtitlepage{%
-   \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize
-   \vskip\titlepagebottomglue
-   \finishedtitlepagetrue
+  \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize
+  \vskip\titlepagebottomglue
+  \finishedtitlepagetrue
+}
+
+% Settings used for typesetting titles: no hyphenation, no indentation,
+% don't worry much about spacing, ragged right.  This should be used
+% inside a \vbox, and fonts need to be set appropriately first.  Because
+% it is always used for titles, nothing else, we call \rmisbold.  \par
+% should be specified before the end of the \vbox, since a vbox is a group.
+% 
+\def\raggedtitlesettings{%
+  \rmisbold
+  \hyphenpenalty=10000
+  \parindent=0pt
+  \tolerance=5000
+  \ptexraggedright
+}
+
+% Macros to be used within @titlepage:
+
+\let\subtitlerm=\tenrm
+\def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}
+
+\parseargdef\title{%
+  \checkenv\titlepage
+  \vbox{\titlefonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}%
+  % print a rule at the page bottom also.
+  \finishedtitlepagefalse
+  \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt
+}
+
+\parseargdef\subtitle{%
+  \checkenv\titlepage
+  {\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}%
+}
+
+% @author should come last, but may come many times.
+% It can also be used inside @quotation.
+%
+\parseargdef\author{%
+  \def\temp{\quotation}%
+  \ifx\thisenv\temp
+    \def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation.
+  \else
+    \checkenv\titlepage
+    \ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus 1filll \seenauthortrue \fi
+    {\secfonts\rmisbold \leftline{#1}}%
+  \fi
 }
 
-%%% Set up page headings and footings.
+
+% Set up page headings and footings.
 
 \let\thispage=\folio
 
@@ -1555,7 +3326,7 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 \newtoks\evenfootline    % footline on even pages
 \newtoks\oddfootline     % footline on odd pages
 
-% Now make Tex use those variables
+% Now make TeX use those variables
 \headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline
                             \else \the\evenheadline \fi}}
 \footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline
@@ -1569,43 +3340,64 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 % @evenfooting @thisfile||
 % @oddfooting ||@thisfile
 
-\def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx}
-\def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx}
-\def\everyheading{\parsearg\everyheadingxxx}
-
-\def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx}
-\def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx}
-\def\everyfooting{\parsearg\everyfootingxxx}
 
-{\catcode`\@=0 %
-
-\gdef\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
-\gdef\evenheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
+\def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx}
+\def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
+\def\evenheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
 \global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
 
-\gdef\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
-\gdef\oddheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
+\def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx}
+\def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
+\def\oddheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
 \global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
 
-\gdef\everyheadingxxx#1{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}%
+\parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}%
 
-\gdef\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
-\gdef\evenfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
+\def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx}
+\def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
+\def\evenfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
 \global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
 
-\gdef\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
-\gdef\oddfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
+\def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx}
+\def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
+\def\oddfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
   \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}%
   %
   % Leave some space for the footline.  Hopefully ok to assume
   % @evenfooting will not be used by itself.
-  \global\advance\pageheight by -\baselineskip
-  \global\advance\vsize by -\baselineskip
+  \global\advance\pageheight by -12pt
+  \global\advance\vsize by -12pt
 }
 
-\gdef\everyfootingxxx#1{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}}
+\parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}}
+
+% @evenheadingmarks top     \thischapter <- chapter at the top of a page
+% @evenheadingmarks bottom  \thischapter <- chapter at the bottom of a page
 %
-}% unbind the catcode of @.
+% The same set of arguments for:
+%
+% @oddheadingmarks
+% @evenfootingmarks
+% @oddfootingmarks
+% @everyheadingmarks
+% @everyfootingmarks
+
+\def\evenheadingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{heading}}
+\def\oddheadingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{heading}}
+\def\evenfootingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{footing}}
+\def\oddfootingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{footing}}
+\def\everyheadingmarks#1 {\headingmarks{even}{heading}{#1}
+                          \headingmarks{odd}{heading}{#1} }
+\def\everyfootingmarks#1 {\headingmarks{even}{footing}{#1}
+                          \headingmarks{odd}{footing}{#1} }
+% #1 = even/odd, #2 = heading/footing, #3 = top/bottom.
+\def\headingmarks#1#2#3 {%
+  \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp \csname get#3headingmarks\endcsname
+  \global\expandafter\let\csname get#1#2marks\endcsname \temp
+}
+
+\everyheadingmarks bottom
+\everyfootingmarks bottom
 
 % @headings double      turns headings on for double-sided printing.
 % @headings single      turns headings on for single-sided printing.
@@ -1619,16 +3411,20 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 
 \def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname}
 
-\def\HEADINGSoff{
-\global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
-\global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}}
-\HEADINGSoff
+\def\headingsoff{% non-global headings elimination
+  \evenheadline={\hfil}\evenfootline={\hfil}%
+   \oddheadline={\hfil}\oddfootline={\hfil}%
+}
+
+\def\HEADINGSoff{{\globaldefs=1 \headingsoff}} % global setting
+\HEADINGSoff  % it's the default
+
 % When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1.
 % For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner,
 % chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document
 % title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top
 % edge of all pages.
-\def\HEADINGSdouble{
+\def\HEADINGSdouble{%
 \global\pageno=1
 \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
 \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
@@ -1640,7 +3436,7 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 
 % For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page,
 % page number on top right.
-\def\HEADINGSsingle{
+\def\HEADINGSsingle{%
 \global\pageno=1
 \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
 \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
@@ -1670,7 +3466,10 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 }
 
 % Subroutines used in generating headings
-% Produces Day Month Year style of output.
+% This produces Day Month Year style of output.
+% Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set
+% up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this).
+\ifx\today\thisisundefined
 \def\today{%
   \number\day\space
   \ifcase\month
@@ -1679,16 +3478,16 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
   \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec
   \fi
   \space\number\year}
+\fi
 
 % @settitle line...  specifies the title of the document, for headings.
 % It generates no output of its own.
 \def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle}
-\def\settitle{\parsearg\settitlezzz}
-\def\settitlezzz #1{\gdef\thistitle{#1}}
+\def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}}
 
 
 \message{tables,}
-% Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x), @kitem(x), @xitem(x).
+% Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x).
 
 % default indentation of table text
 \newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in
@@ -1700,7 +3499,7 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 % used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin
 \newdimen\itemmax
 
-% Note @table, @vtable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with
+% Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with
 % these defs.
 % They also define \itemindex
 % to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none).
@@ -1712,22 +3511,10 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 \def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz}
 \def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz}
 
-\def\internalBxitem "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \smallbreak \parsearg\xitemzzz}
-\def\internalBxitemx "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \itemxpar \parsearg\xitemzzz}
-
-\def\internalBkitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\kitemzzz}
-\def\internalBkitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\kitemzzz}
-
-\def\kitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \lastfunction}}%
-                 \itemzzz {#1}}
-
-\def\xitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \xitemsubtopic}}%
-                 \itemzzz {#1}}
-
 \def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup %
   \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
   \advance\hsize by -\tableindent
-  \setbox0=\hbox{\itemfont{#1}}%
+  \setbox0=\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}%
   \itemindex{#1}%
   \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx.
   %
@@ -1743,7 +3530,7 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
     \begingroup
       \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent
       \advance\hsize by\tableindent
-      \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil
+      \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil\relax
       \leavevmode\unhbox0\par
     \endgroup
     %
@@ -1751,10 +3538,14 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
     % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started.
     \nobreak \vskip-\parskip
     %
-    % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up.  Unfortunately
-    % we can't prevent a possible page break at the following
-    % \baselineskip glue.
-    \nobreak
+    % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up.  However, if
+    % what follows is an environment such as @example, there will be no
+    % \parskip glue; then the negative vskip we just inserted would
+    % cause the example and the item to crash together.  So we use this
+    % bizarre value of 10001 as a signal to \aboveenvbreak to insert
+    % \parskip glue after all.  Section titles are handled this way also.
+    %
+    \penalty 10001
     \endgroup
     \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse
   \else
@@ -1773,97 +3564,116 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
   \fi
 }
 
-\def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a table}}
-\def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a table}}
-\def\kitem{\errmessage{@kitem while not in a table}}
-\def\kitemx{\errmessage{@kitemx while not in a table}}
-\def\xitem{\errmessage{@xitem while not in a table}}
-\def\xitemx{\errmessage{@xitemx while not in a table}}
-
-% Contains a kludge to get @end[description] to work.
-\def\description{\tablez{\dontindex}{1}{}{}{}{}}
+\def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a list environment}}
+\def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a list environment}}
 
 % @table, @ftable, @vtable.
-\def\table{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\tablex}
-{\obeylines\obeyspaces%
-\gdef\tablex #1^^M{%
-\tabley\dontindex#1        \endtabley}}
-
-\def\ftable{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\ftablex}
-{\obeylines\obeyspaces%
-\gdef\ftablex #1^^M{%
-\tabley\fnitemindex#1        \endtabley
-\def\Eftable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
-\let\Etable=\relax}}
-
-\def\vtable{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\vtablex}
-{\obeylines\obeyspaces%
-\gdef\vtablex #1^^M{%
-\tabley\vritemindex#1        \endtabley
-\def\Evtable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
-\let\Etable=\relax}}
-
-\def\dontindex #1{}
-\def\fnitemindex #1{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}}%
-\def\vritemindex #1{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}}%
-
-{\obeyspaces %
-\gdef\tabley#1#2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7\endtabley{\endgroup%
-\tablez{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}}
-
-\def\tablez #1#2#3#4#5#6{%
-\aboveenvbreak %
-\begingroup %
-\def\Edescription{\Etable}% Necessary kludge.
-\let\itemindex=#1%
-\ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \leftskip by #3\mil \fi %
-\ifnum 0#4>0 \tableindent=#4\mil \fi %
-\ifnum 0#5>0 \advance \rightskip by #5\mil \fi %
-\def\itemfont{#2}%
-\itemmax=\tableindent %
-\advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin %
-\advance \leftskip by \tableindent %
-\exdentamount=\tableindent
-\parindent = 0pt
-\parskip = \smallskipamount
-\ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi%
-\def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
-\let\item = \internalBitem %
-\let\itemx = \internalBitemx %
-\let\kitem = \internalBkitem %
-\let\kitemx = \internalBkitemx %
-\let\xitem = \internalBxitem %
-\let\xitemx = \internalBxitemx %
+\envdef\table{%
+  \let\itemindex\gobble
+  \tablecheck{table}%
+}
+\envdef\ftable{%
+  \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {fn}{\code{##1}}}%
+  \tablecheck{ftable}%
 }
+\envdef\vtable{%
+  \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {vr}{\code{##1}}}%
+  \tablecheck{vtable}%
+}
+\def\tablecheck#1{%
+  \ifnum \the\catcode`\^^M=\active
+    \endgroup
+    \errmessage{This command won't work in this context; perhaps the problem is
+      that we are \inenvironment\thisenv}%
+    \def\next{\doignore{#1}}%
+  \else
+    \let\next\tablex
+  \fi
+  \next
+}
+\def\tablex#1{%
+  \def\itemindicate{#1}%
+  \parsearg\tabley
+}
+\def\tabley#1{%
+  {%
+    \makevalueexpandable
+    \edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}%
+    \expandafter
+  }\temp \endtablez
+}
+\def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{%
+  \aboveenvbreak
+  \ifnum 0#1>0 \advance \leftskip by #1\mil \fi
+  \ifnum 0#2>0 \tableindent=#2\mil \fi
+  \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \rightskip by #3\mil \fi
+  \itemmax=\tableindent
+  \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin
+  \advance \leftskip by \tableindent
+  \exdentamount=\tableindent
+  \parindent = 0pt
+  \parskip = \smallskipamount
+  \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
+  \let\item = \internalBitem
+  \let\itemx = \internalBitemx
+}
+\def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak}
+\let\Eftable\Etable
+\let\Evtable\Etable
+\let\Eitemize\Etable
+\let\Eenumerate\Etable
 
 % This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize
 
 \newcount \itemno
 
-\def\itemize{\parsearg\itemizezzz}
+\envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize}
 
-\def\itemizezzz #1{%
-  \begingroup % ended by the @end itemize
-  \itemizey {#1}{\Eitemize}
+\def\doitemize#1{%
+  \aboveenvbreak
+  \itemmax=\itemindent
+  \advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin
+  \advance\leftskip by \itemindent
+  \exdentamount=\itemindent
+  \parindent=0pt
+  \parskip=\smallskipamount
+  \ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
+  %
+  % Try typesetting the item mark that if the document erroneously says
+  % something like @itemize @samp (intending @table), there's an error
+  % right away at the @itemize.  It's not the best error message in the
+  % world, but it's better than leaving it to the @item.  This means if
+  % the user wants an empty mark, they have to say @w{} not just @w.
+  \def\itemcontents{#1}%
+  \setbox0 = \hbox{\itemcontents}%
+  %
+  % @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet.
+  \ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi
+  %
+  \let\item=\itemizeitem
 }
 
-\def\itemizey #1#2{%
-\aboveenvbreak %
-\itemmax=\itemindent %
-\advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin %
-\advance \leftskip by \itemindent %
-\exdentamount=\itemindent
-\parindent = 0pt %
-\parskip = \smallskipamount %
-\ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi%
-\def#2{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
-\def\itemcontents{#1}%
-\let\item=\itemizeitem}
-
-% Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value.
-% These are `.?!:;,'
-\def\frenchspacing{\sfcode46=1000 \sfcode63=1000 \sfcode33=1000
-  \sfcode58=1000 \sfcode59=1000 \sfcode44=1000 }
+% Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate.
+%
+\def\itemizeitem{%
+  \advance\itemno by 1  % for enumerations
+  {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break
+  {%
+   % If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a
+   % \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have
+   % done a \vskip-\parskip.  In that case, we don't want to zero
+   % parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading.  On the
+   % other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there
+   % usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much
+   % space.  In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before.  At least
+   % that's the theory.
+   \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \parskip=0in \fi
+   \noindent
+   \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}%
+   %
+   \vadjust{\penalty 1200}}% not good to break after first line of item.
+  \flushcr
+}
 
 % \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in
 % TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder.
@@ -1874,11 +3684,8 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 % or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list.  No
 % argument is the same as `1'.
 %
-\def\enumerate{\parsearg\enumeratezzz}
-\def\enumeratezzz #1{\enumeratey #1  \endenumeratey}
+\envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1  \endenumeratey}
 \def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{%
-  \begingroup % ended by the @end enumerate
-  %
   % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'.
   \def\thearg{#1}%
   \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi
@@ -1949,13 +3756,13 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
   }%
 }
 
-% Call itemizey, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the
+% Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the
 % common last two arguments.  Also subtract one from the initial value in
 % \itemno, since @item increments \itemno.
 %
 \def\startenumeration#1{%
   \advance\itemno by -1
-  \itemizey{#1.}\Eenumerate\flushcr
+  \doitemize{#1.}\flushcr
 }
 
 % @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg
@@ -1966,16 +3773,6 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 \def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate}
 \def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate}
 
-% Definition of @item while inside @itemize.
-
-\def\itemizeitem{%
-\advance\itemno by 1
-{\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}%
-\ifhmode \errmessage{In hmode at itemizeitem}\fi
-{\parskip=0in \hskip 0pt
-\hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents\hskip \itemmargin}%
-\vadjust{\penalty 1200}}%
-\flushcr}
 
 % @multitable macros
 % Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96
@@ -2002,24 +3799,14 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 %   @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
 %   @item ...
 %   using the widest term desired in each column.
-%
-% For those who want to use more than one line's worth of words in
-% the preamble, break the line within one argument and it
-% will parse correctly, i.e.,
-%
-%     @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3
-%      template}
-% Not:
-%     @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template}
-%      {Column 3 template}
 
 % Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column
 % starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's
 % with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed,
 % ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns.
 
-% @item, @tab, @multitable or @end multitable do not need to be on their
-% own lines, but it will not hurt if they are.
+% @item, @tab do not need to be on their own lines, but it will not hurt
+% if they are.
 
 % Sample multitable:
 
@@ -2063,13 +3850,12 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
 \def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions}
 \newif\ifsetpercent
 
-% #1 is the part of the @columnfraction before the decimal point, which
-% is presumably either 0 or the empty string (but we don't check, we
-% just throw it away).  #2 is the decimal part, which we use as the
-% percent of \hsize for this column.
-\def\pickupwholefraction#1.#2 {%
+% #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might
+% be just 1.  We just use it, whatever it is.
+%
+\def\pickupwholefraction#1 {%
   \global\advance\colcount by 1
-  \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{.#2\hsize}%
+  \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}%
   \setuptable
 }
 
@@ -2086,8 +3872,8 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
          \let\go\pickupwholefraction
       \else
          \global\advance\colcount by 1
-         \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip }% Add a normal word space as a separator;
-                            % typically that is always in the input, anyway.
+         \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a
+                   % separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway.
          \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}%
       \fi
     \fi
@@ -2102,18 +3888,40 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
   \go
 }
 
-% This used to have \hskip1sp.  But then the space in a template line is
-% not enough.  That is bad.  So let's go back to just & until we
-% encounter the problem it was intended to solve again.
-% --karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99.
-\def\tab{&}
+% multitable-only commands.
+%
+% @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold.
+% Assignments have to be global since we are inside the implicit group
+% of an alignment entry.  \everycr resets \everytab so we don't have to
+% undo it ourselves.
+\def\headitemfont{\b}% for people to use in the template row; not changeable
+\def\headitem{%
+  \checkenv\multitable
+  \crcr
+  \global\everytab={\bf}% can't use \headitemfont since the parsing differs
+  \the\everytab % for the first item
+}%
+%
+% A \tab used to include \hskip1sp.  But then the space in a template
+% line is not enough.  That is bad.  So let's go back to just `&' until
+% we again encounter the problem the 1sp was intended to solve.
+%					--karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99.
+\def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &\the\everytab}%
 
 % @multitable ... @end multitable definitions:
 %
-\def\multitable{\parsearg\dotable}
-\def\dotable#1{\bgroup
+\newtoks\everytab  % insert after every tab.
+%
+\envdef\multitable{%
   \vskip\parskip
-  \let\item\crcr
+  \startsavinginserts
+  %
+  % @item within a multitable starts a normal row.
+  % We use \def instead of \let so that if one of the multitable entries
+  % contains an @itemize, we don't choke on the \item (seen as \crcr aka
+  % \endtemplate) expanding \doitemize.
+  \def\item{\crcr}%
+  %
   \tolerance=9500
   \hbadness=9500
   \setmultitablespacing
@@ -2121,373 +3929,281 @@ where each line of input produces a line of output.}
   \parindent=\multitableparindent
   \overfullrule=0pt
   \global\colcount=0
-  \def\Emultitable{\global\setpercentfalse\cr\egroup\egroup}%
   %
+  \everycr = {%
+    \noalign{%
+      \global\everytab={}%
+      \global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter.
+      % Check for saved footnotes, etc.
+      \checkinserts
+      % Keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages.
+      %\filbreak
+	% Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the
+	% table breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better?  Wait until the
+	% problem manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl.
+    }%
+  }%
+  %
+  \parsearg\domultitable
+}
+\def\domultitable#1{%
   % To parse everything between @multitable and @item:
   \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable
   %
-  % \everycr will reset column counter, \colcount, at the end of
-  % each line. Every column entry will cause \colcount to advance by one.
-  % The table preamble
-  % looks at the current \colcount to find the correct column width.
-  \everycr{\noalign{%
-  %
-  % \filbreak%% keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages.
-  % Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the table
-  % breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better?  Wait until the problem
-  % manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl.
-    \global\colcount=0\relax}}%
-  %
   % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will
   % be used as many times as user calls for columns.
   % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and
   % continue for many paragraphs if desired.
-  \halign\bgroup&\global\advance\colcount by 1\relax
-    \multistrut\vtop{\hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname
-  %
-  % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other
-  % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after
-  % the first one.
-  %
-  % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace
-  % to the width of each template entry.
-  %
-  % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will
-  % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip
-  % will keep entries from bumping into each other.  Table will start at
-  % left margin and final column will justify at right margin.
-  %
-  % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment.
-  \rightskip=0pt
-  \ifnum\colcount=1
-    % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text.
-    \advance\hsize by\leftskip
-  \else
-    \ifsetpercent \else
-      % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize
-      % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace.
-      \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace
-    \fi
-   % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace:
-  \leftskip=\multitablecolspace
-  \fi
-  % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious
-  % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the
-  % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself.
-  % For example:
-  % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89
-  % @item @code{#}
-  % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country.
-  % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively marking
-  % characters.
-  \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut}\cr
-}
-
-\def\setmultitablespacing{% test to see if user has set \multitablelinespace.
-% If so, do nothing. If not, give it an appropriate dimension based on
-% current baselineskip.
+  \halign\bgroup &%
+    \global\advance\colcount by 1
+    \multistrut
+    \vtop{%
+      % Use the current \colcount to find the correct column width:
+      \hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname
+      %
+      % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other
+      % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after
+      % the first one.
+      %
+      % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace
+      % to the width of each template entry.
+      %
+      % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will
+      % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip
+      % will keep entries from bumping into each other.  Table will start at
+      % left margin and final column will justify at right margin.
+      %
+      % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment.
+      \rightskip=0pt
+      \ifnum\colcount=1
+	% The first column will be indented with the surrounding text.
+	\advance\hsize by\leftskip
+      \else
+	\ifsetpercent \else
+	  % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize
+	  % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace.
+	  \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace
+	\fi
+       % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace:
+      \leftskip=\multitablecolspace
+      \fi
+      % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious
+      % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the
+      % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself.
+      % For example:
+      % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89
+      % @item @code{#}
+      % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country.
+      % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively
+      % marking characters.
+      \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut
+    }\cr
+}
+\def\Emultitable{%
+  \crcr
+  \egroup % end the \halign
+  \global\setpercentfalse
+}
+
+\def\setmultitablespacing{%
+  \def\multistrut{\strut}% just use the standard line spacing
+  %
+  % Compute \multitablelinespace (if not defined by user) for use in
+  % \multitableparskip calculation.  We used define \multistrut based on
+  % this, but (ironically) that caused the spacing to be off.
+  % See bug-texinfo report from Werner Lemberg, 31 Oct 2004 12:52:20 +0100.
 \ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt
 \setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip
 \global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0
-%% strut to put in table in case some entry doesn't have descenders,
-%% to keep lines equally spaced
-\let\multistrut = \strut
-\else
-%% FIXME: what is \box0 supposed to be?
-\gdef\multistrut{\vrule height\multitablelinespace depth\dp0
-width0pt\relax} \fi
-%% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of
-%% table. If not, do nothing.
-%%        If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace.
+\fi
+% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of
+% table. If not, do nothing.
+%        If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace.
 \ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace
 \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
-\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
-                                      %% than skip between lines in the table.
+\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt % to keep parskip somewhat smaller
+                                      % than skip between lines in the table.
 \fi%
 \ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt
 \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
-\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
-                                      %% than skip between lines in the table.
+\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt % to keep parskip somewhat smaller
+                                      % than skip between lines in the table.
 \fi}
 
 
 \message{conditionals,}
-% Prevent errors for section commands.
-% Used in @ignore and in failing conditionals.
-\def\ignoresections{%
-  \let\chapter=\relax
-  \let\unnumbered=\relax
-  \let\top=\relax
-  \let\unnumberedsec=\relax
-  \let\unnumberedsection=\relax
-  \let\unnumberedsubsec=\relax
-  \let\unnumberedsubsection=\relax
-  \let\unnumberedsubsubsec=\relax
-  \let\unnumberedsubsubsection=\relax
-  \let\section=\relax
-  \let\subsec=\relax
-  \let\subsubsec=\relax
-  \let\subsection=\relax
-  \let\subsubsection=\relax
-  \let\appendix=\relax
-  \let\appendixsec=\relax
-  \let\appendixsection=\relax
-  \let\appendixsubsec=\relax
-  \let\appendixsubsection=\relax
-  \let\appendixsubsubsec=\relax
-  \let\appendixsubsubsection=\relax
-  \let\contents=\relax
-  \let\smallbook=\relax
-  \let\titlepage=\relax
-}
-
-% Used in nested conditionals, where we have to parse the Texinfo source
-% and so want to turn off most commands, in case they are used
-% incorrectly.
-%
-\def\ignoremorecommands{%
-  \let\defcodeindex = \relax
-  \let\defcv = \relax
-  \let\deffn = \relax
-  \let\deffnx = \relax
-  \let\defindex = \relax
-  \let\defivar = \relax
-  \let\defmac = \relax
-  \let\defmethod = \relax
-  \let\defop = \relax
-  \let\defopt = \relax
-  \let\defspec = \relax
-  \let\deftp = \relax
-  \let\deftypefn = \relax
-  \let\deftypefun = \relax
-  \let\deftypeivar = \relax
-  \let\deftypeop = \relax
-  \let\deftypevar = \relax
-  \let\deftypevr = \relax
-  \let\defun = \relax
-  \let\defvar = \relax
-  \let\defvr = \relax
-  \let\ref = \relax
-  \let\xref = \relax
-  \let\printindex = \relax
-  \let\pxref = \relax
-  \let\settitle = \relax
-  \let\setchapternewpage = \relax
-  \let\setchapterstyle = \relax
-  \let\everyheading = \relax
-  \let\evenheading = \relax
-  \let\oddheading = \relax
-  \let\everyfooting = \relax
-  \let\evenfooting = \relax
-  \let\oddfooting = \relax
-  \let\headings = \relax
-  \let\include = \relax
-  \let\lowersections = \relax
-  \let\down = \relax
-  \let\raisesections = \relax
-  \let\up = \relax
-  \let\set = \relax
-  \let\clear = \relax
-  \let\item = \relax
-}
-
-% Ignore @ignore ... @end ignore.
+
+% @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext,
+% @ifnotxml always succeed.  They currently do nothing; we don't
+% attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested.  But we
+% have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't
+% attempt to close an environment group.
 %
-\def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}}
+\def\makecond#1{%
+  \expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname = \relax
+  \expandafter\let\csname iscond.#1\endcsname = 1
+}
+\makecond{iftex}
+\makecond{ifnotdocbook}
+\makecond{ifnothtml}
+\makecond{ifnotinfo}
+\makecond{ifnotplaintext}
+\makecond{ifnotxml}
 
-% Ignore @ifinfo, @ifhtml, @ifnottex, @html, @menu, and @direntry text.
+% Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like.
 %
-\def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}}
+\def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}}
+\def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}}
+\def\docbook{\doignore{docbook}}
+\def\html{\doignore{html}}
+\def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook}}
 \def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}}
+\def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}}
 \def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}}
-\def\html{\doignore{html}}
+\def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}}
+\def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}}
+\def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}}
 \def\menu{\doignore{menu}}
-\def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}}
-
-% @dircategory CATEGORY  -- specify a category of the dir file
-% which this file should belong to.  Ignore this in TeX.
-\let\dircategory = \comment
+\def\xml{\doignore{xml}}
 
-% Ignore text until a line `@end #1'.
+% Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals.
 %
+% A count to remember the depth of nesting.
+\newcount\doignorecount
+
 \def\doignore#1{\begingroup
-  % Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer.
-  \ignoresections
-  %
-  % Define a command to swallow text until we reach `@end #1'.
-  % This @ is a catcode 12 token (that is the normal catcode of @ in
-  % this texinfo.tex file).  We change the catcode of @ below to match.
-  \long\def\doignoretext##1@end #1{\enddoignore}%
+  % Scan in ``verbatim'' mode:
+  \obeylines
+  \catcode`\@ = \other
+  \catcode`\{ = \other
+  \catcode`\} = \other
   %
   % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants.
-  \catcode32 = 10
-  %
-  % Ignore braces, too, so mismatched braces don't cause trouble.
-  \catcode`\{ = 9
-  \catcode`\} = 9
-  %
-  % We must not have @c interpreted as a control sequence.
-  \catcode`\@ = 12
-  %
-  % Make the letter c a comment character so that the rest of the line
-  % will be ignored. This way, the document can have (for example)
-  %   @c @end ifinfo
-  % and the @end ifinfo will be properly ignored.
-  % (We've just changed @ to catcode 12.)
-  \catcode`\c = 14
-  %
-  % And now expand that command.
-  \doignoretext
-}
-
-% What we do to finish off ignored text.
-%
-\def\enddoignore{\endgroup\ignorespaces}%
-
-\newif\ifwarnedobs\warnedobsfalse
-\def\obstexwarn{%
-  \ifwarnedobs\relax\else
-  % We need to warn folks that they may have trouble with TeX 3.0.
-  % This uses \immediate\write16 rather than \message to get newlines.
-    \immediate\write16{}
-    \immediate\write16{WARNING: for users of Unix TeX 3.0!}
-    \immediate\write16{This manual trips a bug in TeX version 3.0 (tex hangs).}
-    \immediate\write16{If you are running another version of TeX, relax.}
-    \immediate\write16{If you are running Unix TeX 3.0, kill this TeX process.}
-    \immediate\write16{  Then upgrade your TeX installation if you can.}
-    \immediate\write16{  (See ftp://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/TeX.README.)}
-    \immediate\write16{If you are stuck with version 3.0, run the}
-    \immediate\write16{  script ``tex3patch'' from the Texinfo distribution}
-    \immediate\write16{  to use a workaround.}
-    \immediate\write16{}
-    \global\warnedobstrue
-    \fi
+  \spaceisspace
+  %
+  % Count number of #1's that we've seen.
+  \doignorecount = 0
+  %
+  % Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'.
+  \dodoignore{#1}%
 }
 
-% **In TeX 3.0, setting text in \nullfont hangs tex.  For a
-% workaround (which requires the file ``dummy.tfm'' to be installed),
-% uncomment the following line:
-%%%%%\font\nullfont=dummy\let\obstexwarn=\relax
-
-% Ignore text, except that we keep track of conditional commands for
-% purposes of nesting, up to an `@end #1' command.
-%
-\def\nestedignore#1{%
-  \obstexwarn
-  % We must actually expand the ignored text to look for the @end
-  % command, so that nested ignore constructs work.  Thus, we put the
-  % text into a \vbox and then do nothing with the result.  To minimize
-  % the change of memory overflow, we follow the approach outlined on
-  % page 401 of the TeXbook: make the current font be a dummy font.
+{ \catcode`_=11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source.
+  \obeylines %
   %
-  \setbox0 = \vbox\bgroup
-    % Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer.
-    \ignoresections
+  \gdef\dodoignore#1{%
+    % #1 contains the command name as a string, e.g., `ifinfo'.
     %
-    % Define `@end #1' to end the box, which will in turn undefine the
-    % @end command again.
-    \expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\egroup\ignorespaces}%
+    % Define a command to find the next `@end #1'.
+    \long\def\doignoretext##1^^M@end #1{%
+      \doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1\_STOP_}%
     %
-    % We are going to be parsing Texinfo commands.  Most cause no
-    % trouble when they are used incorrectly, but some commands do
-    % complicated argument parsing or otherwise get confused, so we
-    % undefine them.
+    % And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a
+    % line.  (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for
+    % example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.)
+    \long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1##2\_STOP_{\doignoreyyy{##2}\_STOP_}%
     %
-    % We can't do anything about stray @-signs, unfortunately;
-    % they'll produce `undefined control sequence' errors.
-    \ignoremorecommands
-    %
-    % Set the current font to be \nullfont, a TeX primitive, and define
-    % all the font commands to also use \nullfont.  We don't use
-    % dummy.tfm, as suggested in the TeXbook, because not all sites
-    % might have that installed.  Therefore, math mode will still
-    % produce output, but that should be an extremely small amount of
-    % stuff compared to the main input.
-    %
-    \nullfont
-    \let\tenrm=\nullfont \let\tenit=\nullfont \let\tensl=\nullfont
-    \let\tenbf=\nullfont \let\tentt=\nullfont \let\smallcaps=\nullfont
-    \let\tensf=\nullfont
-    % Similarly for index fonts (mostly for their use in smallexample).
-    \let\smallrm=\nullfont \let\smallit=\nullfont \let\smallsl=\nullfont
-    \let\smallbf=\nullfont \let\smalltt=\nullfont \let\smallsc=\nullfont
-    \let\smallsf=\nullfont
-    %
-    % Don't complain when characters are missing from the fonts.
-    \tracinglostchars = 0
-    %
-    % Don't bother to do space factor calculations.
-    \frenchspacing
-    %
-    % Don't report underfull hboxes.
-    \hbadness = 10000
-    %
-    % Do minimal line-breaking.
-    \pretolerance = 10000
-    %
-    % Do not execute instructions in @tex
-    \def\tex{\doignore{tex}}%
-    % Do not execute macro definitions.
-    % `c' is a comment character, so the word `macro' will get cut off.
-    \def\macro{\doignore{ma}}%
+    % And now expand that command.
+    \doignoretext ^^M%
+  }%
+}
+
+\def\doignoreyyy#1{%
+  \def\temp{#1}%
+  \ifx\temp\empty			% Nothing found.
+    \let\next\doignoretextzzz
+  \else					% Found a nested condition, ...
+    \advance\doignorecount by 1
+    \let\next\doignoretextyyy		% ..., look for another.
+    % If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example).
+  \fi
+  \next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro.
+}
+
+% We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_".
+%
+\def\doignoretextzzz#1{%
+  \ifnum\doignorecount = 0	% We have just found the outermost @end.
+    \let\next\enddoignore
+  \else				% Still inside a nested condition.
+    \advance\doignorecount by -1
+    \let\next\doignoretext      % Look for the next @end.
+  \fi
+  \next
 }
 
+% Finish off ignored text.
+{ \obeylines%
+  % Ignore anything after the last `@end #1'; this matters in verbatim
+  % environments, where otherwise the newline after an ignored conditional
+  % would result in a blank line in the output.
+  \gdef\enddoignore#1^^M{\endgroup\ignorespaces}%
+}
+
+
 % @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value.
 % @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE.
 %
 % Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be
 % empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our
 % own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we
-% didn't need it.  Make sure the catcode of space is correct to avoid
-% losing inside @example, for instance.
+% didn't need it.
+% We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode`\ =10.
 %
-\def\set{\begingroup\catcode` =10
-  \catcode`\-=12 \catcode`\_=12 % Allow - and _ in VAR.
-  \parsearg\setxxx}
-\def\setxxx#1{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy}
+\parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy}
 \def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{%
-  \def\temp{#2}%
-  \ifx\temp\empty \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname = \empty
-  \else \setzzz{#1}#2\endsetzzz % Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted.
-  \fi
-  \endgroup
+  {%
+    \makevalueexpandable
+    \def\temp{#2}%
+    \edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET#1}}%
+    \ifx\temp\empty
+      \next{}%
+    \else
+      \setzzz#2\endsetzzz
+    \fi
+  }%
 }
-% Can't use \xdef to pre-expand #2 and save some time, since \temp or
-% \next or other control sequences that we've defined might get us into
-% an infinite loop. Consider `@set foo @cite{bar}'.
-\def\setzzz#1#2 \endsetzzz{\expandafter\gdef\csname SET#1\endcsname{#2}}
+% Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted.
+\def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}}
 
 % @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR.
 %
-\def\clear{\parsearg\clearxxx}
-\def\clearxxx#1{\global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax}
+\parseargdef\clear{%
+  {%
+    \makevalueexpandable
+    \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax
+  }%
+}
 
 % @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo.
+\def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx}
+\def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup}
 {
-  \catcode`\_ = \active
+  \catcode`\- = \active \catcode`\_ = \active
   %
-  % We might end up with active _ or - characters in the argument if
-  % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}.  So \let any
-  % such active characters to their normal equivalents.
-  \gdef\value{\begingroup
-    \catcode`\-=12 \catcode`\_=12
-    \indexbreaks \let_\normalunderscore
-    \valuexxx}
+  \gdef\makevalueexpandable{%
+    \let\value = \expandablevalue
+    % We don't want these characters active, ...
+    \catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other
+    % ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if
+    % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though.
+    % So \let them to their normal equivalents.
+    \let-\normaldash \let_\normalunderscore
+  }
 }
-\def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup}
 
 % We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's
-% properly in indexes (we \let\value to this in \indexdummies).  Ones
-% whose names contain - or _ still won't work, but we can't do anything
-% about that.  The command has to be fully expandable, since the result
-% winds up in the index file.  This means that if the variable's value
-% contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain it will fail
-% (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work to do a
-% one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete).
+% properly in indexes (we call \makevalueexpandable in \indexdummies).
+% The command has to be fully expandable (if the variable is set), since
+% the result winds up in the index file.  This means that if the
+% variable's value contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain
+% it will fail (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work
+% to do a one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete).
 %
 \def\expandablevalue#1{%
   \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
     {[No value for ``#1'']}%
+    \message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}%
   \else
     \csname SET#1\endcsname
   \fi
@@ -2496,66 +4212,65 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
 % @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined
 % with @set.
 %
-\def\ifset{\parsearg\ifsetxxx}
-\def\ifsetxxx #1{%
-  \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
-    \expandafter\ifsetfail
-  \else
-    \expandafter\ifsetsucceed
-  \fi
+% To get special treatment of `@end ifset,' call \makeond and the redefine.
+%
+\makecond{ifset}
+\def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}}
+\def\doifset#1#2{%
+  {%
+    \makevalueexpandable
+    \let\next=\empty
+    \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#2\endcsname\relax
+      #1% If not set, redefine \next.
+    \fi
+    \expandafter
+  }\next
 }
-\def\ifsetsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifset}}
-\def\ifsetfail{\nestedignore{ifset}}
-\defineunmatchedend{ifset}
+\def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}}
 
-% @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been
+% @ifclear VAR ... @end executes the `...' iff VAR has never been
 % defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear.
 %
-\def\ifclear{\parsearg\ifclearxxx}
-\def\ifclearxxx #1{%
-  \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
-    \expandafter\ifclearsucceed
-  \else
-    \expandafter\ifclearfail
-  \fi
-}
-\def\ifclearsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifclear}}
-\def\ifclearfail{\nestedignore{ifclear}}
-\defineunmatchedend{ifclear}
-
-% @iftex, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo always succeed; we read the text
-% following, through the first @end iftex (etc.).  Make `@end iftex'
-% (etc.) valid only after an @iftex.
-%
-\def\iftex{\conditionalsucceed{iftex}}
-\def\ifnothtml{\conditionalsucceed{ifnothtml}}
-\def\ifnotinfo{\conditionalsucceed{ifnotinfo}}
-\defineunmatchedend{iftex}
-\defineunmatchedend{ifnothtml}
-\defineunmatchedend{ifnotinfo}
-
-% We can't just want to start a group at @iftex (for example) and end it
-% at @end iftex, since then @set commands inside the conditional have no
-% effect (they'd get reverted at the end of the group).  So we must
-% define \Eiftex to redefine itself to be its previous value.  (We can't
-% just define it to fail again with an ``unmatched end'' error, since
-% the @ifset might be nested.)
-%
-\def\conditionalsucceed#1{%
-  \edef\temp{%
-    % Remember the current value of \E#1.
-    \let\nece{prevE#1} = \nece{E#1}%
-    %
-    % At the `@end #1', redefine \E#1 to be its previous value.
-    \def\nece{E#1}{\let\nece{E#1} = \nece{prevE#1}}%
-  }%
-  \temp
+% The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the
+% above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set,
+% then redefine \next to \ifclearfail.
+%
+\makecond{ifclear}
+\def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}}
+\def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}}
+
+% @ifcommandisdefined CMD ... @end executes the `...' if CMD (written
+% without the @) is in fact defined.  We can only feasibly check at the
+% TeX level, so something like `mathcode' is going to considered
+% defined even though it is not a Texinfo command.
+% 
+\makecond{ifcommanddefined}
+\def\ifcommanddefined{\parsearg{\doifcmddefined{\let\next=\ifcmddefinedfail}}}
+%
+\def\doifcmddefined#1#2{{%
+    \makevalueexpandable
+    \let\next=\empty
+    \expandafter\ifx\csname #2\endcsname\relax
+      #1% If not defined, \let\next as above.
+    \fi
+    \expandafter
+  }\next
 }
+\def\ifcmddefinedfail{\doignore{ifcommanddefined}}
 
-% We need to expand lots of \csname's, but we don't want to expand the
-% control sequences after we've constructed them.
-%
-\def\nece#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}
+% @ifcommandnotdefined CMD ... handled similar to @ifclear above.
+\makecond{ifcommandnotdefined}
+\def\ifcommandnotdefined{%
+  \parsearg{\doifcmddefined{\else \let\next=\ifcmdnotdefinedfail}}}
+\def\ifcmdnotdefinedfail{\doignore{ifcommandnotdefined}}
+
+% Set the `txicommandconditionals' variable, so documents have a way to
+% test if the @ifcommand...defined conditionals are available.
+\set txicommandconditionals
+
+% @dircategory CATEGORY  -- specify a category of the dir file
+% which this file should belong to.  Ignore this in TeX.
+\let\dircategory=\comment
 
 % @defininfoenclose.
 \let\definfoenclose=\comment
@@ -2565,9 +4280,8 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
 % Index generation facilities
 
 % Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite
-% except not \outer, so it can be used within \newindex.
-{\catcode`\@=11
-\gdef\newwrite{\alloc@7\write\chardef\sixt@@n}}
+% except not \outer, so it can be used within macros and \if's.
+\edef\newwrite{\makecsname{ptexnewwrite}}
 
 % \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo.
 % It automatically defines \fooindex such that
@@ -2587,42 +4301,48 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
 }
 
 % @defindex foo  ==  \newindex{foo}
-
+%
 \def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex}
 
 % Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code.
-
+%
+\def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex}
+%
 \def\newcodeindex#1{%
   \iflinks
     \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
     \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1
   \fi
   \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%
-    \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}
+    \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}%
 }
 
-\def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex}
 
 % @synindex foo bar    makes index foo feed into index bar.
 % Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index.
-% The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the
-% Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files.
-\def\synindex#1 #2 {%
-  \expandafter\let\expandafter\synindexfoo\expandafter=\csname#2indfile\endcsname
-  \expandafter\closeout\csname#1indfile\endcsname
-  \expandafter\let\csname#1indfile\endcsname=\synindexfoo
-  \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% define \xxxindex
-    \noexpand\doindex{#2}}%
-}
-
+%
 % @syncodeindex foo bar   similar, but put all entries made for index foo
 % inside @code.
-\def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {%
-  \expandafter\let\expandafter\synindexfoo\expandafter=\csname#2indfile\endcsname
-  \expandafter\closeout\csname#1indfile\endcsname
-  \expandafter\let\csname#1indfile\endcsname=\synindexfoo
-  \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% define \xxxindex
-    \noexpand\docodeindex{#2}}%
+%
+\def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}}
+\def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}}
+
+% #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo),
+% #3 the target index (bar).
+\def\dosynindex#1#2#3{%
+  % Only do \closeout if we haven't already done it, else we'll end up
+  % closing the target index.
+  \expandafter \ifx\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname \relax
+    % The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the
+    % Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files.
+    \expandafter\closeout\csname#2indfile\endcsname
+    \expandafter\let\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname = 1
+  \fi
+  % redefine \fooindfile:
+  \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname
+  \expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp
+  % redefine \fooindex:
+  \expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}%
 }
 
 % Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros.
@@ -2642,267 +4362,493 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
 \def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer}
 \def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}}
 
+% Take care of Texinfo commands that can appear in an index entry.
+% Since there are some commands we want to expand, and others we don't,
+% we have to laboriously prevent expansion for those that we don't.
+%
 \def\indexdummies{%
-\def\ { }%
-% Take care of the plain tex accent commands.
-\def\"{\realbackslash "}%
-\def\`{\realbackslash `}%
-\def\'{\realbackslash '}%
-\def\^{\realbackslash ^}%
-\def\~{\realbackslash ~}%
-\def\={\realbackslash =}%
-\def\b{\realbackslash b}%
-\def\c{\realbackslash c}%
-\def\d{\realbackslash d}%
-\def\u{\realbackslash u}%
-\def\v{\realbackslash v}%
-\def\H{\realbackslash H}%
-% Take care of the plain tex special European modified letters.
-\def\oe{\realbackslash oe}%
-\def\ae{\realbackslash ae}%
-\def\aa{\realbackslash aa}%
-\def\OE{\realbackslash OE}%
-\def\AE{\realbackslash AE}%
-\def\AA{\realbackslash AA}%
-\def\o{\realbackslash o}%
-\def\O{\realbackslash O}%
-\def\l{\realbackslash l}%
-\def\L{\realbackslash L}%
-\def\ss{\realbackslash ss}%
-% Take care of texinfo commands likely to appear in an index entry.
-% (Must be a way to avoid doing expansion at all, and thus not have to
-% laboriously list every single command here.)
-\def\@{@}% will be @@ when we switch to @ as escape char.
-% Need these in case \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again.
-% But can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes
-% braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters.  
-\let\{ = \mylbrace
-\let\} = \myrbrace
-\def\_{{\realbackslash _}}%
-\def\w{\realbackslash w }%
-\def\bf{\realbackslash bf }%
-%\def\rm{\realbackslash rm }%
-\def\sl{\realbackslash sl }%
-\def\sf{\realbackslash sf}%
-\def\tt{\realbackslash tt}%
-\def\gtr{\realbackslash gtr}%
-\def\less{\realbackslash less}%
-\def\hat{\realbackslash hat}%
-\def\TeX{\realbackslash TeX}%
-\def\dots{\realbackslash dots }%
-\def\result{\realbackslash result}%
-\def\equiv{\realbackslash equiv}%
-\def\expansion{\realbackslash expansion}%
-\def\print{\realbackslash print}%
-\def\error{\realbackslash error}%
-\def\point{\realbackslash point}%
-\def\copyright{\realbackslash copyright}%
-\def\tclose##1{\realbackslash tclose {##1}}%
-\def\code##1{\realbackslash code {##1}}%
-\def\uref##1{\realbackslash uref {##1}}%
-\def\url##1{\realbackslash url {##1}}%
-\def\env##1{\realbackslash env {##1}}%
-\def\command##1{\realbackslash command {##1}}%
-\def\option##1{\realbackslash option {##1}}%
-\def\dotless##1{\realbackslash dotless {##1}}%
-\def\samp##1{\realbackslash samp {##1}}%
-\def\,##1{\realbackslash ,{##1}}%
-\def\t##1{\realbackslash t {##1}}%
-\def\r##1{\realbackslash r {##1}}%
-\def\i##1{\realbackslash i {##1}}%
-\def\b##1{\realbackslash b {##1}}%
-\def\sc##1{\realbackslash sc {##1}}%
-\def\cite##1{\realbackslash cite {##1}}%
-\def\key##1{\realbackslash key {##1}}%
-\def\file##1{\realbackslash file {##1}}%
-\def\var##1{\realbackslash var {##1}}%
-\def\kbd##1{\realbackslash kbd {##1}}%
-\def\dfn##1{\realbackslash dfn {##1}}%
-\def\emph##1{\realbackslash emph {##1}}%
-\def\acronym##1{\realbackslash acronym {##1}}%
-%
-% Handle some cases of @value -- where the variable name does not
-% contain - or _, and the value does not contain any
-% (non-fully-expandable) commands.
-\let\value = \expandablevalue
-%
-\unsepspaces
-% Turn off macro expansion
-\turnoffmacros
-}
-
-% If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces
-% therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the
-% expansion of \tie (\\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ).
-{\obeyspaces
- \gdef\unsepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\space}}
-
-% \indexnofonts no-ops all font-change commands.
-% This is used when outputting the strings to sort the index by.
-\def\indexdummyfont#1{#1}
-\def\indexdummytex{TeX}
-\def\indexdummydots{...}
+  \escapechar = `\\     % use backslash in output files.
+  \def\@{@}% change to @@ when we switch to @ as escape char in index files.
+  \def\ {\realbackslash\space }%
+  %
+  % Need these unexpandable (because we define \tt as a dummy)
+  % definitions when @{ or @} appear in index entry text.  Also, more
+  % complicated, when \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again.
+  % We can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes
+  % braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters.  Perhaps we
+  % should define @lbrace and @rbrace commands a la @comma.
+  \def\{{{\tt\char123}}%
+  \def\}{{\tt\char125}}%
+  %
+  % I don't entirely understand this, but when an index entry is
+  % generated from a macro call, the \endinput which \scanmacro inserts
+  % causes processing to be prematurely terminated.  This is,
+  % apparently, because \indexsorttmp is fully expanded, and \endinput
+  % is an expandable command.  The redefinition below makes \endinput
+  % disappear altogether for that purpose -- although logging shows that
+  % processing continues to some further point.  On the other hand, it
+  % seems \endinput does not hurt in the printed index arg, since that
+  % is still getting written without apparent harm.
+  %
+  % Sample source (mac-idx3.tex, reported by Graham Percival to
+  % help-texinfo, 22may06):
+  % @macro funindex {WORD}
+  % @findex xyz
+  % @end macro
+  % ...
+  % @funindex commtest
+  %
+  % The above is not enough to reproduce the bug, but it gives the flavor.
+  %
+  % Sample whatsit resulting:
+  % .@write3{\entry{xyz}{@folio }{@code {xyz@endinput }}}
+  %
+  % So:
+  \let\endinput = \empty
+  %
+  % Do the redefinitions.
+  \commondummies
+}
+
+% For the aux and toc files, @ is the escape character.  So we want to
+% redefine everything using @ as the escape character (instead of
+% \realbackslash, still used for index files).  When everything uses @,
+% this will be simpler.
+%
+\def\atdummies{%
+  \def\@{@@}%
+  \def\ {@ }%
+  \let\{ = \lbraceatcmd
+  \let\} = \rbraceatcmd
+  %
+  % Do the redefinitions.
+  \commondummies
+  \otherbackslash
+}
 
+% Called from \indexdummies and \atdummies.
+%
+\def\commondummies{%
+  %
+  % \definedummyword defines \#1 as \string\#1\space, thus effectively
+  % preventing its expansion.  This is used only for control words,
+  % not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect for
+  % control characters, but is needed to separate the control word
+  % from whatever follows.
+  %
+  % For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the
+  % space.
+  %
+  % These can be used both for control words that take an argument and
+  % those that do not.  If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then
+  % that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever).
+  %
+  \def\definedummyword  ##1{\def##1{\string##1\space}}%
+  \def\definedummyletter##1{\def##1{\string##1}}%
+  \let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter
+  %
+  \commondummiesnofonts
+  %
+  \definedummyletter\_%
+  \definedummyletter\-%
+  %
+  % Non-English letters.
+  \definedummyword\AA
+  \definedummyword\AE
+  \definedummyword\DH
+  \definedummyword\L
+  \definedummyword\O
+  \definedummyword\OE
+  \definedummyword\TH
+  \definedummyword\aa
+  \definedummyword\ae
+  \definedummyword\dh
+  \definedummyword\exclamdown
+  \definedummyword\l
+  \definedummyword\o
+  \definedummyword\oe
+  \definedummyword\ordf
+  \definedummyword\ordm
+  \definedummyword\questiondown
+  \definedummyword\ss
+  \definedummyword\th
+  %
+  % Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do.
+  \definedummyword\bf
+  \definedummyword\gtr
+  \definedummyword\hat
+  \definedummyword\less
+  \definedummyword\sf
+  \definedummyword\sl
+  \definedummyword\tclose
+  \definedummyword\tt
+  %
+  \definedummyword\LaTeX
+  \definedummyword\TeX
+  %
+  % Assorted special characters.
+  \definedummyword\arrow
+  \definedummyword\bullet
+  \definedummyword\comma
+  \definedummyword\copyright
+  \definedummyword\registeredsymbol
+  \definedummyword\dots
+  \definedummyword\enddots
+  \definedummyword\entrybreak
+  \definedummyword\equiv
+  \definedummyword\error
+  \definedummyword\euro
+  \definedummyword\expansion
+  \definedummyword\geq
+  \definedummyword\guillemetleft
+  \definedummyword\guillemetright
+  \definedummyword\guilsinglleft
+  \definedummyword\guilsinglright
+  \definedummyword\lbracechar
+  \definedummyword\leq
+  \definedummyword\minus
+  \definedummyword\ogonek
+  \definedummyword\pounds
+  \definedummyword\point
+  \definedummyword\print
+  \definedummyword\quotedblbase
+  \definedummyword\quotedblleft
+  \definedummyword\quotedblright
+  \definedummyword\quoteleft
+  \definedummyword\quoteright
+  \definedummyword\quotesinglbase
+  \definedummyword\rbracechar
+  \definedummyword\result
+  \definedummyword\textdegree
+  %
+  % We want to disable all macros so that they are not expanded by \write.
+  \macrolist
+  %
+  \normalturnoffactive
+  %
+  % Handle some cases of @value -- where it does not contain any
+  % (non-fully-expandable) commands.
+  \makevalueexpandable
+}
+
+% \commondummiesnofonts: common to \commondummies and \indexnofonts.
+%
+\def\commondummiesnofonts{%
+  % Control letters and accents.
+  \definedummyletter\!%
+  \definedummyaccent\"%
+  \definedummyaccent\'%
+  \definedummyletter\*%
+  \definedummyaccent\,%
+  \definedummyletter\.%
+  \definedummyletter\/%
+  \definedummyletter\:%
+  \definedummyaccent\=%
+  \definedummyletter\?%
+  \definedummyaccent\^%
+  \definedummyaccent\`%
+  \definedummyaccent\~%
+  \definedummyword\u
+  \definedummyword\v
+  \definedummyword\H
+  \definedummyword\dotaccent
+  \definedummyword\ogonek
+  \definedummyword\ringaccent
+  \definedummyword\tieaccent
+  \definedummyword\ubaraccent
+  \definedummyword\udotaccent
+  \definedummyword\dotless
+  %
+  % Texinfo font commands.
+  \definedummyword\b
+  \definedummyword\i
+  \definedummyword\r
+  \definedummyword\sansserif
+  \definedummyword\sc
+  \definedummyword\slanted
+  \definedummyword\t
+  %
+  % Commands that take arguments.
+  \definedummyword\abbr
+  \definedummyword\acronym
+  \definedummyword\anchor
+  \definedummyword\cite
+  \definedummyword\code
+  \definedummyword\command
+  \definedummyword\dfn
+  \definedummyword\dmn
+  \definedummyword\email
+  \definedummyword\emph
+  \definedummyword\env
+  \definedummyword\file
+  \definedummyword\image
+  \definedummyword\indicateurl
+  \definedummyword\inforef
+  \definedummyword\kbd
+  \definedummyword\key
+  \definedummyword\math
+  \definedummyword\option
+  \definedummyword\pxref
+  \definedummyword\ref
+  \definedummyword\samp
+  \definedummyword\strong
+  \definedummyword\tie
+  \definedummyword\uref
+  \definedummyword\url
+  \definedummyword\var
+  \definedummyword\verb
+  \definedummyword\w
+  \definedummyword\xref
+}
+
+% \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index
+% by, and when constructing control sequence names.  It eliminates all
+% control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string
+% would be for a given command (usually its argument).
+%
 \def\indexnofonts{%
-% Just ignore accents.
-\let\,=\indexdummyfont
-\let\"=\indexdummyfont
-\let\`=\indexdummyfont
-\let\'=\indexdummyfont
-\let\^=\indexdummyfont
-\let\~=\indexdummyfont
-\let\==\indexdummyfont
-\let\b=\indexdummyfont
-\let\c=\indexdummyfont
-\let\d=\indexdummyfont
-\let\u=\indexdummyfont
-\let\v=\indexdummyfont
-\let\H=\indexdummyfont
-\let\dotless=\indexdummyfont
-% Take care of the plain tex special European modified letters.
-\def\oe{oe}%
-\def\ae{ae}%
-\def\aa{aa}%
-\def\OE{OE}%
-\def\AE{AE}%
-\def\AA{AA}%
-\def\o{o}%
-\def\O{O}%
-\def\l{l}%
-\def\L{L}%
-\def\ss{ss}%
-\let\w=\indexdummyfont
-\let\t=\indexdummyfont
-\let\r=\indexdummyfont
-\let\i=\indexdummyfont
-\let\b=\indexdummyfont
-\let\emph=\indexdummyfont
-\let\strong=\indexdummyfont
-\let\cite=\indexdummyfont
-\let\sc=\indexdummyfont
-%Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command
-% and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |...
-%\let\tt=\indexdummyfont
-\let\tclose=\indexdummyfont
-\let\code=\indexdummyfont
-\let\url=\indexdummyfont
-\let\uref=\indexdummyfont
-\let\env=\indexdummyfont
-\let\acronym=\indexdummyfont
-\let\command=\indexdummyfont
-\let\option=\indexdummyfont
-\let\file=\indexdummyfont
-\let\samp=\indexdummyfont
-\let\kbd=\indexdummyfont
-\let\key=\indexdummyfont
-\let\var=\indexdummyfont
-\let\TeX=\indexdummytex
-\let\dots=\indexdummydots
-\def\@{@}%
-}
-
-% To define \realbackslash, we must make \ not be an escape.
-% We must first make another character (@) an escape
-% so we do not become unable to do a definition.
-
-{\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\other
- @gdef@realbackslash{\}}
+  % Accent commands should become @asis.
+  \def\definedummyaccent##1{\let##1\asis}%
+  % We can just ignore other control letters.
+  \def\definedummyletter##1{\let##1\empty}%
+  % All control words become @asis by default; overrides below.
+  \let\definedummyword\definedummyaccent
+  %
+  \commondummiesnofonts
+  %
+  % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command
+  % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc.
+  % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands.
+  %\let\tt=\asis
+  %
+  \def\ { }%
+  \def\@{@}%
+  \def\_{\normalunderscore}%
+  \def\-{}% @- shouldn't affect sorting
+  %
+  % Unfortunately, texindex is not prepared to handle braces in the
+  % content at all.  So for index sorting, we map @{ and @} to strings
+  % starting with |, since that ASCII character is between ASCII { and }.
+  \def\{{|a}%
+  \def\lbracechar{|a}%
+  %
+  \def\}{|b}%
+  \def\rbracechar{|b}%
+  %
+  % Non-English letters.
+  \def\AA{AA}%
+  \def\AE{AE}%
+  \def\DH{DZZ}%
+  \def\L{L}%
+  \def\OE{OE}%
+  \def\O{O}%
+  \def\TH{ZZZ}%
+  \def\aa{aa}%
+  \def\ae{ae}%
+  \def\dh{dzz}%
+  \def\exclamdown{!}%
+  \def\l{l}%
+  \def\oe{oe}%
+  \def\ordf{a}%
+  \def\ordm{o}%
+  \def\o{o}%
+  \def\questiondown{?}%
+  \def\ss{ss}%
+  \def\th{zzz}%
+  %
+  \def\LaTeX{LaTeX}%
+  \def\TeX{TeX}%
+  %
+  % Assorted special characters.
+  % (The following {} will end up in the sort string, but that's ok.)
+  \def\arrow{->}%
+  \def\bullet{bullet}%
+  \def\comma{,}%
+  \def\copyright{copyright}%
+  \def\dots{...}%
+  \def\enddots{...}%
+  \def\equiv{==}%
+  \def\error{error}%
+  \def\euro{euro}%
+  \def\expansion{==>}%
+  \def\geq{>=}%
+  \def\guillemetleft{<<}%
+  \def\guillemetright{>>}%
+  \def\guilsinglleft{<}%
+  \def\guilsinglright{>}%
+  \def\leq{<=}%
+  \def\minus{-}%
+  \def\point{.}%
+  \def\pounds{pounds}%
+  \def\print{-|}%
+  \def\quotedblbase{"}%
+  \def\quotedblleft{"}%
+  \def\quotedblright{"}%
+  \def\quoteleft{`}%
+  \def\quoteright{'}%
+  \def\quotesinglbase{,}%
+  \def\registeredsymbol{R}%
+  \def\result{=>}%
+  \def\textdegree{o}%
+  %
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexlquoteignore\endcsname\relax
+  \else \indexlquoteignore \fi
+  %
+  % We need to get rid of all macros, leaving only the arguments (if present).
+  % Of course this is not nearly correct, but it is the best we can do for now.
+  % makeinfo does not expand macros in the argument to @deffn, which ends up
+  % writing an index entry, and texindex isn't prepared for an index sort entry
+  % that starts with \.
+  %
+  % Since macro invocations are followed by braces, we can just redefine them
+  % to take a single TeX argument.  The case of a macro invocation that
+  % goes to end-of-line is not handled.
+  %
+  \macrolist
+}
+
+% Undocumented (for FSFS 2nd ed.): @set txiindexlquoteignore makes us
+% ignore left quotes in the sort term.
+{\catcode`\`=\active
+ \gdef\indexlquoteignore{\let`=\empty}}
 
 \let\indexbackslash=0  %overridden during \printindex.
 \let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)?
 
-% For \ifx comparisons.
-\def\emptymacro{\empty}
-
 % Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case.
-%
-\def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}\empty}
+% #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text.
+\def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}{}}
 
 % Workhorse for all \fooindexes.
 % #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry --
-% \empty if called from \doind, as we usually are.  The main exception
-% is with defuns, which call us directly.
+% empty if called from \doind, as we usually are (the main exception
+% is with most defuns, which call us directly).
 %
 \def\dosubind#1#2#3{%
+  \iflinks
+  {%
+    % Store the main index entry text (including the third arg).
+    \toks0 = {#2}%
+    % If third arg is present, precede it with a space.
+    \def\thirdarg{#3}%
+    \ifx\thirdarg\empty \else
+      \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}%
+    \fi
+    %
+    \edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}%
+    %
+    \safewhatsit\dosubindwrite
+  }%
+  \fi
+}
+
+% Write the entry in \toks0 to the index file:
+%
+\def\dosubindwrite{%
   % Put the index entry in the margin if desired.
   \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else
-    \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt #2}}%
+    \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt \the\toks0}}%
   \fi
-  {%
-    \count255=\lastpenalty
-    {%
-      \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage
-      \escapechar=`\\
-      {%
-        \let\folio = 0% We will expand all macros now EXCEPT \folio.
-        \def\rawbackslashxx{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now
-        % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash.
-        %
-        \def\thirdarg{#3}%
-        %
-        % If third arg is present, precede it with space in sort key.
-        \ifx\thirdarg\emptymacro
-          \let\subentry = \empty
-        \else
-          \def\subentry{ #3}%
-        \fi
-        %
-        % First process the index entry with all font commands turned
-        % off to get the string to sort by.
-        {\indexnofonts \xdef\indexsorttmp{#2\subentry}}%
-        %
-        % Now the real index entry with the fonts.
-        \toks0 = {#2}%
-        %
-        % If third (subentry) arg is present, add it to the index
-        % string.  And include a space.
-        \ifx\thirdarg\emptymacro \else
-          \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}%
-        \fi
-        %
-        % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key
-        % and the original text, including any font commands.  We write
-        % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file, texindex reduces to
-        % two when writing the .??s sorted result.
-        \edef\temp{%
-          \write\csname#1indfile\endcsname{%
-            \realbackslash entry{\indexsorttmp}{\folio}{\the\toks0}}%
-        }%
-        %
-        % If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it
-        % by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting
-        % the skip again.  Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the
-        % \write will make \lastskip zero.  The result is that sequences
-        % like this:
-        % @end defun
-        % @tindex whatever
-        % @defun ...
-        % will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the
-        % start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of
-        % the previous defun.
-        %
-        % But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode.  We
-        % don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph.
-        %
-        % Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too.
-        %
-        \iflinks
-          \ifvmode
-            \skip0 = \lastskip
-            \ifdim\lastskip = 0pt \else \nobreak\vskip-\lastskip \fi
-          \fi
-          %
-          \temp % do the write
-          %
-          %
-          \ifvmode \ifdim\skip0 = 0pt \else \nobreak\vskip\skip0 \fi \fi
-        \fi
-      }%
-    }%
-    \penalty\count255
+  %
+  % Remember, we are within a group.
+  \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage
+  \def\backslashcurfont{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now
+      % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash.
+  %
+  % Process the index entry with all font commands turned off, to
+  % get the string to sort by.
+  {\indexnofonts
+   \edef\temp{\the\toks0}% need full expansion
+   \xdef\indexsorttmp{\temp}%
+  }%
+  %
+  % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and
+  % the original text, including any font commands.  We write
+  % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the
+  % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s
+  % sorted result.
+  \edef\temp{%
+    \write\writeto{%
+      \string\entry{\indexsorttmp}{\noexpand\folio}{\the\toks0}}%
   }%
+  \temp
 }
 
+% Take care of unwanted page breaks/skips around a whatsit:
+%
+% If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it
+% by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting
+% the skip again.  Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the
+% \write or \pdfdest will make \lastskip zero.  The result is that
+% sequences like this:
+% @end defun
+% @tindex whatever
+% @defun ...
+% will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the
+% start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of
+% the previous defun.
+%
+% But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode.  We
+% don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph.
+%
+% Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too.
+%
+% But wait, there is a catch there:
+% We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip.  \ifdim is not
+% sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts
+% of the skip.  The only way seems to be to check the textual
+% representation of the skip.
+%
+% The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that
+% the ``p'' and ``t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter).
+%
+\edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname z@skip\endcsname}
+%
+\newskip\whatsitskip
+\newcount\whatsitpenalty
+%
+% ..., ready, GO:
+%
+\def\safewhatsit#1{\ifhmode
+  #1%
+ \else
+  % \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously.
+  \whatsitskip = \lastskip
+  \edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}%
+  \whatsitpenalty = \lastpenalty
+  %
+  % If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a
+  % skip.  And since a skip is discardable, that means this
+  % -\whatsitskip glue we're inserting is preceded by a
+  % non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential
+  % breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed.
+  \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
+  \else
+    \vskip-\whatsitskip
+  \fi
+  %
+  #1%
+  %
+  \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
+    % If \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a penalty, and
+    % perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak.  In that case, we want
+    % to re-insert the same penalty (values >10000 are used for various
+    % signals); since we just inserted a non-discardable item, any
+    % following glue (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint.  For example:
+    %   @deffn deffn-whatever
+    %   @vindex index-whatever
+    %   Description.
+    % would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit
+    % and the "Description." paragraph.
+    \ifnum\whatsitpenalty>9999 \penalty\whatsitpenalty \fi
+  \else
+    % On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip,
+    % this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item
+    % (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak.
+    \nobreak\vskip\whatsitskip
+  \fi
+\fi}
+
 % The index entry written in the file actually looks like
 %  \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}
 % or
@@ -2938,13 +4884,13 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
 % @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed.
 % It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered).
 %
-\def\printindex{\parsearg\doprintindex}
-\def\doprintindex#1{\begingroup
+\parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup
   \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}%
   %
   \smallfonts \rm
   \tolerance = 9500
-  \indexbreaks
+  \plainfrenchspacing
+  \everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression.
   %
   % See if the index file exists and is nonempty.
   % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains
@@ -2971,7 +4917,7 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
       % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape
       % character.  It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change
       % to make right now.
-      \def\indexbackslash{\rawbackslashxx}%
+      \def\indexbackslash{\backslashcurfont}%
       \catcode`\\ = 0
       \escapechar = `\\
       \begindoublecolumns
@@ -2993,7 +4939,10 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
   \removelastskip
   %
   % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus.
-  \penalty -300
+  \nobreak
+  \vskip 0pt plus 3\baselineskip
+  \penalty 0
+  \vskip 0pt plus -3\baselineskip
   %
   % Typeset the initial.  Making this add up to a whole number of
   % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column
@@ -3003,93 +4952,123 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
   % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns.
   \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip
   \leftline{\secbf #1}%
-  \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip
-  %
   % Do our best not to break after the initial.
   \nobreak
+  \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip
 }}
 
-% This typesets a paragraph consisting of #1, dot leaders, and then #2
-% flush to the right margin.  It is used for index and table of contents
-% entries.  The paragraph is indented by \leftskip.
-%
-\def\entry#1#2{\begingroup
-  %
-  % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't
-  % affect previous text.
-  \par
-  %
-  % Do not fill out the last line with white space.
-  \parfillskip = 0in
-  %
-  % No extra space above this paragraph.
-  \parskip = 0in
-  %
-  % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines.
-  \finalhyphendemerits = 0
-  %
-  % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number
-  % don't both fit on one line.  In that case, bob suggests starting the
-  % dots pretty far over on the line.  Unfortunately, a large
-  % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across
-  % lines.  So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders.
-  %
-  % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start
-  % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that.
-  \hangindent = 2em
-  %
-  % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line
-  % with blank space.
-  \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil
-  %
-  % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing columns.
-  \vskip 0pt plus1pt
-  %
-  % Start a ``paragraph'' for the index entry so the line breaking
-  % parameters we've set above will have an effect.
-  \noindent
-  %
-  % Insert the text of the index entry.  TeX will do line-breaking on it.
-  #1%
-  % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if
-  % there are no page numbers.  The next person who breaks this will be
-  % cursed by a Unix daemon.
-  \def\tempa{{\rm }}%
-  \def\tempb{#2}%
-  \edef\tempc{\tempa}%
-  \edef\tempd{\tempb}%
-  \ifx\tempc\tempd\ \else%
+% \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and
+% then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin.  It is used for index
+% and table of contents entries.  The paragraph is indented by \leftskip.
+%
+% A straightforward implementation would start like this:
+%	\def\entry#1#2{...
+% But this freezes the catcodes in the argument, and can cause problems to
+% @code, which sets - active.  This problem was fixed by a kludge---
+% ``-'' was active throughout whole index, but this isn't really right.
+% The right solution is to prevent \entry from swallowing the whole text.
+%                                 --kasal, 21nov03
+\def\entry{%
+  \begingroup
+    %
+    % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't
+    % affect previous text.
+    \par
+    %
+    % Do not fill out the last line with white space.
+    \parfillskip = 0in
+    %
+    % No extra space above this paragraph.
+    \parskip = 0in
+    %
+    % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines.
+    \finalhyphendemerits = 0
+    %
+    % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number
+    % don't both fit on one line.  In that case, bob suggests starting the
+    % dots pretty far over on the line.  Unfortunately, a large
+    % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across
+    % lines.  So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders.
     %
-    % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out
-    % this line with blank space.  (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the
-    % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.)
-    \hfil\penalty50
-    \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number.
+    % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start
+    % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that.
+    \hangindent = 2em
     %
-    % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as
-    % part of (the primitive) \par.  Without it, a spurious underfull
-    % \hbox ensues.
-    \ifpdf
-      \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph.
+    % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line
+    % with blank space.
+    \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil
+    %
+    % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing
+    % columns.
+    \vskip 0pt plus1pt
+    %
+    % When reading the text of entry, convert explicit line breaks
+    % from @* into spaces.  The user might give these in long section
+    % titles, for instance.
+    \def\*{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}%
+    \def\entrybreak{\hfil\break}%
+    %
+    % Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter):
+    \afterassignment\doentry
+    \let\temp =
+}
+\def\entrybreak{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}%
+\def\doentry{%
+    \bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace.
+      \noindent
+      \aftergroup\finishentry
+      % And now comes the text of the entry.
+}
+\def\finishentry#1{%
+    % #1 is the page number.
+    %
+    % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if
+    % there are no page numbers.  The next person who breaks this will be
+    % cursed by a Unix daemon.
+    \setbox\boxA = \hbox{#1}%
+    \ifdim\wd\boxA = 0pt
+      \ %
     \else
-      \ #2% The page number ends the paragraph.
+      %
+      % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out
+      % this line with blank space.  (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the
+      % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.)
+      \hfil\penalty50
+      \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number.
+      %
+      % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as
+      % part of (the primitive) \par.  Without it, a spurious underfull
+      % \hbox ensues.
+      \ifpdf
+	\pdfgettoks#1.%
+	\ \the\toksA
+      \else
+	\ #1%
+      \fi
     \fi
-  \fi%
-  \par
-\endgroup}
+    \par
+  \endgroup
+}
 
-% Like \dotfill except takes at least 1 em.
+% Like plain.tex's \dotfill, except uses up at least 1 em.
 \def\indexdotfill{\cleaders
-  \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu ${\it .}$ \mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill}
+  \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu.\mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill}
 
 \def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}}
 
 \newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm
-
-\def\secondary #1#2{
-{\parfillskip=0in \parskip=0in
-\hangindent =1in \hangafter=1
-\noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill #2\par
+\def\secondary#1#2{{%
+  \parfillskip=0in
+  \parskip=0in
+  \hangindent=1in
+  \hangafter=1
+  \noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill
+  \ifpdf
+    \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph.
+  \else
+    #2
+  \fi
+  \par
 }}
 
 % Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes.
@@ -3149,7 +5128,6 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
   %
   % Double the \vsize as well.  (We don't need a separate register here,
   % since nobody clobbers \vsize.)
-  \advance\vsize by -\ht\partialpage
   \vsize = 2\vsize
 }
 
@@ -3163,6 +5141,7 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
   % previous page.
   \dimen@ = \vsize
   \divide\dimen@ by 2
+  \advance\dimen@ by -\ht\partialpage
   %
   % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right.
   \setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@
@@ -3170,16 +5149,47 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
   \unvbox255
   \penalty\outputpenalty
 }
+%
+% Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material,
+% followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2.
 \def\pagesofar{%
-  % Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material,
-  % followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2.
   \unvbox\partialpage
   %
   \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
   \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize
   \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}%
 }
+%
+% All done with double columns.
 \def\enddoublecolumns{%
+  % The following penalty ensures that the page builder is exercised
+  % _before_ we change the output routine.  This is necessary in the
+  % following situation:
+  %
+  % The last section of the index consists only of a single entry.
+  % Before this section, \pagetotal is less than \pagegoal, so no
+  % break occurs before the last section starts.  However, the last
+  % section, consisting of \initial and the single \entry, does not
+  % fit on the page and has to be broken off.  Without the following
+  % penalty the page builder will not be exercised until \eject
+  % below, and by that time we'll already have changed the output
+  % routine to the \balancecolumns version, so the next-to-last
+  % double-column page will be processed with \balancecolumns, which
+  % is wrong:  The two columns will go to the main vertical list, with
+  % the broken-off section in the recent contributions.  As soon as
+  % the output routine finishes, TeX starts reconsidering the page
+  % break.  The two columns and the broken-off section both fit on the
+  % page, because the two columns now take up only half of the page
+  % goal.  When TeX sees \eject from below which follows the final
+  % section, it invokes the new output routine that we've set after
+  % \balancecolumns below; \onepageout will try to fit the two columns
+  % and the final section into the vbox of \pageheight (see
+  % \pagebody), causing an overfull box.
+  %
+  % Note that glue won't work here, because glue does not exercise the
+  % page builder, unlike penalties (see The TeXbook, pp. 280-281).
+  \penalty0
+  %
   \output = {%
     % Split the last of the double-column material.  Leave it on the
     % current page, no automatic page break.
@@ -3203,8 +5213,9 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
   % \endgroup where \vsize got restored).
   \pagegoal = \vsize
 }
+%
+% Called at the end of the double column material.
 \def\balancecolumns{%
-  % Called at the end of the double column material.
   \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120.
   \dimen@ = \ht0
   \advance\dimen@ by \topskip
@@ -3234,6 +5245,27 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
 \message{sectioning,}
 % Chapters, sections, etc.
 
+% Let's start with @part.
+\outer\parseargdef\part{\partzzz{#1}}
+\def\partzzz#1{%
+  \chapoddpage
+  \null
+  \vskip.3\vsize  % move it down on the page a bit
+  \begingroup
+    \noindent \titlefonts\rmisbold #1\par % the text
+    \let\lastnode=\empty      % no node to associate with
+    \writetocentry{part}{#1}{}% but put it in the toc
+    \headingsoff              % no headline or footline on the part page
+    \chapoddpage
+  \endgroup
+}
+
+% \unnumberedno is an oxymoron.  But we count the unnumbered
+% sections so that we can refer to them unambiguously in the pdf
+% outlines by their "section number".  We avoid collisions with chapter
+% numbers by starting them at 10000.  (If a document ever has 10000
+% chapters, we're in trouble anyway, I'm sure.)
+\newcount\unnumberedno \unnumberedno = 10000
 \newcount\chapno
 \newcount\secno        \secno=0
 \newcount\subsecno     \subsecno=0
@@ -3241,9 +5273,12 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
 
 % This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ...
 \newcount\appendixno  \appendixno = `\@
+%
 % \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno}
-% We do the following for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual
+% We do the following ugly conditional instead of the above simple
+% construct for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual
 % letter in the expansion, not just typeset.
+%
 \def\appendixletter{%
   \ifnum\appendixno=`A A%
   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B%
@@ -3279,13 +5314,18 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}
 
-% Each @chapter defines this as the name of the chapter.
-% page headings and footings can use it.  @section does likewise.
+% Each @chapter defines these (using marks) as the number+name, number
+% and name of the chapter.  Page headings and footings can use
+% these.  @section does likewise.
 \def\thischapter{}
+\def\thischapternum{}
+\def\thischaptername{}
 \def\thissection{}
+\def\thissectionnum{}
+\def\thissectionname{}
 
 \newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level
-\newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raise/lowersections modify this count
+\newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raisesections/@lowersections modify this count
 
 % @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc.
 \def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1}
@@ -3295,334 +5335,311 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
 \def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1}
 \let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name
 
-% Choose a numbered-heading macro
-% #1 is heading level if unmodified by @raisesections or @lowersections
-% #2 is text for heading
-\def\numhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
-\ifcase\absseclevel
-  \chapterzzz{#2}
-\or
-  \seczzz{#2}
-\or
-  \numberedsubseczzz{#2}
-\or
-  \numberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
-\else
-  \ifnum \absseclevel<0
-    \chapterzzz{#2}
+% we only have subsub.
+\chardef\maxseclevel = 3
+%
+% A numbered section within an unnumbered changes to unnumbered too.
+% To achieve this, remember the "biggest" unnum. sec. we are currently in:
+\chardef\unnlevel = \maxseclevel
+%
+% Trace whether the current chapter is an appendix or not:
+% \chapheadtype is "N" or "A", unnumbered chapters are ignored.
+\def\chapheadtype{N}
+
+% Choose a heading macro
+% #1 is heading type
+% #2 is heading level
+% #3 is text for heading
+\def\genhead#1#2#3{%
+  % Compute the abs. sec. level:
+  \absseclevel=#2
+  \advance\absseclevel by \secbase
+  % Make sure \absseclevel doesn't fall outside the range:
+  \ifnum \absseclevel < 0
+    \absseclevel = 0
   \else
-    \numberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
+    \ifnum \absseclevel > 3
+      \absseclevel = 3
+    \fi
   \fi
-\fi
-}
-
-% like \numhead, but chooses appendix heading levels
-\def\apphead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
-\ifcase\absseclevel
-  \appendixzzz{#2}
-\or
-  \appendixsectionzzz{#2}
-\or
-  \appendixsubseczzz{#2}
-\or
-  \appendixsubsubseczzz{#2}
-\else
-  \ifnum \absseclevel<0
-    \appendixzzz{#2}
+  % The heading type:
+  \def\headtype{#1}%
+  \if \headtype U%
+    \ifnum \absseclevel < \unnlevel
+      \chardef\unnlevel = \absseclevel
+    \fi
   \else
-    \appendixsubsubseczzz{#2}
+    % Check for appendix sections:
+    \ifnum \absseclevel = 0
+      \edef\chapheadtype{\headtype}%
+    \else
+      \if \headtype A\if \chapheadtype N%
+	\errmessage{@appendix... within a non-appendix chapter}%
+      \fi\fi
+    \fi
+    % Check for numbered within unnumbered:
+    \ifnum \absseclevel > \unnlevel
+      \def\headtype{U}%
+    \else
+      \chardef\unnlevel = 3
+    \fi
   \fi
-\fi
-}
-
-% like \numhead, but chooses numberless heading levels
-\def\unnmhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
-\ifcase\absseclevel
-  \unnumberedzzz{#2}
-\or
-  \unnumberedseczzz{#2}
-\or
-  \unnumberedsubseczzz{#2}
-\or
-  \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
-\else
-  \ifnum \absseclevel<0
-    \unnumberedzzz{#2}
+  % Now print the heading:
+  \if \headtype U%
+    \ifcase\absseclevel
+	\unnumberedzzz{#3}%
+    \or \unnumberedseczzz{#3}%
+    \or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#3}%
+    \or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#3}%
+    \fi
   \else
-    \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
+    \if \headtype A%
+      \ifcase\absseclevel
+	  \appendixzzz{#3}%
+      \or \appendixsectionzzz{#3}%
+      \or \appendixsubseczzz{#3}%
+      \or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#3}%
+      \fi
+    \else
+      \ifcase\absseclevel
+	  \chapterzzz{#3}%
+      \or \seczzz{#3}%
+      \or \numberedsubseczzz{#3}%
+      \or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#3}%
+      \fi
+    \fi
   \fi
-\fi
+  \suppressfirstparagraphindent
 }
 
-% @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered.
-\def\thischaptername{No Chapter Title}
-\outer\def\chapter{\parsearg\chapteryyy}
-\def\chapteryyy #1{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz
-\def\chapterzzz #1{%
-\secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
-\global\advance \chapno by 1 \message{\putwordChapter\space \the\chapno}%
-\chapmacro {#1}{\the\chapno}%
-\gdef\thissection{#1}%
-\gdef\thischaptername{#1}%
-% We don't substitute the actual chapter name into \thischapter
-% because we don't want its macros evaluated now.
-\xdef\thischapter{\putwordChapter{} \the\chapno: \noexpand\thischaptername}%
-\toks0 = {#1}%
-\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash chapentry{\the\toks0}%
-                                  {\the\chapno}}}%
-\temp
-\donoderef
-\global\let\section = \numberedsec
-\global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
-\global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
-}
-
-\outer\def\appendix{\parsearg\appendixyyy}
-\def\appendixyyy #1{\apphead0{#1}} % normally apphead0 calls appendixzzz
-\def\appendixzzz #1{%
-\secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
-\global\advance \appendixno by 1
-\message{\putwordAppendix\space \appendixletter}%
-\chapmacro {#1}{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter}%
-\gdef\thissection{#1}%
-\gdef\thischaptername{#1}%
-\xdef\thischapter{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter: \noexpand\thischaptername}%
-\toks0 = {#1}%
-\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash chapentry{\the\toks0}%
-                       {\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter}}}%
-\temp
-\appendixnoderef
-\global\let\section = \appendixsec
-\global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec
-\global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec
+% an interface:
+\def\numhead{\genhead N}
+\def\apphead{\genhead A}
+\def\unnmhead{\genhead U}
+
+% @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered.  Increment top-level counter, reset
+% all lower-level sectioning counters to zero.
+%
+% Also set \chaplevelprefix, which we prepend to @float sequence numbers
+% (e.g., figures), q.v.  By default (before any chapter), that is empty.
+\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty
+%
+\outer\parseargdef\chapter{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz
+\def\chapterzzz#1{%
+  % section resetting is \global in case the chapter is in a group, such
+  % as an @include file.
+  \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
+    \global\advance\chapno by 1
+  %
+  % Used for \float.
+  \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\the\chapno.}%
+  \resetallfloatnos
+  %
+  % \putwordChapter can contain complex things in translations.
+  \toks0=\expandafter{\putwordChapter}%
+  \message{\the\toks0 \space \the\chapno}%
+  %
+  % Write the actual heading.
+  \chapmacro{#1}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno}%
+  %
+  % So @section and the like are numbered underneath this chapter.
+  \global\let\section = \numberedsec
+  \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
+  \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
+}
+
+\outer\parseargdef\appendix{\apphead0{#1}} % normally calls appendixzzz
+%
+\def\appendixzzz#1{%
+  \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
+    \global\advance\appendixno by 1
+  \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\appendixletter.}%
+  \resetallfloatnos
+  %
+  % \putwordAppendix can contain complex things in translations.
+  \toks0=\expandafter{\putwordAppendix}%
+  \message{\the\toks0 \space \appendixletter}%
+  %
+  \chapmacro{#1}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter}%
+  %
+  \global\let\section = \appendixsec
+  \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec
+  \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec
+}
+
+% normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz:
+\outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}}
+\def\unnumberedzzz#1{%
+  \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
+    \global\advance\unnumberedno by 1
+  %
+  % Since an unnumbered has no number, no prefix for figures.
+  \global\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty
+  \resetallfloatnos
+  %
+  % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the
+  % argument to \message.  Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX
+  % expanded them.  For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX
+  % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant
+  % to be executed, not expanded).
+  %
+  % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear
+  % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself.  We use
+  % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once,
+  % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>.  (We also do this for
+  % the toc entries.)
+  \toks0 = {#1}%
+  \message{(\the\toks0)}%
+  %
+  \chapmacro{#1}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}%
+  %
+  \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec
+  \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec
+  \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec
 }
 
 % @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered.
-\outer\def\centerchap{\parsearg\centerchapyyy}
-\def\centerchapyyy #1{{\let\unnumbchapmacro=\centerchapmacro \unnumberedyyy{#1}}}
+\outer\parseargdef\centerchap{%
+  % Well, we could do the following in a group, but that would break
+  % an assumption that \chapmacro is called at the outermost level.
+  % Thus we are safer this way:		--kasal, 24feb04
+  \let\centerparametersmaybe = \centerparameters
+  \unnmhead0{#1}%
+  \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
+}
 
 % @top is like @unnumbered.
-\outer\def\top{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy}
-
-\outer\def\unnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy}
-\def\unnumberedyyy #1{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz
-\def\unnumberedzzz #1{%
-\secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
-%
-% This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the
-% argument to \message.  Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX
-% expanded them.  For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX
-% expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant
-% to be executed, not expanded).
-%
-% Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear
-% as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself.  We use
-% \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once,
-% simply yielding the contents of <toks register>.  (We also do this for
-% the toc entries.)
-\toks0 = {#1}\message{(\the\toks0)}%
-%
-\unnumbchapmacro {#1}%
-\gdef\thischapter{#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
-\toks0 = {#1}%
-\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbchapentry{\the\toks0}}}%
-\temp
-\unnumbnoderef
-\global\let\section = \unnumberedsec
-\global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec
-\global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec
-}
+\let\top\unnumbered
 
 % Sections.
-\outer\def\numberedsec{\parsearg\secyyy}
-\def\secyyy #1{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz
-\def\seczzz #1{%
-\subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 %
-\gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}%
-\toks0 = {#1}%
-\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash secentry{\the\toks0}%
-                                  {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}}}%
-\temp
-\donoderef
-\nobreak
-}
-
-\outer\def\appendixsection{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy}
-\outer\def\appendixsec{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy}
-\def\appendixsecyyy #1{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz
-\def\appendixsectionzzz #1{%
-\subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 %
-\gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}%
-\toks0 = {#1}%
-\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash secentry{\the\toks0}%
-                                  {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}}}%
-\temp
-\appendixnoderef
-\nobreak
-}
-
-\outer\def\unnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsecyyy}
-\def\unnumberedsecyyy #1{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz
-\def\unnumberedseczzz #1{%
-\plainsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
-\toks0 = {#1}%
-\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsecentry{\the\toks0}}}%
-\temp
-\unnumbnoderef
-\nobreak
+% 
+\outer\parseargdef\numberedsec{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz
+\def\seczzz#1{%
+  \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\secno by 1
+  \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}%
+}
+
+% normally calls appendixsectionzzz:
+\outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}}
+\def\appendixsectionzzz#1{%
+  \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\secno by 1
+  \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter.\the\secno}%
+}
+\let\appendixsec\appendixsection
+
+% normally calls unnumberedseczzz:
+\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}}
+\def\unnumberedseczzz#1{%
+  \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\secno by 1
+  \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno}%
 }
 
 % Subsections.
-\outer\def\numberedsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsecyyy}
-\def\numberedsubsecyyy #1{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz
-\def\numberedsubseczzz #1{%
-\gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 %
-\subsecheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}%
-\toks0 = {#1}%
-\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsecentry{\the\toks0}%
-                                    {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}}%
-\temp
-\donoderef
-\nobreak
-}
-
-\outer\def\appendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsecyyy}
-\def\appendixsubsecyyy #1{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz
-\def\appendixsubseczzz #1{%
-\gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 %
-\subsecheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}%
-\toks0 = {#1}%
-\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsecentry{\the\toks0}%
-                                {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}}%
-\temp
-\appendixnoderef
-\nobreak
-}
-
-\outer\def\unnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsecyyy}
-\def\unnumberedsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz
-\def\unnumberedsubseczzz #1{%
-\plainsubsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
-\toks0 = {#1}%
-\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsubsecentry%
-                                    {\the\toks0}}}%
-\temp
-\unnumbnoderef
-\nobreak
+% 
+% normally calls numberedsubseczzz:
+\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}}
+\def\numberedsubseczzz#1{%
+  \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\subsecno by 1
+  \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
+}
+
+% normally calls appendixsubseczzz:
+\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}}
+\def\appendixsubseczzz#1{%
+  \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\subsecno by 1
+  \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yappendix}%
+                 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
+}
+
+% normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz:
+\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}}
+\def\unnumberedsubseczzz#1{%
+  \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\subsecno by 1
+  \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynothing}%
+                 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
 }
 
 % Subsubsections.
-\outer\def\numberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsubsecyyy}
-\def\numberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz
-\def\numberedsubsubseczzz #1{%
-\gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 %
-\subsubsecheading {#1}
-  {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}%
-\toks0 = {#1}%
-\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsubsecentry{\the\toks0}%
-  {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}}}%
-\temp
-\donoderef
-\nobreak
-}
-
-\outer\def\appendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubsecyyy}
-\def\appendixsubsubsecyyy #1{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz
-\def\appendixsubsubseczzz #1{%
-\gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 %
-\subsubsecheading {#1}
-  {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}%
-\toks0 = {#1}%
-\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsubsecentry{\the\toks0}%
-  {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}}}%
-\temp
-\appendixnoderef
-\nobreak
-}
-
-\outer\def\unnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy}
-\def\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz
-\def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz #1{%
-\plainsubsubsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
-\toks0 = {#1}%
-\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsubsubsecentry%
-                                    {\the\toks0}}}%
-\temp
-\unnumbnoderef
-\nobreak
-}
-
-% These are variants which are not "outer", so they can appear in @ifinfo.
-% Actually, they should now be obsolete; ordinary section commands should work.
-\def\infotop{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz}
-\def\infounnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz}
-\def\infounnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedseczzz}
-\def\infounnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubseczzz}
-\def\infounnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubseczzz}
-
-\def\infoappendix{\parsearg\appendixzzz}
-\def\infoappendixsec{\parsearg\appendixseczzz}
-\def\infoappendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubseczzz}
-\def\infoappendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubseczzz}
-
-\def\infochapter{\parsearg\chapterzzz}
-\def\infosection{\parsearg\sectionzzz}
-\def\infosubsection{\parsearg\subsectionzzz}
-\def\infosubsubsection{\parsearg\subsubsectionzzz}
+% 
+% normally numberedsubsubseczzz:
+\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}}
+\def\numberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
+  \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
+  \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynumbered}%
+                 {\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
+}
+
+% normally appendixsubsubseczzz:
+\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}}
+\def\appendixsubsubseczzz#1{%
+  \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
+  \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yappendix}%
+                 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
+}
+
+% normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz:
+\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}}
+\def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
+  \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
+  \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynothing}%
+                 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
+}
 
 % These macros control what the section commands do, according
 % to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered).
 % Define them by default for a numbered chapter.
-\global\let\section = \numberedsec
-\global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
-\global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
+\let\section = \numberedsec
+\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
+\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
 
 % Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading
 
-% NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and such:
-%       1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit
-%          overlong headings to fold.
-%       2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a
-%          heading is obnoxious; this forbids it.
-%       3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and
-%          if justification is not attempted.  Hence \raggedright.
-
-
-\def\majorheading{\parsearg\majorheadingzzz}
-\def\majorheadingzzz #1{%
-{\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }%
-{\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
-                  \parindent=0pt\raggedright
-                  \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 200}
+\def\majorheading{%
+  {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }%
+  \parsearg\chapheadingzzz
+}
 
-\def\chapheading{\parsearg\chapheadingzzz}
-\def\chapheadingzzz #1{\chapbreak %
-{\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
-                  \parindent=0pt\raggedright
-                  \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 200}
+\def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz}
+\def\chapheadingzzz#1{%
+  \vbox{\chapfonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}%
+  \nobreak\bigskip \nobreak
+  \suppressfirstparagraphindent
+}
 
 % @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading.
-\def\heading{\parsearg\plainsecheading}
-\def\subheading{\parsearg\plainsubsecheading}
-\def\subsubheading{\parsearg\plainsubsubsecheading}
+\parseargdef\heading{\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
+  \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
+\parseargdef\subheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
+  \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
+\parseargdef\subsubheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
+  \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
 
 % These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only
 % (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it),
 % given all the information in convenient, parsed form.
 
-%%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative)
+% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative)
 \def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi}
 
-\def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname}
-
-%%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it
 % Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed)
-
 \newskip\chapheadingskip
 
+% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it.
 \def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}}
 \def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject}
-\def\chapoddpage{\chappager \ifodd\pageno \else \hbox to 0pt{} \chappager\fi}
+% Because \domark is called before \chapoddpage, the filler page will
+% get the headings for the next chapter, which is wrong.  But we don't
+% care -- we just disable all headings on the filler page.
+\def\chapoddpage{%
+  \chappager
+  \ifodd\pageno \else
+    \begingroup
+      \headingsoff
+      \null
+      \chappager
+    \endgroup
+  \fi
+}
 
 \def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname}
 
@@ -3637,7 +5654,7 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
 \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager
 \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}}
 
-\def\CHAPPAGodd{
+\def\CHAPPAGodd{%
 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
 \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage
 \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage
@@ -3645,107 +5662,293 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
 
 \CHAPPAGon
 
-\def\CHAPFplain{
-\global\let\chapmacro=\chfplain
-\global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfplain
-\global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfplain}
-
-% Plain chapter opening.
-% #1 is the text, #2 the chapter number or empty if unnumbered.
-\def\chfplain#1#2{%
+% Chapter opening.
+%
+% #1 is the text, #2 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing,
+% Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), #3 the chapter number.
+%
+% To test against our argument.
+\def\Ynothingkeyword{Ynothing}
+\def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc}
+\def\Yappendixkeyword{Yappendix}
+%
+\def\chapmacro#1#2#3{%
+  % Insert the first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark).
+  \let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs
+  \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
+  \gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{}\gdef\thissectionnum{}%
+                        \gdef\thissection{}}%
+  %
+  \def\temptype{#2}%
+  \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
+    \gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}%
+                          \gdef\thischapter{\thischaptername}}%
+  \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
+    \gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}%
+                          \gdef\thischapter{}}%
+  \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
+    \toks0={#1}%
+    \xdef\lastchapterdefs{%
+      \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}%
+      \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\appendixletter}%
+      % \noexpand\putwordAppendix avoids expanding indigestible
+      % commands in some of the translations.
+      \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordAppendix{}
+                                 \noexpand\thischapternum:
+                                 \noexpand\thischaptername}%
+    }%
+  \else
+    \toks0={#1}%
+    \xdef\lastchapterdefs{%
+      \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}%
+      \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\the\chapno}%
+      % \noexpand\putwordChapter avoids expanding indigestible
+      % commands in some of the translations.
+      \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordChapter{}
+                                 \noexpand\thischapternum:
+                                 \noexpand\thischaptername}%
+    }%
+  \fi\fi\fi
+  %
+  % Output the mark.  Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of
+  % the preceding space.
+  \safewhatsit\domark
+  %
+  % Insert the chapter heading break.
   \pchapsepmacro
+  %
+  % Now the second mark, after the heading break.  No break points
+  % between here and the heading.
+  \let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs
+  \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
+  \domark
+  %
   {%
-    \chapfonts \rm
-    \def\chapnum{#2}%
-    \setbox0 = \hbox{#2\ifx\chapnum\empty\else\enspace\fi}%
-    \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
-          \hangindent = \wd0 \centerparametersmaybe
+    \chapfonts \rmisbold
+    %
+    % Have to define \lastsection before calling \donoderef, because the
+    % xref code eventually uses it.  On the other hand, it has to be called
+    % after \pchapsepmacro, or the headline will change too soon.
+    \gdef\lastsection{#1}%
+    %
+    % Only insert the separating space if we have a chapter/appendix
+    % number, and don't print the unnumbered ``number''.
+    \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
+      \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
+      \def\toctype{unnchap}%
+    \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
+      \setbox0 = \hbox{}% contents like unnumbered, but no toc entry
+      \def\toctype{omit}%
+    \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
+      \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} #3\enspace}%
+      \def\toctype{app}%
+    \else
+      \setbox0 = \hbox{#3\enspace}%
+      \def\toctype{numchap}%
+    \fi\fi\fi
+    %
+    % Write the toc entry for this chapter.  Must come before the
+    % \donoderef, because we include the current node name in the toc
+    % entry, and \donoderef resets it to empty.
+    \writetocentry{\toctype}{#1}{#3}%
+    %
+    % For pdftex, we have to write out the node definition (aka, make
+    % the pdfdest) after any page break, but before the actual text has
+    % been typeset.  If the destination for the pdf outline is after the
+    % text, then jumping from the outline may wind up with the text not
+    % being visible, for instance under high magnification.
+    \donoderef{#2}%
+    %
+    % Typeset the actual heading.
+    \nobreak % Avoid page breaks at the interline glue.
+    \vbox{\raggedtitlesettings \hangindent=\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe
           \unhbox0 #1\par}%
   }%
   \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title
   \nobreak
 }
 
-% Plain opening for unnumbered.
-\def\unnchfplain#1{\chfplain{#1}{}}
-
 % @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered.
 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
-\def\centerchfplain#1{{%
-  \def\centerparametersmaybe{%
-    \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip
-    \leftskip = \rightskip
-    \parfillskip = 0pt
-  }%
-  \chfplain{#1}{}%
-}}
+\def\centerparameters{%
+  \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip
+  \leftskip = \rightskip
+  \parfillskip = 0pt
+}
 
-\CHAPFplain % The default
 
+% I don't think this chapter style is supported any more, so I'm not
+% updating it with the new noderef stuff.  We'll see.  --karl, 11aug03.
+%
+\def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname}
+%
 \def\unnchfopen #1{%
-\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
-                       \parindent=0pt\raggedright
-                       \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
+  \chapoddpage
+  \vbox{\chapfonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}%
+  \nobreak\bigskip\nobreak
 }
-
 \def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts
 \vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}%
 \par\penalty 5000 %
 }
-
 \def\centerchfopen #1{%
-\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
-                       \parindent=0pt
-                       \hfill {\rm #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
+  \chapoddpage
+  \vbox{\chapfonts \raggedtitlesettings \hfill #1\hfill}%
+  \nobreak\bigskip \nobreak
 }
+\def\CHAPFopen{%
+  \global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen
+  \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen}
 
-\def\CHAPFopen{
-\global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen
-\global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfopen
-\global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen}
 
-
-% Section titles.
+% Section titles.  These macros combine the section number parts and
+% call the generic \sectionheading to do the printing.
+%
 \newskip\secheadingskip
-\def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip {-1000}}
-\def\secheading#1#2#3{\sectionheading{sec}{#2.#3}{#1}}
-\def\plainsecheading#1{\sectionheading{sec}{}{#1}}
+\def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip{-1000}}
 
 % Subsection titles.
-\newskip \subsecheadingskip
-\def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip {-500}}
-\def\subsecheading#1#2#3#4{\sectionheading{subsec}{#2.#3.#4}{#1}}
-\def\plainsubsecheading#1{\sectionheading{subsec}{}{#1}}
+\newskip\subsecheadingskip
+\def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip{-500}}
 
 % Subsubsection titles.
-\let\subsubsecheadingskip = \subsecheadingskip
-\let\subsubsecheadingbreak = \subsecheadingbreak
-\def\subsubsecheading#1#2#3#4#5{\sectionheading{subsubsec}{#2.#3.#4.#5}{#1}}
-\def\plainsubsubsecheading#1{\sectionheading{subsubsec}{}{#1}}
+\def\subsubsecheadingskip{\subsecheadingskip}
+\def\subsubsecheadingbreak{\subsecheadingbreak}
 
 
-% Print any size section title.
+% Print any size, any type, section title.
 %
-% #1 is the section type (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #2 is the section
-% number (maybe empty), #3 the text.
-\def\sectionheading#1#2#3{%
-  {%
-    \expandafter\advance\csname #1headingskip\endcsname by \parskip
-    \csname #1headingbreak\endcsname
-  }%
+% #1 is the text, #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #3 is
+% the section type for xrefs (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix), #4 is the
+% section number.
+%
+\def\seckeyword{sec}
+%
+\def\sectionheading#1#2#3#4{%
   {%
+    \checkenv{}% should not be in an environment.
+    %
     % Switch to the right set of fonts.
-    \csname #1fonts\endcsname \rm
+    \csname #2fonts\endcsname \rmisbold
+    %
+    \def\sectionlevel{#2}%
+    \def\temptype{#3}%
+    %
+    % Insert first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark).
+    \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
+    \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
+      \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
+        \gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{#1}\gdef\thissectionnum{}%
+                              \gdef\thissection{\thissectionname}}%
+      \fi
+    \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
+      % Don't redefine \thissection.
+    \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
+      \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
+        \toks0={#1}%
+        \xdef\lastsectiondefs{%
+          \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}%
+          \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}%
+          % \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible
+          % commands in some of the translations.
+          \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{}
+                                     \noexpand\thissectionnum:
+                                     \noexpand\thissectionname}%
+        }%
+      \fi
+    \else
+      \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
+        \toks0={#1}%
+        \xdef\lastsectiondefs{%
+          \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}%
+          \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}%
+          % \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible
+          % commands in some of the translations.
+          \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{}
+                                     \noexpand\thissectionnum:
+                                     \noexpand\thissectionname}%
+        }%
+      \fi
+    \fi\fi\fi
+    %
+    % Go into vertical mode.  Usually we'll already be there, but we
+    % don't want the following whatsit to end up in a preceding paragraph
+    % if the document didn't happen to have a blank line.
+    \par
+    %
+    % Output the mark.  Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of
+    % the preceding space.
+    \safewhatsit\domark
+    %
+    % Insert space above the heading.
+    \csname #2headingbreak\endcsname
+    %
+    % Now the second mark, after the heading break.  No break points
+    % between here and the heading.
+    \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
+    \domark
+    %
+    % Only insert the space after the number if we have a section number.
+    \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
+      \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
+      \def\toctype{unn}%
+      \gdef\lastsection{#1}%
+    \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
+      % for @headings -- no section number, don't include in toc,
+      % and don't redefine \lastsection.
+      \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
+      \def\toctype{omit}%
+      \let\sectionlevel=\empty
+    \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
+      \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}%
+      \def\toctype{app}%
+      \gdef\lastsection{#1}%
+    \else
+      \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}%
+      \def\toctype{num}%
+      \gdef\lastsection{#1}%
+    \fi\fi\fi
+    %
+    % Write the toc entry (before \donoderef).  See comments in \chapmacro.
+    \writetocentry{\toctype\sectionlevel}{#1}{#4}%
     %
-    % Only insert the separating space if we have a section number.
-    \def\secnum{#2}%
-    \setbox0 = \hbox{#2\ifx\secnum\empty\else\enspace\fi}%
+    % Write the node reference (= pdf destination for pdftex).
+    % Again, see comments in \chapmacro.
+    \donoderef{#3}%
     %
-    \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
-          \hangindent = \wd0 % zero if no section number
-          \unhbox0 #3}%
+    % Interline glue will be inserted when the vbox is completed.
+    % That glue will be a valid breakpoint for the page, since it'll be
+    % preceded by a whatsit (usually from the \donoderef, or from the
+    % \writetocentry if there was no node).  We don't want to allow that
+    % break, since then the whatsits could end up on page n while the
+    % section is on page n+1, thus toc/etc. are wrong.  Debian bug 276000.
+    \nobreak
+    %
+    % Output the actual section heading.
+    \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \ptexraggedright
+          \hangindent=\wd0  % zero if no section number
+          \unhbox0 #1}%
   }%
-  \ifdim\parskip<10pt \nobreak\kern10pt\nobreak\kern-\parskip\fi \nobreak
+  % Add extra space after the heading -- half of whatever came above it.
+  % Don't allow stretch, though.
+  \kern .5 \csname #2headingskip\endcsname
+  %
+  % Do not let the kern be a potential breakpoint, as it would be if it
+  % was followed by glue.
+  \nobreak
+  %
+  % We'll almost certainly start a paragraph next, so don't let that
+  % glue accumulate.  (Not a breakpoint because it's preceded by a
+  % discardable item.)  However, when a paragraph is not started next
+  % (\startdefun, \cartouche, \center, etc.), this needs to be wiped out
+  % or the negative glue will cause weirdly wrong output, typically
+  % obscuring the section heading with something else.
+  \vskip-\parskip
+  %
+  % This is so the last item on the main vertical list is a known
+  % \penalty > 10000, so \startdefun, etc., can recognize the situation
+  % and do the needful.
+  \penalty 10001
 }
 
 
@@ -3754,161 +5957,238 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
 \newwrite\tocfile
 
 % Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary.
-% Called from @chapter, etc.  We supply {\folio} at the end of the
-% argument, which will end up as the last argument to the \...entry macro.
+% Called from @chapter, etc.
 %
-% We open the .toc file here instead of at @setfilename or any other
-% given time so that @contents can be put in the document anywhere.
+% Example usage: \writetocentry{sec}{Section Name}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}
+% We append the current node name (if any) and page number as additional
+% arguments for the \{chap,sec,...}entry macros which will eventually
+% read this.  The node name is used in the pdf outlines as the
+% destination to jump to.
+%
+% We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or
+% any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document.
+% But if #1 is `omit', then we don't do anything.  This is used for the
+% table of contents chapter openings themselves.
 %
 \newif\iftocfileopened
-\def\writetocentry#1{%
-  \iftocfileopened\else
-    \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc
-    \global\tocfileopenedtrue
+\def\omitkeyword{omit}%
+%
+\def\writetocentry#1#2#3{%
+  \edef\writetoctype{#1}%
+  \ifx\writetoctype\omitkeyword \else
+    \iftocfileopened\else
+      \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc
+      \global\tocfileopenedtrue
+    \fi
+    %
+    \iflinks
+      {\atdummies
+       \edef\temp{%
+         \write\tocfile{@#1entry{#2}{#3}{\lastnode}{\noexpand\folio}}}%
+       \temp
+      }%
+    \fi
   \fi
-  \iflinks \write\tocfile{#1{\folio}}\fi
+  %
+  % Tell \shipout to create a pdf destination on each page, if we're
+  % writing pdf.  These are used in the table of contents.  We can't
+  % just write one on every page because the title pages are numbered
+  % 1 and 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first
+  % two pages of the document.  Thus, we'd have two destinations named
+  % `1', and two named `2'.
+  \ifpdf \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi
+}
+
+
+% These characters do not print properly in the Computer Modern roman
+% fonts, so we must take special care.  This is more or less redundant
+% with the Texinfo input format setup at the end of this file.
+%
+\def\activecatcodes{%
+  \catcode`\"=\active
+  \catcode`\$=\active
+  \catcode`\<=\active
+  \catcode`\>=\active
+  \catcode`\\=\active
+  \catcode`\^=\active
+  \catcode`\_=\active
+  \catcode`\|=\active
+  \catcode`\~=\active
+}
+
+
+% Read the toc file, which is essentially Texinfo input.
+\def\readtocfile{%
+  \setupdatafile
+  \activecatcodes
+  \input \tocreadfilename
 }
 
 \newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in
 \newcount\savepageno
 \newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1
 
-% Finish up the main text and prepare to read what we've written
-% to \tocfile.
+% Prepare to read what we've written to \tocfile.
 %
 \def\startcontents#1{%
-   % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should
-   % start on an odd page, unlike chapters.  Thus, we maintain
-   % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro.
-   % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se>
-   \contentsalignmacro
-   \immediate\closeout\tocfile
-   %
-   % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline.
-   % It is abundantly clear what they are.
-   \unnumbchapmacro{#1}\def\thischapter{}%
-   \savepageno = \pageno
-   \begingroup                  % Set up to handle contents files properly.
-      \catcode`\\=0  \catcode`\{=1  \catcode`\}=2  \catcode`\@=11
-      % We can't do this, because then an actual ^ in a section
-      % title fails, e.g., @chapter ^ -- exponentiation.  --karl, 9jul97.
-      %\catcode`\^=7 % to see ^^e4 as \"a etc. juha@piuha.ydi.vtt.fi
-      \raggedbottom             % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom.
-      \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length.
-      %
-      % Roman numerals for page numbers.
-      \ifnum \pageno>0 \pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi
+  % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should
+  % start on an odd page, unlike chapters.  Thus, we maintain
+  % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro.
+  % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se>
+  \contentsalignmacro
+  \immediate\closeout\tocfile
+  %
+  % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline.
+  % It is abundantly clear what they are.
+  \chapmacro{#1}{Yomitfromtoc}{}%
+  %
+  \savepageno = \pageno
+  \begingroup                  % Set up to handle contents files properly.
+    \raggedbottom              % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom.
+    \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length.
+    %
+    % Roman numerals for page numbers.
+    \ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi
 }
 
+% redefined for the two-volume lispref.  We always output on
+% \jobname.toc even if this is redefined.
+%
+\def\tocreadfilename{\jobname.toc}
 
 % Normal (long) toc.
+%
 \def\contents{%
-   \startcontents{\putwordTOC}%
-     \openin 1 \jobname.toc
-     \ifeof 1 \else
-       \closein 1
-       \input \jobname.toc
-     \fi
-     \vfill \eject
-     \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
-     \pdfmakeoutlines
-   \endgroup
-   \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
-   \pageno = \savepageno
+  \startcontents{\putwordTOC}%
+    \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space
+    \ifeof 1 \else
+      \readtocfile
+    \fi
+    \vfill \eject
+    \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
+    \ifeof 1 \else
+      \pdfmakeoutlines
+    \fi
+    \closein 1
+  \endgroup
+  \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
+  \global\pageno = \savepageno
 }
 
 % And just the chapters.
 \def\summarycontents{%
-   \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}%
-      %
-      \let\chapentry = \shortchapentry
-      \let\unnumbchapentry = \shortunnumberedentry
-      % We want a true roman here for the page numbers.
-      \secfonts
-      \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf \let\sl=\shortcontsl
-      \rm
-      \hyphenpenalty = 10000
-      \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little.
-      \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{}
-      \def\unnumbsecentry ##1##2{}
-      \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{}
-      \def\unnumbsubsecentry ##1##2{}
-      \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{}
-      \def\unnumbsubsubsecentry ##1##2{}
-      \openin 1 \jobname.toc
-      \ifeof 1 \else
-        \closein 1
-        \input \jobname.toc
-      \fi
-     \vfill \eject
-     \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
-   \endgroup
-   \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
-   \pageno = \savepageno
+  \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}%
+    %
+    \let\partentry = \shortpartentry
+    \let\numchapentry = \shortchapentry
+    \let\appentry = \shortchapentry
+    \let\unnchapentry = \shortunnchapentry
+    % We want a true roman here for the page numbers.
+    \secfonts
+    \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf
+    \let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt
+    \rm
+    \hyphenpenalty = 10000
+    \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little.
+    \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{}
+    \let\appsecentry = \numsecentry
+    \let\unnsecentry = \numsecentry
+    \let\numsubsecentry = \numsecentry
+    \let\appsubsecentry = \numsecentry
+    \let\unnsubsecentry = \numsecentry
+    \let\numsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
+    \let\appsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
+    \let\unnsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
+    \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space
+    \ifeof 1 \else
+      \readtocfile
+    \fi
+    \closein 1
+    \vfill \eject
+    \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
+  \endgroup
+  \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
+  \global\pageno = \savepageno
 }
 \let\shortcontents = \summarycontents
 
-\ifpdf
-  \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines}%
-\fi
+% Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents.
+% The arg is, e.g., `A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter.
+%
+\def\shortchaplabel#1{%
+  % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the
+  % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts.
+  % But use \hss just in case.
+  % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after
+  % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.)
+  %
+  % We'd like to right-justify chapter numbers, but that looks strange
+  % with appendix letters.  And right-justifying numbers and
+  % left-justifying letters looks strange when there is less than 10
+  % chapters.  Have to read the whole toc once to know how many chapters
+  % there are before deciding ...
+  \hbox to 1em{#1\hss}%
+}
 
 % These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents.
 % The first argument is the chapter or section name.
 % The last argument is the page number.
 % The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ...
 
-% Chapter-level things, for both the long and short contents.
-\def\chapentry#1#2#3{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#3}}
+% Parts, in the main contents.  Replace the part number, which doesn't
+% exist, with an empty box.  Let's hope all the numbers have the same width.
+% Also ignore the page number, which is conventionally not printed.
+\def\numeralbox{\setbox0=\hbox{8}\hbox to \wd0{\hfil}}
+\def\partentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\numeralbox\labelspace#1}{}}
+%
+% Parts, in the short toc.
+\def\shortpartentry#1#2#3#4{%
+  \penalty-300
+  \vskip.5\baselineskip plus.15\baselineskip minus.1\baselineskip
+  \shortchapentry{{\bf #1}}{\numeralbox}{}{}%
+}
 
-% See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings
-\def\shortchapentry#1#2#3{%
-  \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#3\egroup}%
+% Chapters, in the main contents.
+\def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
+%
+% Chapters, in the short toc.
+% See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings.
+\def\shortchapentry#1#2#3#4{%
+  \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}%
 }
 
-% Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents.
-% The arg is, e.g. `Appendix A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter.
-% We could simplify the code here by writing out an \appendixentry
-% command in the toc file for appendices, instead of using \chapentry
-% for both, but it doesn't seem worth it.
+% Appendices, in the main contents.
+% Need the word Appendix, and a fixed-size box.
 %
-\newdimen\shortappendixwidth
+\def\appendixbox#1{%
+  % We use M since it's probably the widest letter.
+  \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} M}%
+  \hbox to \wd0{\putwordAppendix{} #1\hss}}
 %
-\def\shortchaplabel#1{%
-  % Compute width of word "Appendix", may change with language.
-  \setbox0 = \hbox{\shortcontrm \putwordAppendix}%
-  \shortappendixwidth = \wd0
-  %
-  % We typeset #1 in a box of constant width, regardless of the text of
-  % #1, so the chapter titles will come out aligned.
-  \setbox0 = \hbox{#1}%
-  \dimen0 = \ifdim\wd0 > \shortappendixwidth \shortappendixwidth \else 0pt \fi
-  %
-  % This space should be plenty, since a single number is .5em, and the
-  % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts.
-  % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after
-  % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.)
-  \advance\dimen0 by 1.1em
-  \hbox to \dimen0{#1\hfil}%
-}
+\def\appentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\appendixbox{#2}\labelspace#1}{#4}}
 
-\def\unnumbchapentry#1#2{\dochapentry{#1}{#2}}
-\def\shortunnumberedentry#1#2{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#2\egroup}}
+% Unnumbered chapters.
+\def\unnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#1}{#4}}
+\def\shortunnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}}
 
 % Sections.
-\def\secentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2.#3\labelspace#1}{#4}}
-\def\unnumbsecentry#1#2{\dosecentry{#1}{#2}}
+\def\numsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
+\let\appsecentry=\numsecentry
+\def\unnsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}}
 
 % Subsections.
-\def\subsecentry#1#2#3#4#5{\dosubsecentry{#2.#3.#4\labelspace#1}{#5}}
-\def\unnumbsubsecentry#1#2{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#2}}
+\def\numsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
+\let\appsubsecentry=\numsubsecentry
+\def\unnsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
 
 % And subsubsections.
-\def\subsubsecentry#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
-  \dosubsubsecentry{#2.#3.#4.#5\labelspace#1}{#6}}
-\def\unnumbsubsubsecentry#1#2{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#2}}
+\def\numsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
+\let\appsubsubsecentry=\numsubsubsecentry
+\def\unnsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
 
 % This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels.
-\newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 3pc
+% Same as \defaultparindent.
+\newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 15pt
 
 % Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the
 % page number.
@@ -3939,17 +6219,8 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
   \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
 \endgroup}
 
-% Final typesetting of a toc entry; we use the same \entry macro as for
-% the index entries, but we want to suppress hyphenation here.  (We
-% can't do that in the \entry macro, since index entries might consist
-% of hyphenated-identifiers-that-do-not-fit-on-a-line-and-nothing-else.)
-\def\tocentry#1#2{\begingroup
-  \vskip 0pt plus1pt % allow a little stretch for the sake of nice page breaks
-  % Do not use \turnoffactive in these arguments.  Since the toc is
-  % typeset in cmr, so characters such as _ would come out wrong; we
-  % have to do the usual translation tricks.
-  \entry{#1}{#2}%
-\endgroup}
+% We use the same \entry macro as for the index entries.
+\let\tocentry = \entry
 
 % Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title.
 \def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax}
@@ -3959,74 +6230,36 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
 
 \def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm}
 \def\secentryfonts{\textfonts}
-\let\subsecentryfonts = \textfonts
-\let\subsubsecentryfonts = \textfonts
+\def\subsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
+\def\subsubsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
 
 
 \message{environments,}
 % @foo ... @end foo.
 
-% Since these characters are used in examples, it should be an even number of
-% \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em.
-% Furthermore, these definitions must come after we define our fonts.
-\newbox\dblarrowbox    \newbox\longdblarrowbox
-\newbox\pushcharbox    \newbox\bullbox
-\newbox\equivbox       \newbox\errorbox
-
-%{\tentt
-%\global\setbox\dblarrowbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}
-%\global\setbox\longdblarrowbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}
-%\global\setbox\pushcharbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}
-%\global\setbox\equivbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}
-% Adapted from the manmac format (p.420 of TeXbook)
-%\global\setbox\bullbox = \hbox to 1em{\kern.15em\vrule height .75ex width .85ex
-%                                      depth .1ex\hfil}
-%}
-
-% @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}.
-\def\point{$\star$}
-\def\result{\leavevmode\raise.15ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}}
-\def\expansion{\leavevmode\raise.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}}
-\def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}}
-\def\equiv{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}}
-
-% Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit.
-{\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box.
-\dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules
-% The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.)
-\setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \tensf error\kern-1.5pt}
-
-\global\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil
-   \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right.
-   \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules.
-   \vbox{
-      \hrule height\dimen2
-      \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt          % Space to left of text.
-         \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below.
-         \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right.
-      \hrule height\dimen2}
-    \hfil}
-
-% The @error{} command.
-\def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox}
-
-% @tex ... @end tex    escapes into raw Tex temporarily.
+% @tex ... @end tex    escapes into raw TeX temporarily.
 % One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works.
-% But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character.
+% But \@ or @@ will get a plain @ character.
 
-\def\tex{\begingroup
+\envdef\tex{%
+  \setupmarkupstyle{tex}%
   \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2
   \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6
-  \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=13 \let~=\tie
+  \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie
   \catcode `\%=14
-  \catcode 43=12 % plus
-  \catcode`\"=12
-  \catcode`\==12
-  \catcode`\|=12
-  \catcode`\<=12
-  \catcode`\>=12
+  \catcode `\+=\other
+  \catcode `\"=\other
+  \catcode `\|=\other
+  \catcode `\<=\other
+  \catcode `\>=\other
+  \catcode`\`=\other
+  \catcode`\'=\other
   \escapechar=`\\
   %
+  % ' is active in math mode (mathcode"8000).  So reset it, and all our
+  % other math active characters (just in case), to plain's definitions.
+  \mathactive
+  %
   \let\b=\ptexb
   \let\bullet=\ptexbullet
   \let\c=\ptexc
@@ -4036,20 +6269,26 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
   \let\equiv=\ptexequiv
   \let\!=\ptexexclam
   \let\i=\ptexi
+  \let\indent=\ptexindent
+  \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent
   \let\{=\ptexlbrace
   \let\+=\tabalign
   \let\}=\ptexrbrace
+  \let\/=\ptexslash
   \let\*=\ptexstar
   \let\t=\ptext
+  \expandafter \let\csname top\endcsname=\ptextop  % outer
+  \let\frenchspacing=\plainfrenchspacing
   %
   \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}%
   \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}%
   \def\@{@}%
-\let\Etex=\endgroup}
+}
+% There is no need to define \Etex.
 
-% Define @lisp ... @endlisp.
-% @lisp does a \begingroup so it can rebind things,
-% including the definition of @endlisp (which normally is erroneous).
+% Define @lisp ... @end lisp.
+% @lisp environment forms a group so it can rebind things,
+% including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous).
 
 % Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp.
 \newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in
@@ -4059,34 +6298,34 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
 % have any width.
 \def\lisppar{\null\endgraf}
 
-% Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword
-% space in the output.  Don't allow a line break at this space, as this
-% is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input
-% should produce a line of output anyway.
-%
-{\obeyspaces %
-\gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}}
-
-% Define \obeyedspace to be our active space, whatever it is.  This is
-% for use in \parsearg.
-{\sepspaces%
-\global\let\obeyedspace= }
-
 % This space is always present above and below environments.
 \newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt
 
 % Make spacing and below environment symmetrical.  We use \parskip here
 % to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip
 % is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the
-% start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip
-%
-\def\aboveenvbreak{{\advance\envskipamount by \parskip
-\endgraf \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount
-\removelastskip \penalty-50 \vskip\envskipamount \fi}}
+% start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip.
+%
+\def\aboveenvbreak{{%
+  % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and
+  % \sectionheading, q.v.
+  \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else
+    \advance\envskipamount by \parskip
+    \endgraf
+    \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount
+      \removelastskip
+      % it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak
+      % or better ...
+      \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \penalty-50 \fi
+      \vskip\envskipamount
+    \fi
+  \fi
+}}
 
 \let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak
 
-% \nonarrowing is a flag.  If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins.
+% \nonarrowing is a flag.  If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins; it will
+% also clear it, so that its embedded environments do the narrowing again.
 \let\nonarrowing=\relax
 
 % @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around
@@ -4110,738 +6349,843 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
 %
 \newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip
 
-\long\def\cartouche{%
-\begingroup
-        \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip
-        \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt %we want these *outside*.
-        \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip
-                          \advance\cartinner by-\rskip
-        \cartouter=\hsize
-        \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either
-%                                    side, and for 6pt waste from
-%                                    each corner char, and rule thickness
-        \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip
-        % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin.
-        \let\nonarrowing=\comment
-        \vbox\bgroup
-                \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt
-                \carttop
-                \hbox\bgroup
-                        \hskip\lskip
-                        \vrule\kern3pt
-                        \vbox\bgroup
-                                \hsize=\cartinner
-                                \kern3pt
-                                \begingroup
-                                        \baselineskip=\normbskip
-                                        \lineskip=\normlskip
-                                        \parskip=\normpskip
-                                        \vskip -\parskip
+\envdef\cartouche{%
+  \ifhmode\par\fi  % can't be in the midst of a paragraph.
+  \startsavinginserts
+  \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip
+  \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt % we want these *outside*.
+  \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip
+  \advance\cartinner by-\rskip
+  \cartouter=\hsize
+  \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt	% allow for 3pt kerns on either
+				% side, and for 6pt waste from
+				% each corner char, and rule thickness
+  \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip
+  % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin.
+  \let\nonarrowing = t%
+  %
+  % If this cartouche directly follows a sectioning command, we need the
+  % \parskip glue (backspaced over by default) or the cartouche can
+  % collide with the section heading.
+  \ifnum\lastpenalty>10000 \vskip\parskip \penalty\lastpenalty \fi
+  %
+  \vbox\bgroup
+      \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt
+      \carttop
+      \hbox\bgroup
+	  \hskip\lskip
+	  \vrule\kern3pt
+	  \vbox\bgroup
+	      \kern3pt
+	      \hsize=\cartinner
+	      \baselineskip=\normbskip
+	      \lineskip=\normlskip
+	      \parskip=\normpskip
+	      \vskip -\parskip
+	      \comment % For explanation, see the end of def\group.
+}
 \def\Ecartouche{%
-                                \endgroup
-                                \kern3pt
-                        \egroup
-                        \kern3pt\vrule
-                        \hskip\rskip
-                \egroup
-                \cartbot
-        \egroup
-\endgroup
-}}
+              \ifhmode\par\fi
+	      \kern3pt
+	  \egroup
+	  \kern3pt\vrule
+	  \hskip\rskip
+      \egroup
+      \cartbot
+  \egroup
+  \checkinserts
+}
 
 
 % This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants,
 % inside a group.
+\newdimen\nonfillparindent
 \def\nonfillstart{%
   \aboveenvbreak
-  \inENV % This group ends at the end of the body
   \hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy
   \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens.
-  \singlespace
   \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines
   \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output
   \parskip = 0pt
+  % Turn off paragraph indentation but redefine \indent to emulate
+  % the normal \indent.
+  \nonfillparindent=\parindent
   \parindent = 0pt
+  \let\indent\nonfillindent
+  %
   \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes
-  % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing
-  % at next level down.
   \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
     \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing
     \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing
-    \let\exdent=\nofillexdent
-    \let\nonarrowing=\relax
+  \else
+    \let\nonarrowing = \relax
   \fi
+  \let\exdent=\nofillexdent
 }
 
-% Define the \E... control sequence only if we are inside the particular
-% environment, so the error checking in \end will work.
-%
-% To end an @example-like environment, we first end the paragraph (via
-% \afterenvbreak's vertical glue), and then the group.  That way we keep
-% the zero \parskip that the environments set -- \parskip glue will be
-% inserted at the beginning of the next paragraph in the document, after
-% the environment.
-%
-\def\nonfillfinish{\afterenvbreak\endgroup}
-
-% @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font.
-\def\lisp{\begingroup
-  \nonfillstart
-  \let\Elisp = \nonfillfinish
-  \tt
-  \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special.
-  \gobble       % eat return
+\begingroup
+\obeyspaces
+% We want to swallow spaces (but not other tokens) after the fake
+% @indent in our nonfill-environments, where spaces are normally
+% active and set to @tie, resulting in them not being ignored after
+% @indent.
+\gdef\nonfillindent{\futurelet\temp\nonfillindentcheck}%
+\gdef\nonfillindentcheck{%
+\ifx\temp %
+\expandafter\nonfillindentgobble%
+\else%
+\leavevmode\nonfillindentbox%
+\fi%
+}%
+\endgroup
+\def\nonfillindentgobble#1{\nonfillindent}
+\def\nonfillindentbox{\hbox to \nonfillparindent{\hss}}
+
+% If you want all examples etc. small: @set dispenvsize small.
+% If you want even small examples the full size: @set dispenvsize nosmall.
+% This affects the following displayed environments:
+%    @example, @display, @format, @lisp
+%
+\def\smallword{small}
+\def\nosmallword{nosmall}
+\let\SETdispenvsize\relax
+\def\setnormaldispenv{%
+  \ifx\SETdispenvsize\smallword
+    % end paragraph for sake of leading, in case document has no blank
+    % line.  This is redundant with what happens in \aboveenvbreak, but
+    % we need to do it before changing the fonts, and it's inconvenient
+    % to change the fonts afterward.
+    \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi
+    \smallexamplefonts \rm
+  \fi
+}
+\def\setsmalldispenv{%
+  \ifx\SETdispenvsize\nosmallword
+  \else
+    \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi
+    \smallexamplefonts \rm
+  \fi
 }
 
-% @example: Same as @lisp.
-\def\example{\begingroup \def\Eexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
+% We often define two environments, @foo and @smallfoo.
+% Let's do it in one command.  #1 is the env name, #2 the definition.
+\def\makedispenvdef#1#2{%
+  \expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2}%
+  \expandafter\envdef\csname small#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2}%
+  \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
+  \expandafter\let\csname Esmall#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
+}
 
-% @small... is usually equivalent to the non-small (@smallbook
-% redefines).  We must call \example (or whatever) last in the
-% definition, since it reads the return following the @example (or
-% whatever) command.
+% Define two environment synonyms (#1 and #2) for an environment.
+\def\maketwodispenvdef#1#2#3{%
+  \makedispenvdef{#1}{#3}%
+  \makedispenvdef{#2}{#3}%
+}
 %
-% This actually allows (for example) @end display inside an
-% @smalldisplay.  Too bad, but makeinfo will catch the error anyway.
+% @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font;
+% @example: same as @lisp.
 %
-\def\smalldisplay{\begingroup\def\Esmalldisplay{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\display}
-\def\smallexample{\begingroup\def\Esmallexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
-\def\smallformat{\begingroup\def\Esmallformat{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\format}
-\def\smalllisp{\begingroup\def\Esmalllisp{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
-
-% Real @smallexample and @smalllisp (when @smallbook): use smaller fonts.
+% @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts.
 % Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox.
-\def\smalllispx{\begingroup
-  \def\Esmalllisp{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
-  \def\Esmallexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
-  \smallfonts
-  \lisp
+%
+\maketwodispenvdef{lisp}{example}{%
+  \nonfillstart
+  \tt\setupmarkupstyle{example}%
+  \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special.
+  \gobble % eat return
 }
-
-% @display: same as @lisp except keep current font.
+% @display/@smalldisplay: same as @lisp except keep current font.
 %
-\def\display{\begingroup
+\makedispenvdef{display}{%
   \nonfillstart
-  \let\Edisplay = \nonfillfinish
   \gobble
 }
 
-% @smalldisplay (when @smallbook): @display plus smaller fonts.
+% @format/@smallformat: same as @display except don't narrow margins.
 %
-\def\smalldisplayx{\begingroup
-  \def\Esmalldisplay{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
-  \smallfonts \rm
-  \display
+\makedispenvdef{format}{%
+  \let\nonarrowing = t%
+  \nonfillstart
+  \gobble
 }
 
-% @format: same as @display except don't narrow margins.
-%
-\def\format{\begingroup
-  \let\nonarrowing = t
+% @flushleft: same as @format, but doesn't obey \SETdispenvsize.
+\envdef\flushleft{%
+  \let\nonarrowing = t%
   \nonfillstart
-  \let\Eformat = \nonfillfinish
   \gobble
 }
+\let\Eflushleft = \afterenvbreak
 
-% @smallformat (when @smallbook): @format plus smaller fonts.
+% @flushright.
 %
-\def\smallformatx{\begingroup
-  \def\Esmallformat{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
-  \smallfonts \rm
-  \format
+\envdef\flushright{%
+  \let\nonarrowing = t%
+  \nonfillstart
+  \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill\relax
+  \gobble
+}
+\let\Eflushright = \afterenvbreak
+
+
+% @raggedright does more-or-less normal line breaking but no right
+% justification.  From plain.tex.
+\envdef\raggedright{%
+  \rightskip0pt plus2em \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em\relax
 }
+\let\Eraggedright\par
 
-% @flushleft (same as @format).
+\envdef\raggedleft{%
+  \parindent=0pt \leftskip0pt plus2em
+  \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em \parfillskip=0pt
+  \hbadness=10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off
+                  % badness reporting.
+}
+\let\Eraggedleft\par
+
+\envdef\raggedcenter{%
+  \parindent=0pt \rightskip0pt plus1em \leftskip0pt plus1em
+  \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em \parfillskip=0pt
+  \hbadness=10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off
+                  % badness reporting.
+}
+\let\Eraggedcenter\par
+
+
+% @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart)
+% and narrows the margins.  We keep \parskip nonzero in general, since
+% we're doing normal filling.  So, when using \aboveenvbreak and
+% \afterenvbreak, temporarily make \parskip 0.
 %
-\def\flushleft{\begingroup \def\Eflushleft{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\format}
+\makedispenvdef{quotation}{\quotationstart}
+%
+\def\quotationstart{%
+  \indentedblockstart % same as \indentedblock, but increase right margin too.
+  \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
+    \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing
+  \fi
+  \parsearg\quotationlabel
+}
 
-% @flushright.
+% We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're
+% doing normal filling.
 %
-\def\flushright{\begingroup
-  \let\nonarrowing = t
-  \nonfillstart
-  \let\Eflushright = \nonfillfinish
-  \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill
-  \gobble
+\def\Equotation{%
+  \par
+  \ifx\quotationauthor\thisisundefined\else
+    % indent a bit.
+    \leftline{\kern 2\leftskip \sl ---\quotationauthor}%
+  \fi
+  {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}%
 }
+\def\Esmallquotation{\Equotation}
 
-% @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart)
-% and narrows the margins.
+% If we're given an argument, typeset it in bold with a colon after.
+\def\quotationlabel#1{%
+  \def\temp{#1}%
+  \ifx\temp\empty \else
+    {\bf #1: }%
+  \fi
+}
+
+% @indentedblock is like @quotation, but indents only on the left and
+% has no optional argument.
+% 
+\makedispenvdef{indentedblock}{\indentedblockstart}
 %
-\def\quotation{%
-  \begingroup\inENV %This group ends at the end of the @quotation body
+\def\indentedblockstart{%
   {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip
-  \singlespace
   \parindent=0pt
-  % We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're
-  % doing normal filling. So to avoid extra space below the environment...
-  \def\Equotation{\parskip = 0pt \nonfillfinish}%
   %
   % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down.
   \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
     \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing
-    \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing
     \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing
+  \else
     \let\nonarrowing = \relax
   \fi
 }
 
+% Keep a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're doing normal filling.
+%
+\def\Eindentedblock{%
+  \par
+  {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}%
+}
+\def\Esmallindentedblock{\Eindentedblock}
 
-\message{defuns,}
-% @defun etc.
-
-% Allow user to change definition object font (\df) internally
-\def\setdeffont #1 {\csname DEF#1\endcsname}
 
-\newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in
-\newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt
-\newskip\deftypemargin \deftypemargin=12pt
-\newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt
+% LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>}
+% If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter,
+% we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg:
+% `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command.  --janneke@gnu.org
+%
+% [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996.  The TeXbook.
+%
+% [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets
+% active too.  Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a
+% verbatim line.
+\def\dospecials{%
+  \do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&%
+  \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~%
+  \do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"%
+  % Don't do the quotes -- if we do, @set txicodequoteundirected and
+  % @set txicodequotebacktick will not have effect on @verb and
+  % @verbatim, and ?` and !` ligatures won't get disabled.
+  %\do\`\do\'%
+}
+%
+% [Knuth] p. 380
+\def\uncatcodespecials{%
+  \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=\other}\dospecials}
+%
+% Setup for the @verb command.
+%
+% Eight spaces for a tab
+\begingroup
+  \catcode`\^^I=\active
+  \gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }}
+\endgroup
+%
+\def\setupverb{%
+  \tt  % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
+  \def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}%
+  \setupmarkupstyle{verb}%
+  \tabeightspaces
+  % Respect line breaks,
+  % print special symbols as themselves, and
+  % make each space count
+  % must do in this order:
+  \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
+}
 
-\newcount\parencount
-% define \functionparens, which makes ( and ) and & do special things.
-% \functionparens affects the group it is contained in.
-\def\activeparens{%
-\catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active \catcode`\&=\active
-\catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active}
+% Setup for the @verbatim environment
+%
+% Real tab expansion.
+\newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount
+%
+% We typeset each line of the verbatim in an \hbox, so we can handle
+% tabs.  The \global is in case the verbatim line starts with an accent,
+% or some other command that starts with a begin-group.  Otherwise, the
+% entire \verbbox would disappear at the corresponding end-group, before
+% it is typeset.  Meanwhile, we can't have nested verbatim commands
+% (can we?), so the \global won't be overwriting itself.
+\newbox\verbbox
+\def\starttabbox{\global\setbox\verbbox=\hbox\bgroup}
+%
+\begingroup
+  \catcode`\^^I=\active
+  \gdef\tabexpand{%
+    \catcode`\^^I=\active
+    \def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup
+      \dimen\verbbox=\wd\verbbox % the width so far, or since the previous tab
+      \divide\dimen\verbbox by\tabw
+      \multiply\dimen\verbbox by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw
+      \advance\dimen\verbbox by\tabw  % advance to next multiple of \tabw
+      \wd\verbbox=\dimen\verbbox \box\verbbox \starttabbox
+    }%
+  }
+\endgroup
 
-% Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars.
-\let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = )
+% start the verbatim environment.
+\def\setupverbatim{%
+  \let\nonarrowing = t%
+  \nonfillstart
+  \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
+  % The \leavevmode here is for blank lines.  Otherwise, we would
+  % never \starttabox and the \egroup would end verbatim mode.
+  \def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box\verbbox\endgraf}%
+  \tabexpand
+  \setupmarkupstyle{verbatim}%
+  % Respect line breaks,
+  % print special symbols as themselves, and
+  % make each space count.
+  % Must do in this order:
+  \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
+  \everypar{\starttabbox}%
+}
+
+% Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique
+% delimiter characters.  Before first delimiter expect a
+% right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace:
+%
+%    \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1}
+%
+% [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {}
+\begingroup
+  \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=\other\catcode`\}=\other
+  \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next]
+\endgroup
+%
+\def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb}
+%
+%
+% Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that
+% the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie:
+%
+%     \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1}
+%
+% For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX,
+% because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}':
+% we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'.
+%
+% Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx]
+%
+\begingroup
+  \catcode`\ =\active
+  \obeylines %
+  % ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end
+  % of the @verbatim input line itself.  Otherwise we get an extra blank
+  % line in the output.
+  \xdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{#2\noexpand\end\gobble verbatim}%
+  % We really want {...\end verbatim} in the body of the macro, but
+  % without the active space; thus we have to use \xdef and \gobble.
+\endgroup
+%
+\envdef\verbatim{%
+    \setupverbatim\doverbatim
+}
+\let\Everbatim = \afterenvbreak
 
-{\activeparens % Now, smart parens don't turn on until &foo (see \amprm)
 
-% Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc.  For example,
-% if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet,
-% so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence.
-\global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen
-\global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack
-
-\gdef\functionparens{\boldbrax\let&=\amprm\parencount=0 }
-\gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb}
-% This is used to turn on special parens
-% but make & act ordinary (given that it's active).
-\gdef\boldbraxnoamp{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb\let&=\ampnr}
-
-% Definitions of (, ) and & used in args for functions.
-% This is the definition of ( outside of all parentheses.
-\gdef\oprm#1 {{\rm\char`\(}#1 \bf \let(=\opnested
-  \global\advance\parencount by 1
+% @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment.
+%
+\def\verbatiminclude{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\doverbatiminclude}
+%
+\def\doverbatiminclude#1{%
+  {%
+    \makevalueexpandable
+    \setupverbatim
+    \indexnofonts       % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names.
+    \wlog{texinfo.tex: doing @verbatiminclude of #1^^J}%
+    \input #1
+    \afterenvbreak
+  }%
 }
+
+% @copying ... @end copying.
+% Save the text away for @insertcopying later.
 %
-% This is the definition of ( when already inside a level of parens.
-\gdef\opnested{\char`\(\global\advance\parencount by 1 }
+% We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box.
+% Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the
+% typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done
+% beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source
+% file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as
+% possible is very desirable.
 %
-\gdef\clrm{% Print a paren in roman if it is taking us back to depth of 0.
-  % also in that case restore the outer-level definition of (.
-  \ifnum \parencount=1 {\rm \char `\)}\sl \let(=\oprm \else \char `\) \fi
-  \global\advance \parencount by -1 }
-% If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards
-\gdef\amprm#1 {{\rm\&#1}\let(=\oprm \let)=\clrm\ }
-%
-\gdef\normalparens{\boldbrax\let&=\ampnr}
-} % End of definition inside \activeparens
-%% These parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than the
-%% contained text.  This is especially needed for [ and ]
-\def\opnr{{\sf\char`\(}\global\advance\parencount by 1 }
-\def\clnr{{\sf\char`\)}\global\advance\parencount by -1 }
-\let\ampnr = \&
-\def\lbrb{{\bf\char`\[}}
-\def\rbrb{{\bf\char`\]}}
-
-% Active &'s sneak into the index arguments, so make sure it's defined.
-{
-  \catcode`& = 13
-  \global\let& = \ampnr
-}
-
-% First, defname, which formats the header line itself.
-% #1 should be the function name.
-% #2 should be the type of definition, such as "Function".
-
-\def\defname #1#2{%
-% Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were
-% outside the @def...
-\dimen2=\leftskip
-\advance\dimen2 by -\defbodyindent
-\noindent
-\setbox0=\hbox{\hskip \deflastargmargin{\rm #2}\hskip \deftypemargin}%
-\dimen0=\hsize \advance \dimen0 by -\wd0 % compute size for first line
-\dimen1=\hsize \advance \dimen1 by -\defargsindent %size for continuations
-\parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen1
-% Now output arg 2 ("Function" or some such)
-% ending at \deftypemargin from the right margin,
-% but stuck inside a box of width 0 so it does not interfere with linebreaking
-{% Adjust \hsize to exclude the ambient margins,
-% so that \rightline will obey them.
-\advance \hsize by -\dimen2
-\rlap{\rightline{{\rm #2}\hskip -1.25pc }}}%
-% Make all lines underfull and no complaints:
-\tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000
-\advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
-\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
-{\df #1}\enskip        % Generate function name
-}
-
-% Actually process the body of a definition
-% #1 should be the terminating control sequence, such as \Edefun.
-% #2 should be the "another name" control sequence, such as \defunx.
-% #3 should be the control sequence that actually processes the header,
-%    such as \defunheader.
-
-\def\defparsebody #1#2#3{\begingroup\inENV% Environment for definitionbody
-\medbreak %
-% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
-% so that it will exit this group.
-\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
-\def#2{\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit#3}%
-\parindent=0in
-\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
-\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
-\begingroup %
-\catcode 61=\active % 61 is `='
-\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit#3}
-
-% #1 is the \E... control sequence to end the definition (which we define).
-% #2 is the \...x control sequence for consecutive fns (which we define).
-% #3 is the control sequence to call to resume processing.
-% #4, delimited by the space, is the class name.
-%
-\def\defmethparsebody#1#2#3#4 {\begingroup\inENV %
-\medbreak %
-% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
-% so that it will exit this group.
-\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
-\def#2##1 {\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##1}}}%
-\parindent=0in
-\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
-\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
-\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#4}}}
-
-% Used for @deftypemethod and @deftypeivar.
-% #1 is the \E... control sequence to end the definition (which we define).
-% #2 is the \...x control sequence for consecutive fns (which we define).
-% #3 is the control sequence to call to resume processing.
-% #4, delimited by a space, is the class name.
-% #5 is the method's return type.
-%
-\def\deftypemethparsebody#1#2#3#4 #5 {\begingroup\inENV
-  \medbreak
-  \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
-  \def#2##1 ##2 {\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##1}{##2}}}%
-  \parindent=0in
-  \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
-  \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
-  \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#4}{#5}}}
-
-% Used for @deftypeop.  The change from \deftypemethparsebody is an
-% extra argument at the beginning which is the `category', instead of it
-% being the hardwired string `Method' or `Instance Variable'.  We have
-% to account for this both in the \...x definition and in parsing the
-% input at hand.  Thus also need a control sequence (passed as #5) for
-% the \E... definition to assign the category name to.
-% 
-\def\deftypeopparsebody#1#2#3#4#5 #6 {\begingroup\inENV
-  \medbreak
-  \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
-  \def#2##1 ##2 ##3 {%
-    \def#4{##1}%
-    \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##2}{##3}}}%
-  \parindent=0in
-  \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
-  \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
-  \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#5}{#6}}}
-
-\def\defopparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {\begingroup\inENV %
-\medbreak %
-% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
-% so that it will exit this group.
-\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
-\def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}%
-\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##2}}}%
-\parindent=0in
-\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
-\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
-\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#5}}}
-
-% These parsing functions are similar to the preceding ones
-% except that they do not make parens into active characters.
-% These are used for "variables" since they have no arguments.
-
-\def\defvarparsebody #1#2#3{\begingroup\inENV% Environment for definitionbody
-\medbreak %
-% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
-% so that it will exit this group.
-\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
-\def#2{\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit#3}%
-\parindent=0in
-\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
-\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
-\begingroup %
-\catcode 61=\active %
-\obeylines\spacesplit#3}
-
-% This is used for \def{tp,vr}parsebody.  It could probably be used for
-% some of the others, too, with some judicious conditionals.
-%
-\def\parsebodycommon#1#2#3{%
-  \begingroup\inENV %
-  \medbreak %
-  % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
-  % so that it will exit this group.
-  \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
-  \def#2##1 {\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{##1}}}%
+\def\copying{\checkenv{}\begingroup\scanargctxt\docopying}
+\def\docopying#1@end copying{\endgroup\def\copyingtext{#1}}
+%
+\def\insertcopying{%
+  \begingroup
+    \parindent = 0pt  % paragraph indentation looks wrong on title page
+    \scanexp\copyingtext
+  \endgroup
+}
+
+
+\message{defuns,}
+% @defun etc.
+
+\newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in
+\newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt
+\newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt
+\newcount\defunpenalty
+
+% Start the processing of @deffn:
+\def\startdefun{%
+  \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000
+    \medbreak
+    \defunpenalty=10003 % Will keep this @deffn together with the
+                        % following @def command, see below.
+  \else
+    % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak,
+    % which is there to keep the function description together with its
+    % header.  But if there's nothing but headers, we need to allow a
+    % break somewhere.  Check specifically for penalty 10002, inserted
+    % by \printdefunline, instead of 10000, since the sectioning
+    % commands also insert a nobreak penalty, and we don't want to allow
+    % a break between a section heading and a defun.
+    %
+    % As a further refinement, we avoid "club" headers by signalling
+    % with penalty of 10003 after the very first @deffn in the
+    % sequence (see above), and penalty of 10002 after any following
+    % @def command.
+    \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty2000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi
+    %
+    % Similarly, after a section heading, do not allow a break.
+    % But do insert the glue.
+    \medskip  % preceded by discardable penalty, so not a breakpoint
+  \fi
+  %
   \parindent=0in
   \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
   \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
-  \begingroup\obeylines
 }
 
-\def\defvrparsebody#1#2#3#4 {%
-  \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
-  \spacesplit{#3{#4}}%
+\def\dodefunx#1{%
+  % First, check whether we are in the right environment:
+  \checkenv#1%
+  %
+  % As above, allow line break if we have multiple x headers in a row.
+  % It's not a great place, though.
+  \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty3000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi
+  %
+  % And now, it's time to reuse the body of the original defun:
+  \expandafter\gobbledefun#1%
 }
+\def\gobbledefun#1\startdefun{}
 
-% This loses on `@deftp {Data Type} {struct termios}' -- it thinks the
-% type is just `struct', because we lose the braces in `{struct
-% termios}' when \spacesplit reads its undelimited argument.  Sigh.
-% \let\deftpparsebody=\defvrparsebody
+% \printdefunline \deffnheader{text}
 %
-% So, to get around this, we put \empty in with the type name.  That
-% way, TeX won't find exactly `{...}' as an undelimited argument, and
-% won't strip off the braces.
-%
-\def\deftpparsebody #1#2#3#4 {%
-  \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
-  \spacesplit{\parsetpheaderline{#3{#4}}}\empty
+\def\printdefunline#1#2{%
+  \begingroup
+    % call \deffnheader:
+    #1#2 \endheader
+    % common ending:
+    \interlinepenalty = 10000
+    \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil\relax
+    \endgraf
+    \nobreak\vskip -\parskip
+    \penalty\defunpenalty  % signal to \startdefun and \dodefunx
+    % Some of the @defun-type tags do not enable magic parentheses,
+    % rendering the following check redundant.  But we don't optimize.
+    \checkparencounts
+  \endgroup
 }
 
-% Fine, but then we have to eventually remove the \empty *and* the
-% braces (if any).  That's what this does.
+\def\Edefun{\endgraf\medbreak}
+
+% \makedefun{deffn} creates \deffn, \deffnx and \Edeffn;
+% the only thing remaining is to define \deffnheader.
 %
-\def\removeemptybraces\empty#1\relax{#1}
+\def\makedefun#1{%
+  \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname = \Edefun
+  \edef\temp{\noexpand\domakedefun
+    \makecsname{#1}\makecsname{#1x}\makecsname{#1header}}%
+  \temp
+}
 
-% After \spacesplit has done its work, this is called -- #1 is the final
-% thing to call, #2 the type name (which starts with \empty), and #3
-% (which might be empty) the arguments.
+% \domakedefun \deffn \deffnx \deffnheader
 %
-\def\parsetpheaderline#1#2#3{%
-  #1{\removeemptybraces#2\relax}{#3}%
-}%
+% Define \deffn and \deffnx, without parameters.
+% \deffnheader has to be defined explicitly.
+%
+\def\domakedefun#1#2#3{%
+  \envdef#1{%
+    \startdefun
+    \doingtypefnfalse    % distinguish typed functions from all else
+    \parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}%
+  }%
+  \def#2{\dodefunx#1}%
+  \def#3%
+}
 
-\def\defopvarparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {\begingroup\inENV %
-\medbreak %
-% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
-% so that it will exit this group.
-\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
-\def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}%
-\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{##2}}}%
-\parindent=0in
-\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
-\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
-\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{#5}}}
+\newif\ifdoingtypefn       % doing typed function?
+\newif\ifrettypeownline    % typeset return type on its own line?
 
-% Split up #2 at the first space token.
-% call #1 with two arguments:
-%  the first is all of #2 before the space token,
-%  the second is all of #2 after that space token.
-% If #2 contains no space token, all of it is passed as the first arg
-% and the second is passed as empty.
+% @deftypefnnewline on|off says whether the return type of typed functions
+% are printed on their own line.  This affects @deftypefn, @deftypefun,
+% @deftypeop, and @deftypemethod.
+% 
+\parseargdef\deftypefnnewline{%
+  \def\temp{#1}%
+  \ifx\temp\onword
+    \expandafter\let\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname
+      = \empty
+  \else\ifx\temp\offword
+    \expandafter\let\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname
+      = \relax
+  \else
+    \errhelp = \EMsimple
+    \errmessage{Unknown @txideftypefnnl value `\temp',
+                must be on|off}%
+  \fi\fi
+}
 
-{\obeylines
-\gdef\spacesplit#1#2^^M{\endgroup\spacesplitfoo{#1}#2 \relax\spacesplitfoo}%
-\long\gdef\spacesplitfoo#1#2 #3#4\spacesplitfoo{%
-\ifx\relax #3%
-#1{#2}{}\else #1{#2}{#3#4}\fi}}
+% Untyped functions:
 
-% So much for the things common to all kinds of definitions.
+% @deffn category name args
+\makedefun{deffn}{\deffngeneral{}}
 
-% Define @defun.
+% @deffn category class name args
+\makedefun{defop}#1 {\defopon{#1\ \putwordon}}
 
-% First, define the processing that is wanted for arguments of \defun
-% Use this to expand the args and terminate the paragraph they make up
+% \defopon {category on}class name args
+\def\defopon#1#2 {\deffngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
 
-\def\defunargs#1{\functionparens \sl
-% Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars.
-% Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar.
-% Set the font temporarily and use \font in case \setfont made \tensl a macro.
-{\tensl\hyphenchar\font=0}%
-#1%
-{\tensl\hyphenchar\font=45}%
-\ifnum\parencount=0 \else \errmessage{Unbalanced parentheses in @def}\fi%
-\interlinepenalty=10000
-\advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
-\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
+% \deffngeneral {subind}category name args
+%
+\def\deffngeneral#1#2 #3 #4\endheader{%
+  % Remember that \dosubind{fn}{foo}{} is equivalent to \doind{fn}{foo}.
+  \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{#1}%
+  \defname{#2}{}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}%
 }
 
-\def\deftypefunargs #1{%
-% Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars.
-% Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar.
-% Use \boldbraxnoamp, not \functionparens, so that & is not special.
-\boldbraxnoamp
-\tclose{#1}% avoid \code because of side effects on active chars
-\interlinepenalty=10000
-\advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
-\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
-}
+% Typed functions:
 
-% Do complete processing of one @defun or @defunx line already parsed.
+% @deftypefn category type name args
+\makedefun{deftypefn}{\deftypefngeneral{}}
 
-% @deffn Command forward-char nchars
+% @deftypeop category class type name args
+\makedefun{deftypeop}#1 {\deftypeopon{#1\ \putwordon}}
 
-\def\deffn{\defmethparsebody\Edeffn\deffnx\deffnheader}
+% \deftypeopon {category on}class type name args
+\def\deftypeopon#1#2 {\deftypefngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
 
-\def\deffnheader #1#2#3{\doind {fn}{\code{#2}}%
-\begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defunargs{#3}\endgroup %
-\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
+% \deftypefngeneral {subind}category type name args
+%
+\def\deftypefngeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
+  \dosubind{fn}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
+  \doingtypefntrue
+  \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
 }
 
-% @defun == @deffn Function
+% Typed variables:
 
-\def\defun{\defparsebody\Edefun\defunx\defunheader}
+% @deftypevr category type var args
+\makedefun{deftypevr}{\deftypecvgeneral{}}
 
-\def\defunheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
-\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDeffunc}%
-\defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
-\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
-}
-
-% @deftypefun int foobar (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar})
+% @deftypecv category class type var args
+\makedefun{deftypecv}#1 {\deftypecvof{#1\ \putwordof}}
 
-\def\deftypefun{\defparsebody\Edeftypefun\deftypefunx\deftypefunheader}
+% \deftypecvof {category of}class type var args
+\def\deftypecvof#1#2 {\deftypecvgeneral{\putwordof\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
 
-% #1 is the data type.  #2 is the name and args.
-\def\deftypefunheader #1#2{\deftypefunheaderx{#1}#2 \relax}
-% #1 is the data type, #2 the name, #3 the args.
-\def\deftypefunheaderx #1#2 #3\relax{%
-\doind {fn}{\code{#2}}% Make entry in function index
-\begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$$$#2}{\putwordDeftypefun}%
-\deftypefunargs {#3}\endgroup %
-\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
+% \deftypecvgeneral {subind}category type var args
+%
+\def\deftypecvgeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
+  \dosubind{vr}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
+  \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
 }
 
-% @deftypefn {Library Function} int foobar (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar})
-
-\def\deftypefn{\defmethparsebody\Edeftypefn\deftypefnx\deftypefnheader}
+% Untyped variables:
 
-% \defheaderxcond#1\relax$$$
-% puts #1 in @code, followed by a space, but does nothing if #1 is null.
-\def\defheaderxcond#1#2$$${\ifx#1\relax\else\code{#1#2} \fi}
+% @defvr category var args
+\makedefun{defvr}#1 {\deftypevrheader{#1} {} }
 
-% #1 is the classification.  #2 is the data type.  #3 is the name and args.
-\def\deftypefnheader #1#2#3{\deftypefnheaderx{#1}{#2}#3 \relax}
-% #1 is the classification, #2 the data type, #3 the name, #4 the args.
-\def\deftypefnheaderx #1#2#3 #4\relax{%
-\doind {fn}{\code{#3}}% Make entry in function index
-\begingroup
-\normalparens % notably, turn off `&' magic, which prevents
-%               at least some C++ text from working
-\defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$$$#3}{#1}%
-\deftypefunargs {#4}\endgroup %
-\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
-}
+% @defcv category class var args
+\makedefun{defcv}#1 {\defcvof{#1\ \putwordof}}
 
-% @defmac == @deffn Macro
+% \defcvof {category of}class var args
+\def\defcvof#1#2 {\deftypecvof{#1}#2 {} }
 
-\def\defmac{\defparsebody\Edefmac\defmacx\defmacheader}
+% Types:
 
-\def\defmacheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
-\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefmac}%
-\defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
-\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
+% @deftp category name args
+\makedefun{deftp}#1 #2 #3\endheader{%
+  \doind{tp}{\code{#2}}%
+  \defname{#1}{}{#2}\defunargs{#3\unskip}%
 }
 
-% @defspec == @deffn Special Form
-
-\def\defspec{\defparsebody\Edefspec\defspecx\defspecheader}
-
-\def\defspecheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
-\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefspec}%
-\defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
-\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
-}
+% Remaining @defun-like shortcuts:
+\makedefun{defun}{\deffnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
+\makedefun{defmac}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefmac} }
+\makedefun{defspec}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefspec} }
+\makedefun{deftypefun}{\deftypefnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
+\makedefun{defvar}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
+\makedefun{defopt}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefopt} }
+\makedefun{deftypevar}{\deftypevrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
+\makedefun{defmethod}{\defopon\putwordMethodon}
+\makedefun{deftypemethod}{\deftypeopon\putwordMethodon}
+\makedefun{defivar}{\defcvof\putwordInstanceVariableof}
+\makedefun{deftypeivar}{\deftypecvof\putwordInstanceVariableof}
 
-% @defop CATEGORY CLASS OPERATION ARG...
+% \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args).
+% #1 is the category, such as "Function".
+% #2 is the return type, if any.
+% #3 is the function name.
 %
-\def\defop #1 {\def\defoptype{#1}%
-\defopparsebody\Edefop\defopx\defopheader\defoptype}
+% We are followed by (but not passed) the arguments, if any.
 %
-\def\defopheader#1#2#3{%
-\dosubind {fn}{\code{#2}}{\putwordon\ #1}% Make entry in function index
-\begingroup\defname {#2}{\defoptype\ \putwordon\ #1}%
-\defunargs {#3}\endgroup %
+\def\defname#1#2#3{%
+  \par
+  % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def...
+  \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
+  %
+  % Determine if we are typesetting the return type of a typed function
+  % on a line by itself.
+  \rettypeownlinefalse
+  \ifdoingtypefn  % doing a typed function specifically?
+    % then check user option for putting return type on its own line:
+    \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname\relax \else
+      \rettypeownlinetrue
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  %
+  % How we'll format the category name.  Putting it in brackets helps
+  % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line
+  % just below it.
+  \def\temp{#1}%
+  \setbox0=\hbox{\kern\deflastargmargin \ifx\temp\empty\else [\rm\temp]\fi}
+  %
+  % Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape.  We'll always have at
+  % least two.
+  \tempnum = 2
+  %
+  % The first line needs space for \box0; but if \rightskip is nonzero,
+  % we need only space for the part of \box0 which exceeds it:
+  \dimen0=\hsize  \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0  \advance\dimen0 by \rightskip
+  %
+  % If doing a return type on its own line, we'll have another line.
+  \ifrettypeownline
+    \advance\tempnum by 1
+    \def\maybeshapeline{0in \hsize}%
+  \else
+    \def\maybeshapeline{}%
+  \fi
+  %
+  % The continuations:
+  \dimen2=\hsize  \advance\dimen2 by -\defargsindent
+  %
+  % The final paragraph shape:
+  \parshape \tempnum  0in \dimen0  \maybeshapeline  \defargsindent \dimen2
+  %
+  % Put the category name at the right margin.
+  \noindent
+  \hbox to 0pt{%
+    \hfil\box0 \kern-\hsize
+    % \hsize has to be shortened this way:
+    \kern\leftskip
+    % Intentionally do not respect \rightskip, since we need the space.
+  }%
+  %
+  % Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint:
+  \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000
+  \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+  {%
+    % defun fonts. We use typewriter by default (used to be bold) because:
+    % . we're printing identifiers, they should be in tt in principle.
+    % . in languages with many accents, such as Czech or French, it's
+    %   common to leave accents off identifiers.  The result looks ok in
+    %   tt, but exceedingly strange in rm.
+    % . we don't want -- and --- to be treated as ligatures.
+    % . this still does not fix the ?` and !` ligatures, but so far no
+    %   one has made identifiers using them :).
+    \df \tt
+    \def\temp{#2}% text of the return type
+    \ifx\temp\empty\else
+      \tclose{\temp}% typeset the return type
+      \ifrettypeownline
+        % put return type on its own line; prohibit line break following:
+        \hfil\vadjust{\nobreak}\break  
+      \else
+        \space  % type on same line, so just followed by a space
+      \fi
+    \fi           % no return type
+    #3% output function name
+  }%
+  {\rm\enskip}% hskip 0.5 em of \tenrm
+  %
+  \boldbrax
+  % arguments will be output next, if any.
 }
 
-% @deftypeop CATEGORY CLASS TYPE OPERATION ARG...
+% Print arguments in slanted roman (not ttsl), inconsistently with using
+% tt for the name.  This is because literal text is sometimes needed in
+% the argument list (groff manual), and ttsl and tt are not very
+% distinguishable.  Prevent hyphenation at `-' chars.
 %
-\def\deftypeop #1 {\def\deftypeopcategory{#1}%
-  \deftypeopparsebody\Edeftypeop\deftypeopx\deftypeopheader
-                       \deftypeopcategory}
-%
-% #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the operation name, #4 the args.
-\def\deftypeopheader#1#2#3#4{%
-  \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index
-  \begingroup
-    \defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$$$#3}
-            {\deftypeopcategory\ \putwordon\ \code{#1}}%
-    \deftypefunargs{#4}%
-  \endgroup
+\def\defunargs#1{%
+  % use sl by default (not ttsl),
+  % tt for the names.
+  \df \sl \hyphenchar\font=0
+  %
+  % On the other hand, if an argument has two dashes (for instance), we
+  % want a way to get ttsl.  We used to recommend @var for that, so
+  % leave the code in, but it's strange for @var to lead to typewriter.
+  % Nowadays we recommend @code, since the difference between a ttsl hyphen
+  % and a tt hyphen is pretty tiny.  @code also disables ?` !`.
+  \def\var##1{{\setupmarkupstyle{var}\ttslanted{##1}}}%
+  #1%
+  \sl\hyphenchar\font=45
 }
 
-% @deftypemethod CLASS TYPE METHOD ARG...
-%
-\def\deftypemethod{%
-  \deftypemethparsebody\Edeftypemethod\deftypemethodx\deftypemethodheader}
+% We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line.
 %
-% #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the method name, #4 the args.
-\def\deftypemethodheader#1#2#3#4{%
-  \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index
-  \begingroup
-    \defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$$$#3}{\putwordMethodon\ \code{#1}}%
-    \deftypefunargs{#4}%
-  \endgroup
+\def\activeparens{%
+  \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active
+  \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active
+  \catcode`\&=\active
 }
 
-% @deftypeivar CLASS TYPE VARNAME
-%
-\def\deftypeivar{%
-  \deftypemethparsebody\Edeftypeivar\deftypeivarx\deftypeivarheader}
-%
-% #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the variable name.
-\def\deftypeivarheader#1#2#3{%
-  \dosubind{vr}{\code{#3}}{\putwordof\ \code{#1}}% entry in variable index
-  \begingroup
-    \defname{#3}{\putwordInstanceVariableof\ \code{#1}}%
-    \defvarargs{#3}%
-  \endgroup
-}
+% Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars.
+\let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = )
 
-% @defmethod == @defop Method
-%
-\def\defmethod{\defmethparsebody\Edefmethod\defmethodx\defmethodheader}
-%
-% #1 is the class name, #2 the method name, #3 the args.
-\def\defmethodheader#1#2#3{%
-  \dosubind{fn}{\code{#2}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index
-  \begingroup
-    \defname{#2}{\putwordMethodon\ \code{#1}}%
-    \defunargs{#3}%
-  \endgroup
-}
+% Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc.  For example,
+% if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet,
+% so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence.
+{
+  \activeparens
+  \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen
+  \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack
+  \global\let& = \&
 
-% @defcv {Class Option} foo-class foo-flag
+  \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb}
+  \gdef\magicamp{\let&=\amprm}
+}
 
-\def\defcv #1 {\def\defcvtype{#1}%
-\defopvarparsebody\Edefcv\defcvx\defcvarheader\defcvtype}
+\newcount\parencount
 
-\def\defcvarheader #1#2#3{%
-\dosubind {vr}{\code{#2}}{\putwordof\ #1}% Make entry in var index
-\begingroup\defname {#2}{\defcvtype\ \putwordof\ #1}%
-\defvarargs {#3}\endgroup %
+% If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards
+\newif\ifampseen
+\def\amprm#1 {\ampseentrue{\bf\&#1 }}
+
+\def\parenfont{%
+  \ifampseen
+    % At the first level, print parens in roman,
+    % otherwise use the default font.
+    \ifnum \parencount=1 \rm \fi
+  \else
+    % The \sf parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than
+    % the contained text.  This is especially needed for [ and ] .
+    \sf
+  \fi
 }
-
-% @defivar CLASS VARNAME == @defcv {Instance Variable} CLASS VARNAME
-%
-\def\defivar{\defvrparsebody\Edefivar\defivarx\defivarheader}
-%
-\def\defivarheader#1#2#3{%
-  \dosubind {vr}{\code{#2}}{\putwordof\ #1}% entry in var index
-  \begingroup
-    \defname{#2}{\putwordInstanceVariableof\ #1}%
-    \defvarargs{#3}%
-  \endgroup
+\def\infirstlevel#1{%
+  \ifampseen
+    \ifnum\parencount=1
+      #1%
+    \fi
+  \fi
 }
+\def\bfafterword#1 {#1 \bf}
 
-% @defvar
-% First, define the processing that is wanted for arguments of @defvar.
-% This is actually simple: just print them in roman.
-% This must expand the args and terminate the paragraph they make up
-\def\defvarargs #1{\normalparens #1%
-\interlinepenalty=10000
-\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak}
-
-% @defvr Counter foo-count
-
-\def\defvr{\defvrparsebody\Edefvr\defvrx\defvrheader}
-
-\def\defvrheader #1#2#3{\doind {vr}{\code{#2}}%
-\begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defvarargs{#3}\endgroup}
-
-% @defvar == @defvr Variable
-
-\def\defvar{\defvarparsebody\Edefvar\defvarx\defvarheader}
-
-\def\defvarheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index
-\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefvar}%
-\defvarargs {#2}\endgroup %
+\def\opnr{%
+  \global\advance\parencount by 1
+  {\parenfont(}%
+  \infirstlevel \bfafterword
 }
-
-% @defopt == @defvr {User Option}
-
-\def\defopt{\defvarparsebody\Edefopt\defoptx\defoptheader}
-
-\def\defoptheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index
-\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefopt}%
-\defvarargs {#2}\endgroup %
+\def\clnr{%
+  {\parenfont)}%
+  \infirstlevel \sl
+  \global\advance\parencount by -1
 }
 
-% @deftypevar int foobar
-
-\def\deftypevar{\defvarparsebody\Edeftypevar\deftypevarx\deftypevarheader}
-
-% #1 is the data type.  #2 is the name, perhaps followed by text that
-% is actually part of the data type, which should not be put into the index.
-\def\deftypevarheader #1#2{%
-\dovarind#2 \relax% Make entry in variables index
-\begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$$$#2}{\putwordDeftypevar}%
-\interlinepenalty=10000
-\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
-\endgroup}
-\def\dovarind#1 #2\relax{\doind{vr}{\code{#1}}}
-
-% @deftypevr {Global Flag} int enable
-
-\def\deftypevr{\defvrparsebody\Edeftypevr\deftypevrx\deftypevrheader}
-
-\def\deftypevrheader #1#2#3{\dovarind#3 \relax%
-\begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$$$#3}{#1}
-\interlinepenalty=10000
-\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
-\endgroup}
-
-% Now define @deftp
-% Args are printed in bold, a slight difference from @defvar.
-
-\def\deftpargs #1{\bf \defvarargs{#1}}
-
-% @deftp Class window height width ...
-
-\def\deftp{\deftpparsebody\Edeftp\deftpx\deftpheader}
-
-\def\deftpheader #1#2#3{\doind {tp}{\code{#2}}%
-\begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\deftpargs{#3}\endgroup}
+\newcount\brackcount
+\def\lbrb{%
+  \global\advance\brackcount by 1
+  {\bf[}%
+}
+\def\rbrb{%
+  {\bf]}%
+  \global\advance\brackcount by -1
+}
 
-% These definitions are used if you use @defunx (etc.)
-% anywhere other than immediately after a @defun or @defunx.
-% 
-\def\defcvx#1 {\errmessage{@defcvx in invalid context}}
-\def\deffnx#1 {\errmessage{@deffnx in invalid context}}
-\def\defivarx#1 {\errmessage{@defivarx in invalid context}}
-\def\defmacx#1 {\errmessage{@defmacx in invalid context}}
-\def\defmethodx#1 {\errmessage{@defmethodx in invalid context}}
-\def\defoptx #1 {\errmessage{@defoptx in invalid context}}
-\def\defopx#1 {\errmessage{@defopx in invalid context}}
-\def\defspecx#1 {\errmessage{@defspecx in invalid context}}
-\def\deftpx#1 {\errmessage{@deftpx in invalid context}}
-\def\deftypefnx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypefnx in invalid context}}
-\def\deftypefunx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypefunx in invalid context}}
-\def\deftypeivarx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypeivarx in invalid context}}
-\def\deftypemethodx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypemethodx in invalid context}}
-\def\deftypeopx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypeopx in invalid context}}
-\def\deftypevarx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypevarx in invalid context}}
-\def\deftypevrx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypevrx in invalid context}}
-\def\defunx#1 {\errmessage{@defunx in invalid context}}
-\def\defvarx#1 {\errmessage{@defvarx in invalid context}}
-\def\defvrx#1 {\errmessage{@defvrx in invalid context}}
+\def\checkparencounts{%
+  \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \badparencount \fi
+  \ifnum\brackcount=0 \else \badbrackcount \fi
+}
+% these should not use \errmessage; the glibc manual, at least, actually
+% has such constructs (when documenting function pointers).
+\def\badparencount{%
+  \message{Warning: unbalanced parentheses in @def...}%
+  \global\parencount=0
+}
+\def\badbrackcount{%
+  \message{Warning: unbalanced square brackets in @def...}%
+  \global\brackcount=0
+}
 
 
 \message{macros,}
@@ -4849,43 +7193,74 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
 
 % To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens,
 % which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX.
-\ifx\eTeXversion\undefined
- \newwrite\macscribble
- \def\scanmacro#1{%
-   \begingroup \newlinechar`\^^M
-   % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
-   \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=12 \escapechar=`\@
-   % Append \endinput to make sure that TeX does not see the ending newline.
-   \toks0={#1\endinput}%
-   \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp
-   \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}%
-   \immediate\closeout\macscribble
-   \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces
-   \input \jobname.tmp
-   \endgroup
-}
-\else
-\def\scanmacro#1{%
-\begingroup \newlinechar`\^^M
-% Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
-\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=12 \escapechar=`\@
-\let\xeatspaces\eatspaces\scantokens{#1\endinput}\endgroup}
+\ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined
+  \newwrite\macscribble
+  \def\scantokens#1{%
+    \toks0={#1}%
+    \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp
+    \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}%
+    \immediate\closeout\macscribble
+    \input \jobname.tmp
+  }
 \fi
 
+\def\scanmacro#1{\begingroup
+  \newlinechar`\^^M
+  \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces
+  %
+  % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
+  % When called from @insertcopying or (short)caption, we need active
+  % backslash to get it printed correctly.  Previously, we had
+  % \catcode`\\=\other instead.  We'll see whether a problem appears
+  % with macro expansion.				--kasal, 19aug04
+  \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active \escapechar=`\@
+  %
+  % ... and for \example:
+  \spaceisspace
+  %
+  % The \empty here causes a following catcode 5 newline to be eaten as
+  % part of reading whitespace after a control sequence.  It does not
+  % eat a catcode 13 newline.  There's no good way to handle the two
+  % cases (untried: maybe e-TeX's \everyeof could help, though plain TeX
+  % would then have different behavior).  See the Macro Details node in
+  % the manual for the workaround we recommend for macros and
+  % line-oriented commands.
+  % 
+  \scantokens{#1\empty}%
+\endgroup}
+
+\def\scanexp#1{%
+  \edef\temp{\noexpand\scanmacro{#1}}%
+  \temp
+}
+
 \newcount\paramno   % Count of parameters
 \newtoks\macname    % Macro name
 \newif\ifrecursive  % Is it recursive?
-\def\macrolist{}    % List of all defined macros in the form
-                    % \do\macro1\do\macro2...
+
+% List of all defined macros in the form
+%    \definedummyword\macro1\definedummyword\macro2...
+% Currently is also contains all @aliases; the list can be split
+% if there is a need.
+\def\macrolist{}
+
+% Add the macro to \macrolist
+\def\addtomacrolist#1{\expandafter \addtomacrolistxxx \csname#1\endcsname}
+\def\addtomacrolistxxx#1{%
+     \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\definedummyword#1}%
+     \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0}%
+}
 
 % Utility routines.
-% Thisdoes \let #1 = #2, except with \csnames.
+% This does \let #1 = #2, with \csnames; that is,
+%   \let \csname#1\endcsname = \csname#2\endcsname
+% (except of course we have to play expansion games).
+%
 \def\cslet#1#2{%
-\expandafter\expandafter
-\expandafter\let
-\expandafter\expandafter
-\csname#1\endcsname
-\csname#2\endcsname}
+  \expandafter\let
+  \csname#1\expandafter\endcsname
+  \csname#2\endcsname
+}
 
 % Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string.
 % Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN).
@@ -4898,7 +7273,7 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
 }
 
 % Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string.
-{\catcode`\^^M=12\catcode`\Q=3%
+{\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3%
 \gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}%
 \gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}%
 \gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}%
@@ -4906,147 +7281,403 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
 
 % Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where
 % all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active
-% (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \.
-
+% (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \
+% to recognize macro arguments; this is the job of \mbodybackslash.
+%
+% Non-ASCII encodings make 8-bit characters active, so un-activate
+% them to avoid their expansion.  Must do this non-globally, to
+% confine the change to the current group.
+%
 % It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is
-% done by  making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro
+% done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro
 % body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro.
+%
+\def\scanctxt{% used as subroutine
+  \catcode`\"=\other
+  \catcode`\+=\other
+  \catcode`\<=\other
+  \catcode`\>=\other
+  \catcode`\@=\other
+  \catcode`\^=\other
+  \catcode`\_=\other
+  \catcode`\|=\other
+  \catcode`\~=\other
+  \ifx\declaredencoding\ascii \else \setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal\other \fi
+}
+
+\def\scanargctxt{% used for copying and captions, not macros.
+  \scanctxt
+  \catcode`\\=\other
+  \catcode`\^^M=\other
+}
+
+\def\macrobodyctxt{% used for @macro definitions
+  \scanctxt
+  \catcode`\{=\other
+  \catcode`\}=\other
+  \catcode`\^^M=\other
+  \usembodybackslash
+}
+
+\def\macroargctxt{% used when scanning invocations
+  \scanctxt
+  \catcode`\\=0
+}
+% why catcode 0 for \ in the above?  To recognize \\ \{ \} as "escapes"
+% for the single characters \ { }.  Thus, we end up with the "commands"
+% that would be written @\ @{ @} in a Texinfo document.
+% 
+% We already have @{ and @}.  For @\, we define it here, and only for
+% this purpose, to produce a typewriter backslash (so, the @\ that we
+% define for @math can't be used with @macro calls):
+%
+\def\\{\normalbackslash}%
+% 
+% We would like to do this for \, too, since that is what makeinfo does.
+% But it is not possible, because Texinfo already has a command @, for a
+% cedilla accent.  Documents must use @comma{} instead.
+%
+% \anythingelse will almost certainly be an error of some kind.
 
-\def\macrobodyctxt{%
-  \catcode`\~=12
-  \catcode`\^=12
-  \catcode`\_=12
-  \catcode`\|=12
-  \catcode`\<=12
-  \catcode`\>=12
-  \catcode`\+=12
-  \catcode`\{=12
-  \catcode`\}=12
-  \catcode`\@=12
-  \catcode`\^^M=12
-  \usembodybackslash}
-
-\def\macroargctxt{%
-  \catcode`\~=12
-  \catcode`\^=12
-  \catcode`\_=12
-  \catcode`\|=12
-  \catcode`\<=12
-  \catcode`\>=12
-  \catcode`\+=12
-  \catcode`\@=12
-  \catcode`\\=12}
 
 % \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies.
 % It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N
 % where N is the macro parameter number.
 % We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so
 % \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash.
-
+%
 {\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active
  @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash}
  @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname}
 }
 \expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash}
 
+\def\margbackslash#1{\char`\#1 }
+
 \def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx}
 \def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx}
 
 \def\macroxxx#1{%
-  \getargs{#1}%           now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist
+  \getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist
   \ifx\argl\empty       % no arguments
-     \paramno=0%
+     \paramno=0\relax
   \else
      \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;%
+     \if\paramno>256\relax
+       \ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined
+         \errhelp = \EMsimple
+         \errmessage{You need eTeX to compile a file with macros with more than 256 arguments}
+       \fi
+     \fi
   \fi
   \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname
      \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}%
   \else
      \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax
-     \else \errmessage{The name \the\macname\space is reserved}\fi
+     \else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi
      \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}%
      \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1%
-     % Add the macroname to \macrolist
-     \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\do}%
-     \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0
-       \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname\endcsname}%
+     \addtomacrolist{\the\macname}%
   \fi
   \begingroup \macrobodyctxt
   \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody
   \else \expandafter\parsemacbody
   \fi}
 
-\def\unmacro{\parsearg\unmacroxxx}
-\def\unmacroxxx#1{%
+\parseargdef\unmacro{%
   \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname
     \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}%
     \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0%
-    % Remove the macro name from \macrolist
+    % Remove the macro name from \macrolist:
     \begingroup
-      \edef\tempa{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}%
-      \def\do##1{%
-        \def\tempb{##1}%
-        \ifx\tempa\tempb
-          % remove this
-        \else
-          \toks0 = \expandafter{\newmacrolist\do}%
-          \edef\newmacrolist{\the\toks0\expandafter\noexpand\tempa}%
-        \fi}%
-      \def\newmacrolist{}%
-      % Execute macro list to define \newmacrolist
-      \macrolist
-      \global\let\macrolist\newmacrolist
+      \expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax
+      \let\definedummyword\unmacrodo
+      \xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}%
     \endgroup
   \else
     \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}%
   \fi
 }
 
+% Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro.  The idea is to omit any
+% macro definitions that have been changed to \relax.
+%
+\def\unmacrodo#1{%
+  \ifx #1\relax
+    % remove this
+  \else
+    \noexpand\definedummyword \noexpand#1%
+  \fi
+}
+
 % This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a
 % <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by
 % an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed.
 \def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}}
 \def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs}
-\def\getmacname #1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}}
+\def\getmacname#1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}}
 \def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}}
 
+% For macro processing make @ a letter so that we can make Texinfo private macro names.
+\edef\texiatcatcode{\the\catcode`\@}
+\catcode `@=11\relax
+
 % Parse the optional {params} list.  Set up \paramno and \paramlist
-% so \defmacro knows what to do.  Define \macarg.blah for each blah
-% in the params list, to be ##N where N is the position in that list.
+% so \defmacro knows what to do.  Define \macarg.BLAH for each BLAH
+% in the params list to some hook where the argument si to be expanded.  If
+% there are less than 10 arguments that hook is to be replaced by ##N where N
+% is the position in that list, that is to say the macro arguments are to be
+% defined `a la TeX in the macro body.  
+%
 % That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above).
-
+%
 % We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions.
-% The technique used is stolen from LaTeX:  let \hash be something
+% The technique used is stolen from LaTeX: let \hash be something
 % unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine
 % it to # just before using the token list produced.
 %
 % The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before
 % the macro is used.
-
-\def\parsemargdef#1;{\paramno=0\def\paramlist{}%
-        \let\hash\relax\let\xeatspaces\relax\parsemargdefxxx#1,;,}
+%
+% If there are 10 or more arguments, a different technique is used, where the
+% hook remains in the body, and when macro is to be expanded the body is
+% processed again to replace the arguments.
+%
+% In that case, the hook is \the\toks N-1, and we simply set \toks N-1 to the
+% argument N value and then \edef  the body (nothing else will expand because of
+% the catcode regime underwhich the body was input).
+%
+% If you compile with TeX (not eTeX), and you have macros with 10 or more
+% arguments, you need that no macro has more than 256 arguments, otherwise an
+% error is produced.
+\def\parsemargdef#1;{%
+  \paramno=0\def\paramlist{}%
+  \let\hash\relax
+  \let\xeatspaces\relax
+  \parsemargdefxxx#1,;,%
+  % In case that there are 10 or more arguments we parse again the arguments
+  % list to set new definitions for the \macarg.BLAH macros corresponding to
+  % each BLAH argument. It was anyhow needed to parse already once this list
+  % in order to count the arguments, and as macros with at most 9 arguments
+  % are by far more frequent than macro with 10 or more arguments, defining
+  % twice the \macarg.BLAH macros does not cost too much processing power.
+  \ifnum\paramno<10\relax\else
+    \paramno0\relax
+    \parsemmanyargdef@@#1,;,% 10 or more arguments
+  \fi
+}
 \def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{%
   \if#1;\let\next=\relax
   \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx
-    \advance\paramno by 1%
+    \advance\paramno by 1
     \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname
         {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}%
     \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}%
   \fi\next}
 
+\def\parsemmanyargdef@@#1,{%
+  \if#1;\let\next=\relax
+  \else 
+    \let\next=\parsemmanyargdef@@
+    \edef\tempb{\eatspaces{#1}}%
+    \expandafter\def\expandafter\tempa
+       \expandafter{\csname macarg.\tempb\endcsname}%
+    % Note that we need some extra \noexpand\noexpand, this is because we
+    % don't want \the  to be expanded in the \parsermacbody  as it uses an
+    % \xdef .
+    \expandafter\edef\tempa
+      {\noexpand\noexpand\noexpand\the\toks\the\paramno}%
+    \advance\paramno by 1\relax
+  \fi\next}
+
 % These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies.
 % (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.)
+%
 
+\catcode `\@\texiatcatcode
 \long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro%
 {\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
 \long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro%
 {\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
+\catcode `\@=11\relax
+
+\let\endargs@\relax
+\let\nil@\relax
+\def\nilm@{\nil@}%
+\long\def\nillm@{\nil@}%
+
+% This macro is expanded during the Texinfo macro expansion, not during its
+% definition.  It gets all the arguments values and assigns them to macros
+% macarg.ARGNAME
+%
+% #1 is the macro name
+% #2 is the list of argument names
+% #3 is the list of argument values
+\def\getargvals@#1#2#3{%
+  \def\macargdeflist@{}%
+  \def\saveparamlist@{#2}% Need to keep a copy for parameter expansion.
+  \def\paramlist{#2,\nil@}%
+  \def\macroname{#1}%
+  \begingroup
+  \macroargctxt
+  \def\argvaluelist{#3,\nil@}%
+  \def\@tempa{#3}%
+  \ifx\@tempa\empty
+    \setemptyargvalues@
+  \else
+    \getargvals@@
+  \fi
+}
+
+% 
+\def\getargvals@@{%
+  \ifx\paramlist\nilm@
+      % Some sanity check needed here that \argvaluelist is also empty.
+      \ifx\argvaluelist\nillm@
+      \else
+        \errhelp = \EMsimple
+        \errmessage{Too many arguments in macro `\macroname'!}%
+      \fi
+      \let\next\macargexpandinbody@
+  \else
+    \ifx\argvaluelist\nillm@
+       % No more arguments values passed to macro.  Set remaining named-arg
+       % macros to empty.
+       \let\next\setemptyargvalues@
+    \else
+      % pop current arg name into \@tempb
+      \def\@tempa##1{\pop@{\@tempb}{\paramlist}##1\endargs@}%
+      \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\paramlist}%
+       % pop current argument value into \@tempc
+      \def\@tempa##1{\longpop@{\@tempc}{\argvaluelist}##1\endargs@}%
+      \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\argvaluelist}%
+       % Here \@tempb is the current arg name and \@tempc is the current arg value.
+       % First place the new argument macro definition into \@tempd
+       \expandafter\macname\expandafter{\@tempc}%
+       \expandafter\let\csname macarg.\@tempb\endcsname\relax
+       \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempe\expandafter{%
+         \csname macarg.\@tempb\endcsname}%
+       \edef\@tempd{\long\def\@tempe{\the\macname}}%
+       \push@\@tempd\macargdeflist@
+       \let\next\getargvals@@
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \next
+}
+
+\def\push@#1#2{%
+  \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\def
+  \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter#2%
+  \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter{%
+  \expandafter#1#2}%
+}
+
+% Replace arguments by their values in the macro body, and place the result
+% in macro \@tempa
+\def\macvalstoargs@{%
+  %  To do this we use the property that token registers that are \the'ed
+  % within an \edef  expand only once. So we are going to place all argument
+  % values into respective token registers.
+  %
+  % First we save the token context, and initialize argument numbering.
+  \begingroup
+    \paramno0\relax
+    % Then, for each argument number #N, we place the corresponding argument
+    % value into a new token list register \toks#N
+    \expandafter\putargsintokens@\saveparamlist@,;,%
+    % Then, we expand the body so that argument are replaced by their
+    % values. The trick for values not to be expanded themselves is that they
+    % are within tokens and that tokens expand only once in an \edef .
+    \edef\@tempc{\csname mac.\macroname .body\endcsname}%
+    % Now we restore the token stack pointer to free the token list registers
+    % which we have used, but we make sure that expanded body is saved after
+    % group.
+    \expandafter
+  \endgroup
+  \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\@tempc}%
+  }
+
+\def\macargexpandinbody@{% 
+  %% Define the named-macro outside of this group and then close this group. 
+  \expandafter
+  \endgroup
+  \macargdeflist@
+  % First the replace in body the macro arguments by their values, the result
+  % is in \@tempa .
+  \macvalstoargs@
+  % Then we point at the \norecurse or \gobble (for recursive) macro value
+  % with \@tempb .
+  \expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempb\csname mac.\macroname .recurse\endcsname
+  % Depending on whether it is recursive or not, we need some tailing
+  % \egroup .
+  \ifx\@tempb\gobble
+     \let\@tempc\relax
+  \else
+     \let\@tempc\egroup
+  \fi
+  % And now we do the real job:
+  \edef\@tempd{\noexpand\@tempb{\macroname}\noexpand\scanmacro{\@tempa}\@tempc}%
+  \@tempd
+}
 
-% This defines the macro itself. There are six cases: recursive and
-% nonrecursive macros of zero, one, and many arguments.
+\def\putargsintokens@#1,{%
+  \if#1;\let\next\relax
+  \else
+    \let\next\putargsintokens@
+    % First we allocate the new token list register, and give it a temporary
+    % alias \@tempb .
+    \toksdef\@tempb\the\paramno
+    % Then we place the argument value into that token list register.
+    \expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempa\csname macarg.#1\endcsname
+    \expandafter\@tempb\expandafter{\@tempa}%
+    \advance\paramno by 1\relax
+  \fi
+  \next
+}
+
+% Save the token stack pointer into macro #1
+\def\texisavetoksstackpoint#1{\edef#1{\the\@cclvi}}
+% Restore the token stack pointer from number in macro #1
+\def\texirestoretoksstackpoint#1{\expandafter\mathchardef\expandafter\@cclvi#1\relax}
+% newtoks that can be used non \outer .
+\def\texinonouternewtoks{\alloc@ 5\toks \toksdef \@cclvi}
+
+% Tailing missing arguments are set to empty
+\def\setemptyargvalues@{%
+  \ifx\paramlist\nilm@
+    \let\next\macargexpandinbody@
+  \else
+    \expandafter\setemptyargvaluesparser@\paramlist\endargs@
+    \let\next\setemptyargvalues@
+  \fi
+  \next
+}
+
+\def\setemptyargvaluesparser@#1,#2\endargs@{%
+  \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{%
+    \expandafter\def\csname macarg.#1\endcsname{}}%
+  \push@\@tempa\macargdeflist@
+  \def\paramlist{#2}%
+}
+
+% #1 is the element target macro
+% #2 is the list macro
+% #3,#4\endargs@ is the list value
+\def\pop@#1#2#3,#4\endargs@{%
+   \def#1{#3}%
+   \def#2{#4}%
+}
+\long\def\longpop@#1#2#3,#4\endargs@{%
+   \long\def#1{#3}%
+   \long\def#2{#4}%
+}
+
+% This defines a Texinfo @macro. There are eight cases: recursive and
+% nonrecursive macros of zero, one, up to nine, and many arguments.
 % Much magic with \expandafter here.
 % \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file
 % they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group.
+%
 \def\defmacro{%
   \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars
   \ifrecursive
@@ -5061,17 +7692,25 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
          \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
          \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
-    \else % many
-      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
-         \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
-         \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
-      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
-          \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
-      \expandafter\expandafter
-      \expandafter\xdef
-      \expandafter\expandafter
-        \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
-          \paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
+    \else
+      \ifnum\paramno<10\relax % at most 9
+        \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+           \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
+           \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
+        \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
+            \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
+        \expandafter\expandafter
+        \expandafter\xdef
+        \expandafter\expandafter
+          \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
+            \paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
+      \else % 10 or more
+        \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+          \noexpand\getargvals@{\the\macname}{\argl}%
+        }%    
+        \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .body\endcsname\temp
+        \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .recurse\endcsname\gobble
+      \fi
     \fi
   \else
     \ifcase\paramno
@@ -5088,116 +7727,159 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
         \egroup
         \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
         \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
-    \else % many
-      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
-         \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
-         \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
-      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
-          \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
-      \expandafter\expandafter
-      \expandafter\xdef
-      \expandafter\expandafter
-      \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
-      \paramlist{%
-          \egroup
-          \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
-          \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
+    \else % at most 9
+      \ifnum\paramno<10\relax
+        \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+           \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
+           \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
+        \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
+            \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
+        \expandafter\expandafter
+        \expandafter\xdef
+        \expandafter\expandafter
+        \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
+        \paramlist{%
+            \egroup
+            \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
+            \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
+      \else % 10 or more:
+        \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+          \noexpand\getargvals@{\the\macname}{\argl}%
+        }%
+        \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .body\endcsname\temp
+        \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .recurse\endcsname\norecurse
+      \fi
     \fi
   \fi}
 
+\catcode `\@\texiatcatcode\relax
+
 \def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}}
 
 % \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a
 % {.  If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole
 % line.  Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence
-% as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg)
-\def\braceorline#1{\let\next=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx}
+% as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg).
+% 
+\def\braceorline#1{\let\macnamexxx=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx}
 \def\braceorlinexxx{%
   \ifx\nchar\bgroup\else
     \expandafter\parsearg
-  \fi \next}
-
-% We mant to disable all macros during \shipout so that they are not
-% expanded by \write.
-\def\turnoffmacros{\begingroup \def\do##1{\let\noexpand##1=\relax}%
-  \edef\next{\macrolist}\expandafter\endgroup\next}
+  \fi \macnamexxx}
 
 
 % @alias.
 % We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal
-% sign.  Just make them active and then expand them all to nothing.
-\def\alias{\begingroup\obeyspaces\parsearg\aliasxxx}
+% sign.  Make them active and then expand them all to nothing.
+%
+\def\alias{\parseargusing\obeyspaces\aliasxxx}
 \def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax}
-\def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{\ignoreactivespaces
-\edef\next{\global\let\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname=%
-           \expandafter\noexpand\csname#2\endcsname}%
-\expandafter\endgroup\next}
+\def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{%
+  {%
+    \expandafter\let\obeyedspace=\empty
+    \addtomacrolist{#1}%
+    \xdef\next{\global\let\makecsname{#1}=\makecsname{#2}}%
+  }%
+  \next
+}
 
 
 \message{cross references,}
-% @xref etc.
 
 \newwrite\auxfile
-
 \newif\ifhavexrefs    % True if xref values are known.
 \newif\ifwarnedxrefs  % True if we warned once that they aren't known.
 
 % @inforef is relatively simple.
 \def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**}
-\def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}},
+\def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{%
+  \putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}},
   node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}}
 
-% @node's job is to define \lastnode.
-\def\node{\ENVcheck\parsearg\nodezzz}
-\def\nodezzz#1{\nodexxx [#1,]}
-\def\nodexxx[#1,#2]{\gdef\lastnode{#1}}
+% @node's only job in TeX is to define \lastnode, which is used in
+% cross-references.  The @node line might or might not have commas, and
+% might or might not have spaces before the first comma, like:
+% @node foo , bar , ...
+% We don't want such trailing spaces in the node name.
+%
+\parseargdef\node{\checkenv{}\donode #1 ,\finishnodeparse}
+%
+% also remove a trailing comma, in case of something like this:
+% @node Help-Cross,  ,  , Cross-refs
+\def\donode#1 ,#2\finishnodeparse{\dodonode #1,\finishnodeparse}
+\def\dodonode#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}}
+
 \let\nwnode=\node
-\let\lastnode=\relax
-
-% The sectioning commands (@chapter, etc.) call these.
-\def\donoderef{%
-  \ifx\lastnode\relax\else
-    \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}%
-      {Ysectionnumberandtype}%
-    \global\let\lastnode=\relax
-  \fi
-}
-\def\unnumbnoderef{%
-  \ifx\lastnode\relax\else
-    \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}{Ynothing}%
-    \global\let\lastnode=\relax
-  \fi
-}
-\def\appendixnoderef{%
-  \ifx\lastnode\relax\else
-    \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}%
-      {Yappendixletterandtype}%
-    \global\let\lastnode=\relax
+\let\lastnode=\empty
+
+% Write a cross-reference definition for the current node.  #1 is the
+% type (Ynumbered, Yappendix, Ynothing).
+%
+\def\donoderef#1{%
+  \ifx\lastnode\empty\else
+    \setref{\lastnode}{#1}%
+    \global\let\lastnode=\empty
   \fi
 }
 
-
 % @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point.
 %
 \newcount\savesfregister
-\gdef\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi}
-\gdef\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi}
-\gdef\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces}
-
-% \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME, namely
-% NAME-title, NAME-pg, and NAME-SNT.  Called from \foonoderef.  We have
-% to set \indexdummies so commands such as @code in a section title
-% aren't expanded.  It would be nicer not to expand the titles in the
-% first place, but there's so many layers that that is hard to do.
-%
-\def\setref#1#2{{%
-  \indexdummies
+%
+\def\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi}
+\def\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi}
+\def\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces}
+
+% \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an
+% anchor), which consists of three parts:
+% 1) NAME-title - the current sectioning name taken from \lastsection,
+%                 or the anchor name.
+% 2) NAME-snt   - section number and type, passed as the SNT arg, or
+%                 empty for anchors.
+% 3) NAME-pg    - the page number.
+%
+% This is called from \donoderef, \anchor, and \dofloat.  In the case of
+% floats, there is an additional part, which is not written here:
+% 4) NAME-lof   - the text as it should appear in a @listoffloats.
+%
+\def\setref#1#2{%
   \pdfmkdest{#1}%
-  \dosetq{#1-title}{Ytitle}%
-  \dosetq{#1-pg}{Ypagenumber}%
-  \dosetq{#1-snt}{#2}%
-}}
+  \iflinks
+    {%
+      \atdummies  % preserve commands, but don't expand them
+      \edef\writexrdef##1##2{%
+	\write\auxfile{@xrdef{#1-% #1 of \setref, expanded by the \edef
+	  ##1}{##2}}% these are parameters of \writexrdef
+      }%
+      \toks0 = \expandafter{\lastsection}%
+      \immediate \writexrdef{title}{\the\toks0 }%
+      \immediate \writexrdef{snt}{\csname #2\endcsname}% \Ynumbered etc.
+      \safewhatsit{\writexrdef{pg}{\folio}}% will be written later, at \shipout
+    }%
+  \fi
+}
+
+% @xrefautosectiontitle on|off says whether @section(ing) names are used
+% automatically in xrefs, if the third arg is not explicitly specified.
+% This was provided as a "secret" @set xref-automatic-section-title
+% variable, now it's official.
+% 
+\parseargdef\xrefautomaticsectiontitle{%
+  \def\temp{#1}%
+  \ifx\temp\onword
+    \expandafter\let\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname
+      = \empty
+  \else\ifx\temp\offword
+    \expandafter\let\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname
+      = \relax
+  \else
+    \errhelp = \EMsimple
+    \errmessage{Unknown @xrefautomaticsectiontitle value `\temp',
+                must be on|off}%
+  \fi\fi
+}
 
+% 
 % @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references.  For \xrefX, #1 is
 % the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed
 % node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed
@@ -5206,143 +7888,232 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
 \def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
 \def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
 \def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
+%
+\newbox\toprefbox
+\newbox\printedrefnamebox
+\newbox\infofilenamebox
+\newbox\printedmanualbox
+%
 \def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup
   \unsepspaces
+  %
+  % Get args without leading/trailing spaces.
+  \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #3}%
+  \setbox\printedrefnamebox = \hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}%
+  %
+  \def\infofilename{\ignorespaces #4}%
+  \setbox\infofilenamebox = \hbox{\infofilename\unskip}%
+  %
   \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}%
-  \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #3}%
-  \setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual}%
-  \setbox0=\hbox{\printednodename}%
-  \ifdim \wd0 = 0pt
+  \setbox\printedmanualbox  = \hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}%
+  %
+  % If the printed reference name (arg #3) was not explicitly given in
+  % the @xref, figure out what we want to use.
+  \ifdim \wd\printedrefnamebox = 0pt
     % No printed node name was explicitly given.
-    \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname\relax
-      % Use the node name inside the square brackets.
-      \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
+    \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname \relax
+      % Not auto section-title: use node name inside the square brackets.
+      \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
     \else
-      % Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside
-      % the square brackets.  Use the real section title if we have it.
-      \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
-        % It is in another manual, so we don't have it.
-        \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
+      % Auto section-title: use chapter/section title inside
+      % the square brackets if we have it.
+      \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt
+        % It is in another manual, so we don't have it; use node name.
+        \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
       \else
         \ifhavexrefs
-          % We know the real title if we have the xref values.
-          \def\printednodename{\refx{#1-title}{}}%
+          % We (should) know the real title if we have the xref values.
+          \def\printedrefname{\refx{#1-title}{}}%
         \else
           % Otherwise just copy the Info node name.
-          \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
+          \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
         \fi%
       \fi
     \fi
   \fi
   %
-  % If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not
-  % insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will
-  % not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names.  Since some manuals
-  % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this
-  % is a loss.  Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it
-  % is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time.
+  % Make link in pdf output.
   \ifpdf
-    \leavevmode
-    \getfilename{#4}%
-    \ifnum\filenamelength>0
-      \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
-        goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{#1@}%
-    \else
-      \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
-        goto name{#1@}%
-    \fi
-    \linkcolor
+    {\indexnofonts
+     \turnoffactive
+     \makevalueexpandable
+     % This expands tokens, so do it after making catcode changes, so _
+     % etc. don't get their TeX definitions.  This ignores all spaces in
+     % #4, including (wrongly) those in the middle of the filename.
+     \getfilename{#4}%
+     %
+     % This (wrongly) does not take account of leading or trailing
+     % spaces in #1, which should be ignored.
+     \edef\pdfxrefdest{#1}%
+     \ifx\pdfxrefdest\empty
+       \def\pdfxrefdest{Top}% no empty targets
+     \else
+       \txiescapepdf\pdfxrefdest  % escape PDF special chars
+     \fi
+     %
+     \leavevmode
+     \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
+     \ifnum\filenamelength>0
+       goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{\pdfxrefdest}%
+     \else
+       goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfxrefdest}}%
+     \fi
+    }%
+    \setcolor{\linkcolor}%
   \fi
   %
-  \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
-    \putwordsection{} ``\printednodename'' \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
+  % Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2"
+  % instead of "[somenode], p.3".  We distinguish them by the
+  % LABEL-title being set to a magic string.
+  {%
+    % Have to otherify everything special to allow the \csname to
+    % include an _ in the xref name, etc.
+    \indexnofonts
+    \turnoffactive
+    \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Xthisreftitle
+      \csname XR#1-title\endcsname
+  }%
+  \iffloat\Xthisreftitle
+    % If the user specified the print name (third arg) to the ref,
+    % print it instead of our usual "Figure 1.2".
+    \ifdim\wd\printedrefnamebox = 0pt
+      \refx{#1-snt}{}%
+    \else
+      \printedrefname
+    \fi
+    %
+    % If the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append
+    % "in MANUALNAME".
+    \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt
+      \space \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
+    \fi
   \else
-    % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the
-    % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand
-    % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of
-    % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the
-    % printing, back off for the \refx-pg.
-    {\normalturnoffactive
-     % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for
-     % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be.
-     \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}%
-     \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi
-    }%
-    % [mynode],
-    [\printednodename],\space
-    % page 3
-    \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}%
+    % node/anchor (non-float) references.
+    % 
+    % If we use \unhbox to print the node names, TeX does not insert
+    % empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will not
+    % find a line break at a hyphen in a node names.  Since some manuals
+    % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens,
+    % this is a loss.  Therefore, we give the text of the node name
+    % again, so it is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time.
+    % 
+    \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt
+      % Cross-manual reference with a printed manual name.
+      % 
+      \crossmanualxref{\cite{\printedmanual\unskip}}%
+    %
+    \else\ifdim \wd\infofilenamebox > 0pt
+      % Cross-manual reference with only an info filename (arg 4), no
+      % printed manual name (arg 5).  This is essentially the same as
+      % the case above; we output the filename, since we have nothing else.
+      % 
+      \crossmanualxref{\code{\infofilename\unskip}}%
+    %
+    \else
+      % Reference within this manual.
+      %
+      % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the
+      % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand
+      % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of
+      % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the
+      % printing, back off for the \refx-pg.
+      {\turnoffactive
+       % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for
+       % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be.
+       \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}%
+       \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi
+      }%
+      % output the `[mynode]' via the macro below so it can be overridden.
+      \xrefprintnodename\printedrefname
+      %
+      % But we always want a comma and a space:
+      ,\space
+      %
+      % output the `page 3'.
+      \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}%
+    \fi\fi
   \fi
   \endlink
 \endgroup}
 
-% \dosetq is the interface for calls from other macros
-
-% Use \normalturnoffactive so that punctuation chars such as underscore
-% and backslash work in node names.  (\turnoffactive doesn't do \.)
-\def\dosetq#1#2{%
-  {\let\folio=0%
-   \normalturnoffactive
-   \edef\next{\write\auxfile{\internalsetq{#1}{#2}}}%
-   \iflinks
-     \next
-   \fi
-  }%
+% Output a cross-manual xref to #1.  Used just above (twice).
+% 
+% Only include the text "Section ``foo'' in" if the foo is neither
+% missing or Top.  Thus, @xref{,,,foo,The Foo Manual} outputs simply
+% "see The Foo Manual", the idea being to refer to the whole manual.
+% 
+% But, this being TeX, we can't easily compare our node name against the
+% string "Top" while ignoring the possible spaces before and after in
+% the input.  By adding the arbitrary 7sp below, we make it much less
+% likely that a real node name would have the same width as "Top" (e.g.,
+% in a monospaced font).  Hopefully it will never happen in practice.
+% 
+% For the same basic reason, we retypeset the "Top" at every
+% reference, since the current font is indeterminate.
+% 
+\def\crossmanualxref#1{%
+  \setbox\toprefbox = \hbox{Top\kern7sp}%
+  \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \printedrefname \unskip \kern7sp}%
+  \ifdim \wd2 > 7sp  % nonempty?
+    \ifdim \wd2 = \wd\toprefbox \else  % same as Top?
+      \putwordSection{} ``\printedrefname'' \putwordin{}\space
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  #1%
 }
 
-% \internalsetq {foo}{page} expands into
-% CHARACTERS 'xrdef {foo}{...expansion of \Ypage...}
-% When the aux file is read, ' is the escape character
-
-\def\internalsetq #1#2{'xrdef {#1}{\csname #2\endcsname}}
-
-% Things to be expanded by \internalsetq
-
-\def\Ypagenumber{\folio}
-
-\def\Ytitle{\thissection}
-
-\def\Ynothing{}
-
-\def\Ysectionnumberandtype{%
-\ifnum\secno=0 \putwordChapter\xreftie\the\chapno %
-\else \ifnum \subsecno=0 \putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno %
-\else \ifnum \subsubsecno=0 %
-\putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno %
-\else %
-\putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno %
-\fi \fi \fi }
-
-\def\Yappendixletterandtype{%
-\ifnum\secno=0 \putwordAppendix\xreftie'char\the\appendixno{}%
-\else \ifnum \subsecno=0 \putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno %
-\else \ifnum \subsubsecno=0 %
-\putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno %
-\else %
-\putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno %
-\fi \fi \fi }
-
-\gdef\xreftie{'tie}
+% This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref
+% output.  It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily,
+% since square brackets don't work well in some documents.  Particularly
+% one that Bob is working on :).
+%
+\def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]}
 
-% Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error
-% messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.
+% Things referred to by \setref.
 %
-\ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined
-  \let\linenumber = \empty % Non-3.0.
-\else
-  \def\linenumber{\the\inputlineno:\space}
-\fi
+\def\Ynothing{}
+\def\Yomitfromtoc{}
+\def\Ynumbered{%
+  \ifnum\secno=0
+    \putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno
+  \else \ifnum\subsecno=0
+    \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno
+  \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
+    \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
+  \else
+    \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
+  \fi\fi\fi
+}
+\def\Yappendix{%
+  \ifnum\secno=0
+     \putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}%
+  \else \ifnum\subsecno=0
+     \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno
+  \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
+    \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
+  \else
+    \putwordSection@tie
+      @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
+  \fi\fi\fi
+}
 
 % Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME.
 % If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward.
-
+%
 \def\refx#1#2{%
-  \expandafter\ifx\csname X#1\endcsname\relax
+  {%
+    \indexnofonts
+    \otherbackslash
+    \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX
+      \csname XR#1\endcsname
+  }%
+  \ifx\thisrefX\relax
     % If not defined, say something at least.
     \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright
     \iflinks
       \ifhavexrefs
-        \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `#1'.}%
+        {\toks0 = {#1}% avoid expansion of possibly-complex value
+         \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `\the\toks0'.}}%
       \else
         \ifwarnedxrefs\else
           \global\warnedxrefstrue
@@ -5352,22 +8123,59 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
     \fi
   \else
     % It's defined, so just use it.
-    \csname X#1\endcsname
+    \thisrefX
   \fi
   #2% Output the suffix in any case.
 }
 
-% This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file.
+% This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file.  Usually it's
+% just a \def (we prepend XR to the control sequence name to avoid
+% collisions).  But if this is a float type, we have more work to do.
 %
-\def\xrdef#1{\begingroup
-  % Reenable \ as an escape while reading the second argument.
-  \catcode`\\ = 0
-  \afterassignment\endgroup
-  \expandafter\gdef\csname X#1\endcsname
+\def\xrdef#1#2{%
+  {% The node name might contain 8-bit characters, which in our current
+   % implementation are changed to commands like @'e.  Don't let these
+   % mess up the control sequence name.
+    \indexnofonts
+    \turnoffactive
+    \xdef\safexrefname{#1}%
+  }%
+  %
+  \expandafter\gdef\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname{#2}% remember this xref
+  %
+  % Was that xref control sequence that we just defined for a float?
+  \expandafter\iffloat\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname
+    % it was a float, and we have the (safe) float type in \iffloattype.
+    \expandafter\let\expandafter\floatlist
+      \csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname
+    %
+    % Is this the first time we've seen this float type?
+    \expandafter\ifx\floatlist\relax
+      \toks0 = {\do}% yes, so just \do
+    \else
+      % had it before, so preserve previous elements in list.
+      \toks0 = \expandafter{\floatlist\do}%
+    \fi
+    %
+    % Remember this xref in the control sequence \floatlistFLOATTYPE,
+    % for later use in \listoffloats.
+    \expandafter\xdef\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname{\the\toks0
+      {\safexrefname}}%
+  \fi
 }
 
 % Read the last existing aux file, if any.  No error if none exists.
-\def\readauxfile{\begingroup
+%
+\def\tryauxfile{%
+  \openin 1 \jobname.aux
+  \ifeof 1 \else
+    \readdatafile{aux}%
+    \global\havexrefstrue
+  \fi
+  \closein 1
+}
+
+\def\setupdatafile{%
   \catcode`\^^@=\other
   \catcode`\^^A=\other
   \catcode`\^^B=\other
@@ -5395,9 +8203,7 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
   \catcode`\^^]=\other
   \catcode`\^^^=\other
   \catcode`\^^_=\other
-  \catcode`\@=\other
-  \catcode`\^=\other
-  % It was suggested to define this as 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc.
+  % It was suggested to set the catcode of ^ to 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc.
   % in xref tags, i.e., node names.  But since ^^e4 notation isn't
   % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable.  Furthermore,
   % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^
@@ -5410,6 +8216,9 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
   % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter
   % and then to call \auxhat in \setq.
   %
+  \catcode`\^=\other
+  %
+  % Special characters.  Should be turned off anyway, but...
   \catcode`\~=\other
   \catcode`\[=\other
   \catcode`\]=\other
@@ -5421,41 +8230,43 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
   \catcode`\$=\other
   \catcode`\#=\other
   \catcode`\&=\other
+  \catcode`\%=\other
   \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off
-  % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters
+  %
+  % This is to support \ in node names and titles, since the \
+  % characters end up in a \csname.  It's easier than
+  % leaving it active and making its active definition an actual \
+  % character.  What I don't understand is why it works in the *value*
+  % of the xrdef.  Seems like it should be a catcode12 \, and that
+  % should not typeset properly.  But it works, so I'm moving on for
+  % now.  --karl, 15jan04.
+  \catcode`\\=\other
+  %
+  % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters.
   {%
-    \count 1=128
+    \count1=128
     \def\loop{%
-      \catcode\count 1=\other
-      \advance\count 1 by 1
-      \ifnum \count 1<256 \loop \fi
+      \catcode\count1=\other
+      \advance\count1 by 1
+      \ifnum \count1<256 \loop \fi
     }%
   }%
-  % The aux file uses ' as the escape (for now).
-  % Turn off \ as an escape so we do not lose on
-  % entries which were dumped with control sequences in their names.
-  % For example, 'xrdef {$\leq $-fun}{page ...} made by @defun ^^
-  % Reference to such entries still does not work the way one would wish,
-  % but at least they do not bomb out when the aux file is read in.
+  %
+  % @ is our escape character in .aux files, and we need braces.
   \catcode`\{=1
   \catcode`\}=2
-  \catcode`\%=\other
-  \catcode`\'=0
-  \catcode`\\=\other
-  %
-  \openin 1 \jobname.aux
-  \ifeof 1 \else
-    \closein 1
-    \input \jobname.aux
-    \global\havexrefstrue
-    \global\warnedobstrue
-  \fi
-  % Open the new aux file.  TeX will close it automatically at exit.
-  \openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux
+  \catcode`\@=0
+}
+
+\def\readdatafile#1{%
+\begingroup
+  \setupdatafile
+  \input\jobname.#1
 \endgroup}
 
 
-% Footnotes.
+\message{insertions,}
+% including footnotes.
 
 \newcount \footnoteno
 
@@ -5466,40 +8277,42 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
 % space to prevent strange expansion errors.)
 \def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 }
 
-% @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only.
+% @footnotestyle is meaningful for Info output only.
 \let\footnotestyle=\comment
 
-\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote
-
 {\catcode `\@=11
 %
 % Auto-number footnotes.  Otherwise like plain.
 \gdef\footnote{%
+  \let\indent=\ptexindent
+  \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent
   \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne
   \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}%
   %
   % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the
   % extra spacing after we do the footnote number.
   \let\@sf\empty
-  \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\/\fi
+  \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\ptexslash\fi
   %
   % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number.
   \unskip
   \thisfootno\@sf
-  \footnotezzz
+  \dofootnote
 }%
 
 % Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the
 % footnote text as a parameter.  Our footnotes don't need to be so general.
 %
-% Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset and anything else that uses
-% \parseargline fail inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when
+% Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset (and anything else that uses
+% \parseargline) fails inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when
 % the footnote is read.  --karl, 16nov96.
 %
-\long\gdef\footnotezzz{\insert\footins\bgroup
+\gdef\dofootnote{%
+  \insert\footins\bgroup
   % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the
   % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment.
   % So reset some parameters.
+  \hsize=\pagewidth
   \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
   \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes
   \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox
@@ -5512,76 +8325,87 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
   %
   \smallfonts \rm
   %
-  % Hang the footnote text off the number.
-  \hang
+  % Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears
+  % to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op.  makeinfo does not use
+  % hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote
+  % text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style).
+  \let\noindent = \relax
+  %
+  % Hang the footnote text off the number.  Use \everypar in case the
+  % footnote extends for more than one paragraph.
+  \everypar = {\hang}%
   \textindent{\thisfootno}%
   %
   % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text.  Since this
   % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it
   % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote.
   \footstrut
+  %
+  % Invoke rest of plain TeX footnote routine.
   \futurelet\next\fo@t
 }
-\def\fo@t{\ifcat\bgroup\noexpand\next \let\next\f@@t
-  \else\let\next\f@t\fi \next}
-\def\f@@t{\bgroup\aftergroup\@foot\let\next}
-\def\f@t#1{#1\@foot}
-\def\@foot{\strut\par\egroup}
-
 }%end \catcode `\@=11
 
-% Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size
-% correspondingly.  There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers
-% used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined.
-%
-\def\lineskipfactor{.08333}
-\def\strutheightpercent{.70833}
-\def\strutdepthpercent {.29167}
+% In case a @footnote appears in a vbox, save the footnote text and create
+% the real \insert just after the vbox finished.  Otherwise, the insertion
+% would be lost.
+% Similarly, if a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote
+% text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is finished.
+% And the same can be done for other insert classes.  --kasal, 16nov03.
+
+% Replace the \insert primitive by a cheating macro.
+% Deeper inside, just make sure that the saved insertions are not spilled
+% out prematurely.
 %
-\def\setleading#1{%
-  \normalbaselineskip = #1\relax
-  \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip
-  \normalbaselines
-  \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{%
-    \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip
-                    depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip
-  }%
+\def\startsavinginserts{%
+  \ifx \insert\ptexinsert
+    \let\insert\saveinsert
+  \else
+    \let\checkinserts\relax
+  \fi
 }
 
-% @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line.  It should
-% surround any changed text.  This approach does *not* work if the
-% change spans more than two lines of output.  To handle that, we would
-% have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main
-% vertical list for the beginning and end of each change).
+% This \insert replacement works for both \insert\footins{foo} and
+% \insert\footins\bgroup foo\egroup, but it doesn't work for \insert27{foo}.
 %
-\def\|{%
-  % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode.
-  \leavevmode
-  %
-  % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output.
-  \vadjust{%
-    % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current
-    % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record.
-    \vskip-\baselineskip
-    %
-    % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type.  So
-    % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin.
-    \llap{%
-      %
-      % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'.
-      \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt
-      %
-      % This is the space between the bar and the text.
-      \hskip 12pt
-    }%
-  }%
+\def\saveinsert#1{%
+  \edef\next{\noexpand\savetobox \makeSAVEname#1}%
+  \afterassignment\next
+  % swallow the left brace
+  \let\temp =
 }
+\def\makeSAVEname#1{\makecsname{SAVE\expandafter\gobble\string#1}}
+\def\savetobox#1{\global\setbox#1 = \vbox\bgroup \unvbox#1}
+
+\def\checksaveins#1{\ifvoid#1\else \placesaveins#1\fi}
+
+\def\placesaveins#1{%
+  \ptexinsert \csname\expandafter\gobblesave\string#1\endcsname
+    {\box#1}%
+}
+
+% eat @SAVE -- beware, all of them have catcode \other:
+{
+  \def\dospecials{\do S\do A\do V\do E} \uncatcodespecials  %  ;-)
+  \gdef\gobblesave @SAVE{}
+}
+
+% initialization:
+\def\newsaveins #1{%
+  \edef\next{\noexpand\newsaveinsX \makeSAVEname#1}%
+  \next
+}
+\def\newsaveinsX #1{%
+  \csname newbox\endcsname #1%
+  \expandafter\def\expandafter\checkinserts\expandafter{\checkinserts
+    \checksaveins #1}%
+}
+
+% initialize:
+\let\checkinserts\empty
+\newsaveins\footins
+\newsaveins\margin
 
-% For a final copy, take out the rectangles
-% that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided
-% that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).
-%
-\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt}
 
 % @image.  We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this.
 % If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain.
@@ -5591,12 +8415,12 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
 % undone and the next image would fail.
 \openin 1 = epsf.tex
 \ifeof 1 \else
-  \closein 1
-  % Do not bother showing banner with post-v2.7 epsf.tex (available in
-  % doc/epsf.tex until it shows up on ctan).
+  % Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in
+  % doc/epsf.tex and on ctan).
   \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }%
   \input epsf.tex
 \fi
+\closein 1
 %
 % We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex.
 \newif\ifwarnednoepsf
@@ -5605,84 +8429,1239 @@ width0pt\relax} \fi
   it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.}
 %
 \def\image#1{%
-  \ifx\epsfbox\undefined
+  \ifx\epsfbox\thisisundefined
     \ifwarnednoepsf \else
       \errhelp = \noepsfhelp
       \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}%
       \global\warnednoepsftrue
     \fi
   \else
-    \imagexxx #1,,,\finish
+    \imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish
   \fi
 }
 %
 % Arguments to @image:
 % #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension.
 % #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height.
-% #4 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing this stuff.
-\def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{%
+% #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text.
+% #5 is (ignored optional) extension.
+% #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing stuff.
+\newif\ifimagevmode
+\def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup
+  \catcode`\^^M = 5     % in case we're inside an example
+  \normalturnoffactive  % allow _ et al. in names
+  % If the image is by itself, center it.
+  \ifvmode
+    \imagevmodetrue
+  \else \ifx\centersub\centerV
+    % for @center @image, we need a vbox so we can have our vertical space
+    \imagevmodetrue
+    \vbox\bgroup % vbox has better behavior than vtop herev
+  \fi\fi
+  %
+  \ifimagevmode
+    \nobreak\medskip
+    % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert
+    % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space
+    % above and below.
+    \nobreak\vskip\parskip
+    \nobreak
+  \fi
+  %
+  % Leave vertical mode so that indentation from an enclosing
+  %  environment such as @quotation is respected.
+  % However, if we're at the top level, we don't want the
+  %  normal paragraph indentation.
+  % On the other hand, if we are in the case of @center @image, we don't
+  %  want to start a paragraph, which will create a hsize-width box and
+  %  eradicate the centering.
+  \ifx\centersub\centerV\else \noindent \fi
+  %
+  % Output the image.
   \ifpdf
-    \centerline{\dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}}%
+    \dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}%
   \else
     % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure.
     \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi
     \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi
-    \begingroup
-      \catcode`\^^M = 5 % in case we're inside an example
-      % If the image is by itself, center it.
-      \ifvmode
-        \nobreak\bigskip
-        % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert
-        % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space
-        % above and below. 
-        \nobreak\vskip\parskip
-        \nobreak
-        \centerline{\epsfbox{#1.eps}}%
-        \bigbreak
-      \else
-        % In the middle of a paragraph, no extra space.
-        \epsfbox{#1.eps}%
+    \epsfbox{#1.eps}%
+  \fi
+  %
+  \ifimagevmode
+    \medskip  % space after a standalone image
+  \fi  
+  \ifx\centersub\centerV \egroup \fi
+\endgroup}
+
+
+% @float FLOATTYPE,LABEL,LOC ... @end float for displayed figures, tables,
+% etc.  We don't actually implement floating yet, we always include the
+% float "here".  But it seemed the best name for the future.
+%
+\envparseargdef\float{\eatcommaspace\eatcommaspace\dofloat#1, , ,\finish}
+
+% There may be a space before second and/or third parameter; delete it.
+\def\eatcommaspace#1, {#1,}
+
+% #1 is the optional FLOATTYPE, the text label for this float, typically
+% "Figure", "Table", "Example", etc.  Can't contain commas.  If omitted,
+% this float will not be numbered and cannot be referred to.
+%
+% #2 is the optional xref label.  Also must be present for the float to
+% be referable.
+%
+% #3 is the optional positioning argument; for now, it is ignored.  It
+% will somehow specify the positions allowed to float to (here, top, bottom).
+%
+% We keep a separate counter for each FLOATTYPE, which we reset at each
+% chapter-level command.
+\let\resetallfloatnos=\empty
+%
+\def\dofloat#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{%
+  \let\thiscaption=\empty
+  \let\thisshortcaption=\empty
+  %
+  % don't lose footnotes inside @float.
+  %
+  % BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an
+  % insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04
+  %
+  \startsavinginserts
+  %
+  % We can't be used inside a paragraph.
+  \par
+  %
+  \vtop\bgroup
+    \def\floattype{#1}%
+    \def\floatlabel{#2}%
+    \def\floatloc{#3}% we do nothing with this yet.
+    %
+    \ifx\floattype\empty
+      \let\safefloattype=\empty
+    \else
+      {%
+        % the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
+        % but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
+        \indexnofonts
+        \turnoffactive
+        \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
+      }%
+    \fi
+    %
+    % If label is given but no type, we handle that as the empty type.
+    \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
+      % We want each FLOATTYPE to be numbered separately (Figure 1,
+      % Table 1, Figure 2, ...).  (And if no label, no number.)
+      %
+      \expandafter\getfloatno\csname\safefloattype floatno\endcsname
+      \global\advance\floatno by 1
+      %
+      {%
+        % This magic value for \lastsection is output by \setref as the
+        % XREFLABEL-title value.  \xrefX uses it to distinguish float
+        % labels (which have a completely different output format) from
+        % node and anchor labels.  And \xrdef uses it to construct the
+        % lists of floats.
+        %
+        \edef\lastsection{\floatmagic=\safefloattype}%
+        \setref{\floatlabel}{Yfloat}%
+      }%
+    \fi
+    %
+    % start with \parskip glue, I guess.
+    \vskip\parskip
+    %
+    % Don't suppress indentation if a float happens to start a section.
+    \restorefirstparagraphindent
+}
+
+% we have these possibilities:
+% @float Foo,lbl & @caption{Cap}: Foo 1.1: Cap
+% @float Foo,lbl & no caption:    Foo 1.1
+% @float Foo & @caption{Cap}:     Foo: Cap
+% @float Foo & no caption:        Foo
+% @float ,lbl & Caption{Cap}:     1.1: Cap
+% @float ,lbl & no caption:       1.1
+% @float & @caption{Cap}:         Cap
+% @float & no caption:
+%
+\def\Efloat{%
+    \let\floatident = \empty
+    %
+    % In all cases, if we have a float type, it comes first.
+    \ifx\floattype\empty \else \def\floatident{\floattype}\fi
+    %
+    % If we have an xref label, the number comes next.
+    \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
+      \ifx\floattype\empty \else % if also had float type, need tie first.
+        \appendtomacro\floatident{\tie}%
       \fi
+      % the number.
+      \appendtomacro\floatident{\chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
+    \fi
+    %
+    % Start the printed caption with what we've constructed in
+    % \floatident, but keep it separate; we need \floatident again.
+    \let\captionline = \floatident
+    %
+    \ifx\thiscaption\empty \else
+      \ifx\floatident\empty \else
+	\appendtomacro\captionline{: }% had ident, so need a colon between
+      \fi
+      %
+      % caption text.
+      \appendtomacro\captionline{\scanexp\thiscaption}%
+    \fi
+    %
+    % If we have anything to print, print it, with space before.
+    % Eventually this needs to become an \insert.
+    \ifx\captionline\empty \else
+      \vskip.5\parskip
+      \captionline
+      %
+      % Space below caption.
+      \vskip\parskip
+    \fi
+    %
+    % If have an xref label, write the list of floats info.  Do this
+    % after the caption, to avoid chance of it being a breakpoint.
+    \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
+      % Write the text that goes in the lof to the aux file as
+      % \floatlabel-lof.  Besides \floatident, we include the short
+      % caption if specified, else the full caption if specified, else nothing.
+      {%
+        \atdummies
+        %
+        % since we read the caption text in the macro world, where ^^M
+        % is turned into a normal character, we have to scan it back, so
+        % we don't write the literal three characters "^^M" into the aux file.
+	\scanexp{%
+	  \xdef\noexpand\gtemp{%
+	    \ifx\thisshortcaption\empty
+	      \thiscaption
+	    \else
+	      \thisshortcaption
+	    \fi
+	  }%
+	}%
+        \immediate\write\auxfile{@xrdef{\floatlabel-lof}{\floatident
+	  \ifx\gtemp\empty \else : \gtemp \fi}}%
+      }%
+    \fi
+  \egroup  % end of \vtop
+  %
+  % place the captured inserts
+  %
+  % BEWARE: when the floats start floating, we have to issue warning
+  % whenever an insert appears inside a float which could possibly
+  % float. --kasal, 26may04
+  %
+  \checkinserts
+}
+
+% Append the tokens #2 to the definition of macro #1, not expanding either.
+%
+\def\appendtomacro#1#2{%
+  \expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}%
+}
+
+% @caption, @shortcaption
+%
+\def\caption{\docaption\thiscaption}
+\def\shortcaption{\docaption\thisshortcaption}
+\def\docaption{\checkenv\float \bgroup\scanargctxt\defcaption}
+\def\defcaption#1#2{\egroup \def#1{#2}}
+
+% The parameter is the control sequence identifying the counter we are
+% going to use.  Create it if it doesn't exist and assign it to \floatno.
+\def\getfloatno#1{%
+  \ifx#1\relax
+      % Haven't seen this figure type before.
+      \csname newcount\endcsname #1%
+      %
+      % Remember to reset this floatno at the next chap.
+      \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\resetallfloatnos
+        \expandafter{\resetallfloatnos #1=0 }%
+  \fi
+  \let\floatno#1%
+}
+
+% \setref calls this to get the XREFLABEL-snt value.  We want an @xref
+% to the FLOATLABEL to expand to "Figure 3.1".  We call \setref when we
+% first read the @float command.
+%
+\def\Yfloat{\floattype@tie \chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
+
+% Magic string used for the XREFLABEL-title value, so \xrefX can
+% distinguish floats from other xref types.
+\def\floatmagic{!!float!!}
+
+% #1 is the control sequence we are passed; we expand into a conditional
+% which is true if #1 represents a float ref.  That is, the magic
+% \lastsection value which we \setref above.
+%
+\def\iffloat#1{\expandafter\doiffloat#1==\finish}
+%
+% #1 is (maybe) the \floatmagic string.  If so, #2 will be the
+% (safe) float type for this float.  We set \iffloattype to #2.
+%
+\def\doiffloat#1=#2=#3\finish{%
+  \def\temp{#1}%
+  \def\iffloattype{#2}%
+  \ifx\temp\floatmagic
+}
+
+% @listoffloats FLOATTYPE - print a list of floats like a table of contents.
+%
+\parseargdef\listoffloats{%
+  \def\floattype{#1}% floattype
+  {%
+    % the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
+    % but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
+    \indexnofonts
+    \turnoffactive
+    \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
+  }%
+  %
+  % \xrdef saves the floats as a \do-list in \floatlistSAFEFLOATTYPE.
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \relax
+    \ifhavexrefs
+      % if the user said @listoffloats foo but never @float foo.
+      \message{\linenumber No `\safefloattype' floats to list.}%
+    \fi
+  \else
+    \begingroup
+      \leftskip=\tocindent  % indent these entries like a toc
+      \let\do=\listoffloatsdo
+      \csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname
     \endgroup
   \fi
 }
 
+% This is called on each entry in a list of floats.  We're passed the
+% xref label, in the form LABEL-title, which is how we save it in the
+% aux file.  We strip off the -title and look up \XRLABEL-lof, which
+% has the text we're supposed to typeset here.
+%
+% Figures without xref labels will not be included in the list (since
+% they won't appear in the aux file).
+%
+\def\listoffloatsdo#1{\listoffloatsdoentry#1\finish}
+\def\listoffloatsdoentry#1-title\finish{{%
+  % Can't fully expand XR#1-lof because it can contain anything.  Just
+  % pass the control sequence.  On the other hand, XR#1-pg is just the
+  % page number, and we want to fully expand that so we can get a link
+  % in pdf output.
+  \toksA = \expandafter{\csname XR#1-lof\endcsname}%
+  %
+  % use the same \entry macro we use to generate the TOC and index.
+  \edef\writeentry{\noexpand\entry{\the\toksA}{\csname XR#1-pg\endcsname}}%
+  \writeentry
+}}
+
 
 \message{localization,}
-% and i18n.
 
-% @documentlanguage is usually given very early, just after
-% @setfilename.  If done too late, it may not override everything
-% properly.  Single argument is the language abbreviation.
-% It would be nice if we could set up a hyphenation file here.
+% For single-language documents, @documentlanguage is usually given very
+% early, just after @documentencoding.  Single argument is the language
+% (de) or locale (de_DE) abbreviation.
 %
-\def\documentlanguage{\parsearg\dodocumentlanguage}
-\def\dodocumentlanguage#1{%
+{
+  \catcode`\_ = \active
+  \globaldefs=1
+\parseargdef\documentlanguage{\begingroup
+  \let_=\normalunderscore  % normal _ character for filenames
   \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX.
-  % Read the file if it exists.
+    % Read the file by the name they passed if it exists.
+    \openin 1 txi-#1.tex
+    \ifeof 1
+      \documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore{#1_\finish}%
+    \else
+      \globaldefs = 1  % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist
+      \input txi-#1.tex
+    \fi
+    \closein 1
+  \endgroup % end raw TeX
+\endgroup}
+%
+% If they passed de_DE, and txi-de_DE.tex doesn't exist,
+% try txi-de.tex.
+%
+\gdef\documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore#1_#2\finish{%
   \openin 1 txi-#1.tex
-  \ifeof1
+  \ifeof 1
     \errhelp = \nolanghelp
     \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}%
-    \let\temp = \relax
   \else
-    \def\temp{\input txi-#1.tex }%
+    \globaldefs = 1  % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist
+    \input txi-#1.tex
   \fi
-  \temp
-  \endgroup
+  \closein 1
 }
+}% end of special _ catcode
+%
 \newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or
-is empty.  Maybe you need to install it?  In the current directory
-should work if nowhere else does.}
-
+is empty.  Maybe you need to install it?  Putting it in the current
+directory should work if nowhere else does.}
+
+% This macro is called from txi-??.tex files; the first argument is the
+% \language name to set (without the "\lang@" prefix), the second and
+% third args are \{left,right}hyphenmin.
+%
+% The language names to pass are determined when the format is built.
+% See the etex.log file created at that time, e.g.,
+% /usr/local/texlive/2008/texmf-var/web2c/pdftex/etex.log.
+%
+% With TeX Live 2008, etex now includes hyphenation patterns for all
+% available languages.  This means we can support hyphenation in
+% Texinfo, at least to some extent.  (This still doesn't solve the
+% accented characters problem.)
+%
+\catcode`@=11
+\def\txisetlanguage#1#2#3{%
+  % do not set the language if the name is undefined in the current TeX.
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname lang@#1\endcsname \relax
+    \message{no patterns for #1}%
+  \else
+    \global\language = \csname lang@#1\endcsname
+  \fi
+  % but there is no harm in adjusting the hyphenmin values regardless.
+  \global\lefthyphenmin = #2\relax
+  \global\righthyphenmin = #3\relax
+}
 
-% @documentencoding should change something in TeX eventually, most
-% likely, but for now just recognize it.
-\let\documentencoding = \comment
+% Helpers for encodings.
+% Set the catcode of characters 128 through 255 to the specified number.
+%
+\def\setnonasciicharscatcode#1{%
+   \count255=128
+   \loop\ifnum\count255<256
+      \global\catcode\count255=#1\relax
+      \advance\count255 by 1
+   \repeat
+}
 
+\def\setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal#1{%
+   \count255=128
+   \loop\ifnum\count255<256
+      \catcode\count255=#1\relax
+      \advance\count255 by 1
+   \repeat
+}
 
-% Page size parameters.
+% @documentencoding sets the definition of non-ASCII characters
+% according to the specified encoding.
 %
+\parseargdef\documentencoding{%
+  % Encoding being declared for the document.
+  \def\declaredencoding{\csname #1.enc\endcsname}%
+  %
+  % Supported encodings: names converted to tokens in order to be able
+  % to compare them with \ifx.
+  \def\ascii{\csname US-ASCII.enc\endcsname}%
+  \def\latnine{\csname ISO-8859-15.enc\endcsname}%
+  \def\latone{\csname ISO-8859-1.enc\endcsname}%
+  \def\lattwo{\csname ISO-8859-2.enc\endcsname}%
+  \def\utfeight{\csname UTF-8.enc\endcsname}%
+  %
+  \ifx \declaredencoding \ascii
+     \asciichardefs
+  %
+  \else \ifx \declaredencoding \lattwo
+     \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
+     \lattwochardefs
+  %
+  \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latone
+     \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
+     \latonechardefs
+  %
+  \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latnine
+     \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
+     \latninechardefs
+  %
+  \else \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight
+     \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
+     \utfeightchardefs
+  %
+  \else
+    \message{Unknown document encoding #1, ignoring.}%
+  %
+  \fi % utfeight
+  \fi % latnine
+  \fi % latone
+  \fi % lattwo
+  \fi % ascii
+}
+
+% A message to be logged when using a character that isn't available
+% the default font encoding (OT1).
+%
+\def\missingcharmsg#1{\message{Character missing in OT1 encoding: #1.}}
+
+% Take account of \c (plain) vs. \, (Texinfo) difference.
+\def\cedilla#1{\ifx\c\ptexc\c{#1}\else\,{#1}\fi}
+
+% First, make active non-ASCII characters in order for them to be
+% correctly categorized when TeX reads the replacement text of
+% macros containing the character definitions.
+\setnonasciicharscatcode\active
+%
+% Latin1 (ISO-8859-1) character definitions.
+\def\latonechardefs{%
+  \gdef^^a0{\tie}
+  \gdef^^a1{\exclamdown}
+  \gdef^^a2{\missingcharmsg{CENT SIGN}}
+  \gdef^^a3{{\pounds}}
+  \gdef^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}}
+  \gdef^^a5{\missingcharmsg{YEN SIGN}}
+  \gdef^^a6{\missingcharmsg{BROKEN BAR}}
+  \gdef^^a7{\S}
+  \gdef^^a8{\"{}}
+  \gdef^^a9{\copyright}
+  \gdef^^aa{\ordf}
+  \gdef^^ab{\guillemetleft}
+  \gdef^^ac{$\lnot$}
+  \gdef^^ad{\-}
+  \gdef^^ae{\registeredsymbol}
+  \gdef^^af{\={}}
+  %
+  \gdef^^b0{\textdegree}
+  \gdef^^b1{$\pm$}
+  \gdef^^b2{$^2$}
+  \gdef^^b3{$^3$}
+  \gdef^^b4{\'{}}
+  \gdef^^b5{$\mu$}
+  \gdef^^b6{\P}
+  %
+  \gdef^^b7{$^.$}
+  \gdef^^b8{\cedilla\ }
+  \gdef^^b9{$^1$}
+  \gdef^^ba{\ordm}
+  %
+  \gdef^^bb{\guillemetright}
+  \gdef^^bc{$1\over4$}
+  \gdef^^bd{$1\over2$}
+  \gdef^^be{$3\over4$}
+  \gdef^^bf{\questiondown}
+  %
+  \gdef^^c0{\`A}
+  \gdef^^c1{\'A}
+  \gdef^^c2{\^A}
+  \gdef^^c3{\~A}
+  \gdef^^c4{\"A}
+  \gdef^^c5{\ringaccent A}
+  \gdef^^c6{\AE}
+  \gdef^^c7{\cedilla C}
+  \gdef^^c8{\`E}
+  \gdef^^c9{\'E}
+  \gdef^^ca{\^E}
+  \gdef^^cb{\"E}
+  \gdef^^cc{\`I}
+  \gdef^^cd{\'I}
+  \gdef^^ce{\^I}
+  \gdef^^cf{\"I}
+  %
+  \gdef^^d0{\DH}
+  \gdef^^d1{\~N}
+  \gdef^^d2{\`O}
+  \gdef^^d3{\'O}
+  \gdef^^d4{\^O}
+  \gdef^^d5{\~O}
+  \gdef^^d6{\"O}
+  \gdef^^d7{$\times$}
+  \gdef^^d8{\O}
+  \gdef^^d9{\`U}
+  \gdef^^da{\'U}
+  \gdef^^db{\^U}
+  \gdef^^dc{\"U}
+  \gdef^^dd{\'Y}
+  \gdef^^de{\TH}
+  \gdef^^df{\ss}
+  %
+  \gdef^^e0{\`a}
+  \gdef^^e1{\'a}
+  \gdef^^e2{\^a}
+  \gdef^^e3{\~a}
+  \gdef^^e4{\"a}
+  \gdef^^e5{\ringaccent a}
+  \gdef^^e6{\ae}
+  \gdef^^e7{\cedilla c}
+  \gdef^^e8{\`e}
+  \gdef^^e9{\'e}
+  \gdef^^ea{\^e}
+  \gdef^^eb{\"e}
+  \gdef^^ec{\`{\dotless i}}
+  \gdef^^ed{\'{\dotless i}}
+  \gdef^^ee{\^{\dotless i}}
+  \gdef^^ef{\"{\dotless i}}
+  %
+  \gdef^^f0{\dh}
+  \gdef^^f1{\~n}
+  \gdef^^f2{\`o}
+  \gdef^^f3{\'o}
+  \gdef^^f4{\^o}
+  \gdef^^f5{\~o}
+  \gdef^^f6{\"o}
+  \gdef^^f7{$\div$}
+  \gdef^^f8{\o}
+  \gdef^^f9{\`u}
+  \gdef^^fa{\'u}
+  \gdef^^fb{\^u}
+  \gdef^^fc{\"u}
+  \gdef^^fd{\'y}
+  \gdef^^fe{\th}
+  \gdef^^ff{\"y}
+}
+
+% Latin9 (ISO-8859-15) encoding character definitions.
+\def\latninechardefs{%
+  % Encoding is almost identical to Latin1.
+  \latonechardefs
+  %
+  \gdef^^a4{\euro}
+  \gdef^^a6{\v S}
+  \gdef^^a8{\v s}
+  \gdef^^b4{\v Z}
+  \gdef^^b8{\v z}
+  \gdef^^bc{\OE}
+  \gdef^^bd{\oe}
+  \gdef^^be{\"Y}
+}
+
+% Latin2 (ISO-8859-2) character definitions.
+\def\lattwochardefs{%
+  \gdef^^a0{\tie}
+  \gdef^^a1{\ogonek{A}}
+  \gdef^^a2{\u{}}
+  \gdef^^a3{\L}
+  \gdef^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}}
+  \gdef^^a5{\v L}
+  \gdef^^a6{\'S}
+  \gdef^^a7{\S}
+  \gdef^^a8{\"{}}
+  \gdef^^a9{\v S}
+  \gdef^^aa{\cedilla S}
+  \gdef^^ab{\v T}
+  \gdef^^ac{\'Z}
+  \gdef^^ad{\-}
+  \gdef^^ae{\v Z}
+  \gdef^^af{\dotaccent Z}
+  %
+  \gdef^^b0{\textdegree}
+  \gdef^^b1{\ogonek{a}}
+  \gdef^^b2{\ogonek{ }}
+  \gdef^^b3{\l}
+  \gdef^^b4{\'{}}
+  \gdef^^b5{\v l}
+  \gdef^^b6{\'s}
+  \gdef^^b7{\v{}}
+  \gdef^^b8{\cedilla\ }
+  \gdef^^b9{\v s}
+  \gdef^^ba{\cedilla s}
+  \gdef^^bb{\v t}
+  \gdef^^bc{\'z}
+  \gdef^^bd{\H{}}
+  \gdef^^be{\v z}
+  \gdef^^bf{\dotaccent z}
+  %
+  \gdef^^c0{\'R}
+  \gdef^^c1{\'A}
+  \gdef^^c2{\^A}
+  \gdef^^c3{\u A}
+  \gdef^^c4{\"A}
+  \gdef^^c5{\'L}
+  \gdef^^c6{\'C}
+  \gdef^^c7{\cedilla C}
+  \gdef^^c8{\v C}
+  \gdef^^c9{\'E}
+  \gdef^^ca{\ogonek{E}}
+  \gdef^^cb{\"E}
+  \gdef^^cc{\v E}
+  \gdef^^cd{\'I}
+  \gdef^^ce{\^I}
+  \gdef^^cf{\v D}
+  %
+  \gdef^^d0{\DH}
+  \gdef^^d1{\'N}
+  \gdef^^d2{\v N}
+  \gdef^^d3{\'O}
+  \gdef^^d4{\^O}
+  \gdef^^d5{\H O}
+  \gdef^^d6{\"O}
+  \gdef^^d7{$\times$}
+  \gdef^^d8{\v R}
+  \gdef^^d9{\ringaccent U}
+  \gdef^^da{\'U}
+  \gdef^^db{\H U}
+  \gdef^^dc{\"U}
+  \gdef^^dd{\'Y}
+  \gdef^^de{\cedilla T}
+  \gdef^^df{\ss}
+  %
+  \gdef^^e0{\'r}
+  \gdef^^e1{\'a}
+  \gdef^^e2{\^a}
+  \gdef^^e3{\u a}
+  \gdef^^e4{\"a}
+  \gdef^^e5{\'l}
+  \gdef^^e6{\'c}
+  \gdef^^e7{\cedilla c}
+  \gdef^^e8{\v c}
+  \gdef^^e9{\'e}
+  \gdef^^ea{\ogonek{e}}
+  \gdef^^eb{\"e}
+  \gdef^^ec{\v e}
+  \gdef^^ed{\'{\dotless{i}}}
+  \gdef^^ee{\^{\dotless{i}}}
+  \gdef^^ef{\v d}
+  %
+  \gdef^^f0{\dh}
+  \gdef^^f1{\'n}
+  \gdef^^f2{\v n}
+  \gdef^^f3{\'o}
+  \gdef^^f4{\^o}
+  \gdef^^f5{\H o}
+  \gdef^^f6{\"o}
+  \gdef^^f7{$\div$}
+  \gdef^^f8{\v r}
+  \gdef^^f9{\ringaccent u}
+  \gdef^^fa{\'u}
+  \gdef^^fb{\H u}
+  \gdef^^fc{\"u}
+  \gdef^^fd{\'y}
+  \gdef^^fe{\cedilla t}
+  \gdef^^ff{\dotaccent{}}
+}
+
+% UTF-8 character definitions.
+%
+% This code to support UTF-8 is based on LaTeX's utf8.def, with some
+% changes for Texinfo conventions.  It is included here under the GPL by
+% permission from Frank Mittelbach and the LaTeX team.
+%
+\newcount\countUTFx
+\newcount\countUTFy
+\newcount\countUTFz
+
+\gdef\UTFviiiTwoOctets#1#2{\expandafter
+   \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\endcsname}
+%
+\gdef\UTFviiiThreeOctets#1#2#3{\expandafter
+   \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\endcsname}
+%
+\gdef\UTFviiiFourOctets#1#2#3#4{\expandafter
+   \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\string #4\endcsname}
+
+\gdef\UTFviiiDefined#1{%
+  \ifx #1\relax
+    \message{\linenumber Unicode char \string #1 not defined for Texinfo}%
+  \else
+    \expandafter #1%
+  \fi
+}
+
+\begingroup
+  \catcode`\~13
+  \catcode`\"12
+
+  \def\UTFviiiLoop{%
+    \global\catcode\countUTFx\active
+    \uccode`\~\countUTFx
+    \uppercase\expandafter{\UTFviiiTmp}%
+    \advance\countUTFx by 1
+    \ifnum\countUTFx < \countUTFy
+      \expandafter\UTFviiiLoop
+    \fi}
+
+  \countUTFx = "C2
+  \countUTFy = "E0
+  \def\UTFviiiTmp{%
+    \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiTwoOctets\string~}}
+  \UTFviiiLoop
+
+  \countUTFx = "E0
+  \countUTFy = "F0
+  \def\UTFviiiTmp{%
+    \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiThreeOctets\string~}}
+  \UTFviiiLoop
+
+  \countUTFx = "F0
+  \countUTFy = "F4
+  \def\UTFviiiTmp{%
+    \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiFourOctets\string~}}
+  \UTFviiiLoop
+\endgroup
+
+\begingroup
+  \catcode`\"=12
+  \catcode`\<=12
+  \catcode`\.=12
+  \catcode`\,=12
+  \catcode`\;=12
+  \catcode`\!=12
+  \catcode`\~=13
+
+  \gdef\DeclareUnicodeCharacter#1#2{%
+    \countUTFz = "#1\relax
+    %\wlog{\space\space defining Unicode char U+#1 (decimal \the\countUTFz)}%
+    \begingroup
+      \parseXMLCharref
+      \def\UTFviiiTwoOctets##1##2{%
+        \csname u8:##1\string ##2\endcsname}%
+      \def\UTFviiiThreeOctets##1##2##3{%
+        \csname u8:##1\string ##2\string ##3\endcsname}%
+      \def\UTFviiiFourOctets##1##2##3##4{%
+        \csname u8:##1\string ##2\string ##3\string ##4\endcsname}%
+      \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
+       \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
+       \gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2}%
+    \endgroup}
+
+  \gdef\parseXMLCharref{%
+    \ifnum\countUTFz < "A0\relax
+      \errhelp = \EMsimple
+      \errmessage{Cannot define Unicode char value < 00A0}%
+    \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "800\relax
+      \parseUTFviiiA,%
+      \parseUTFviiiB C\UTFviiiTwoOctets.,%
+    \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "10000\relax
+      \parseUTFviiiA;%
+      \parseUTFviiiA,%
+      \parseUTFviiiB E\UTFviiiThreeOctets.{,;}%
+    \else
+      \parseUTFviiiA;%
+      \parseUTFviiiA,%
+      \parseUTFviiiA!%
+      \parseUTFviiiB F\UTFviiiFourOctets.{!,;}%
+    \fi\fi\fi
+  }
+
+  \gdef\parseUTFviiiA#1{%
+    \countUTFx = \countUTFz
+    \divide\countUTFz by 64
+    \countUTFy = \countUTFz
+    \multiply\countUTFz by 64
+    \advance\countUTFx by -\countUTFz
+    \advance\countUTFx by 128
+    \uccode `#1\countUTFx
+    \countUTFz = \countUTFy}
+
+  \gdef\parseUTFviiiB#1#2#3#4{%
+    \advance\countUTFz by "#10\relax
+    \uccode `#3\countUTFz
+    \uppercase{\gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2#3#4}}}
+\endgroup
+
+\def\utfeightchardefs{%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A0}{\tie}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A1}{\exclamdown}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A3}{\pounds}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A8}{\"{ }}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A9}{\copyright}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AA}{\ordf}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AB}{\guillemetleft}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AD}{\-}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AE}{\registeredsymbol}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AF}{\={ }}
+
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B0}{\ringaccent{ }}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B4}{\'{ }}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B8}{\cedilla{ }}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BA}{\ordm}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BB}{\guillemetright}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BF}{\questiondown}
+
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C0}{\`A}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C1}{\'A}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C2}{\^A}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C3}{\~A}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C4}{\"A}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C5}{\AA}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C6}{\AE}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C7}{\cedilla{C}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C8}{\`E}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C9}{\'E}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CA}{\^E}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CB}{\"E}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CC}{\`I}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CD}{\'I}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CE}{\^I}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CF}{\"I}
+
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D0}{\DH}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D1}{\~N}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D2}{\`O}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D3}{\'O}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D4}{\^O}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D5}{\~O}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D6}{\"O}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D8}{\O}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D9}{\`U}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DA}{\'U}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DB}{\^U}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DC}{\"U}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DD}{\'Y}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DE}{\TH}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DF}{\ss}
+
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E0}{\`a}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E1}{\'a}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E2}{\^a}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E3}{\~a}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E4}{\"a}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E5}{\aa}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E6}{\ae}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E7}{\cedilla{c}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E8}{\`e}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E9}{\'e}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EA}{\^e}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EB}{\"e}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EC}{\`{\dotless{i}}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00ED}{\'{\dotless{i}}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EE}{\^{\dotless{i}}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EF}{\"{\dotless{i}}}
+
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F0}{\dh}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F1}{\~n}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F2}{\`o}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F3}{\'o}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F4}{\^o}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F5}{\~o}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F6}{\"o}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F8}{\o}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F9}{\`u}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FA}{\'u}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FB}{\^u}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FC}{\"u}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FD}{\'y}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FE}{\th}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FF}{\"y}
+
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0100}{\=A}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0101}{\=a}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0102}{\u{A}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0103}{\u{a}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0104}{\ogonek{A}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0105}{\ogonek{a}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0106}{\'C}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0107}{\'c}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0108}{\^C}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0109}{\^c}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0118}{\ogonek{E}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0119}{\ogonek{e}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010A}{\dotaccent{C}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010B}{\dotaccent{c}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010C}{\v{C}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010D}{\v{c}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010E}{\v{D}}
+
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0112}{\=E}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0113}{\=e}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0114}{\u{E}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0115}{\u{e}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0116}{\dotaccent{E}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0117}{\dotaccent{e}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011A}{\v{E}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011B}{\v{e}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011C}{\^G}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011D}{\^g}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011E}{\u{G}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011F}{\u{g}}
+
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0120}{\dotaccent{G}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0121}{\dotaccent{g}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0124}{\^H}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0125}{\^h}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0128}{\~I}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0129}{\~{\dotless{i}}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012A}{\=I}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012B}{\={\dotless{i}}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012C}{\u{I}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012D}{\u{\dotless{i}}}
+
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0130}{\dotaccent{I}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0131}{\dotless{i}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0132}{IJ}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0133}{ij}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0134}{\^J}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0135}{\^{\dotless{j}}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0139}{\'L}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013A}{\'l}
+
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0141}{\L}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0142}{\l}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0143}{\'N}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0144}{\'n}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0147}{\v{N}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0148}{\v{n}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014C}{\=O}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014D}{\=o}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014E}{\u{O}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014F}{\u{o}}
+
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0150}{\H{O}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0151}{\H{o}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0152}{\OE}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0153}{\oe}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0154}{\'R}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0155}{\'r}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0158}{\v{R}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0159}{\v{r}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015A}{\'S}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015B}{\'s}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015C}{\^S}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015D}{\^s}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015E}{\cedilla{S}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015F}{\cedilla{s}}
+
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0160}{\v{S}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0161}{\v{s}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0162}{\cedilla{t}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0163}{\cedilla{T}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0164}{\v{T}}
+
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0168}{\~U}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0169}{\~u}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016A}{\=U}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016B}{\=u}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016C}{\u{U}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016D}{\u{u}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016E}{\ringaccent{U}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016F}{\ringaccent{u}}
+
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0170}{\H{U}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0171}{\H{u}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0174}{\^W}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0175}{\^w}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0176}{\^Y}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0177}{\^y}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0178}{\"Y}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0179}{\'Z}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017A}{\'z}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017B}{\dotaccent{Z}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017C}{\dotaccent{z}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017D}{\v{Z}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017E}{\v{z}}
+
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C4}{D\v{Z}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C5}{D\v{z}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C6}{d\v{z}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C7}{LJ}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C8}{Lj}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C9}{lj}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CA}{NJ}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CB}{Nj}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CC}{nj}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CD}{\v{A}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CE}{\v{a}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CF}{\v{I}}
+
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D0}{\v{\dotless{i}}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D1}{\v{O}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D2}{\v{o}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D3}{\v{U}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D4}{\v{u}}
+
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E2}{\={\AE}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E3}{\={\ae}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E6}{\v{G}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E7}{\v{g}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E8}{\v{K}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E9}{\v{k}}
+
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F0}{\v{\dotless{j}}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F1}{DZ}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F2}{Dz}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F3}{dz}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F4}{\'G}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F5}{\'g}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F8}{\`N}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F9}{\`n}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FC}{\'{\AE}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FD}{\'{\ae}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FE}{\'{\O}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FF}{\'{\o}}
+
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021E}{\v{H}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021F}{\v{h}}
+
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0226}{\dotaccent{A}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0227}{\dotaccent{a}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0228}{\cedilla{E}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0229}{\cedilla{e}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022E}{\dotaccent{O}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022F}{\dotaccent{o}}
+
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0232}{\=Y}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0233}{\=y}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0237}{\dotless{j}}
+
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{02DB}{\ogonek{ }}
+
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E02}{\dotaccent{B}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E03}{\dotaccent{b}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E04}{\udotaccent{B}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E05}{\udotaccent{b}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E06}{\ubaraccent{B}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E07}{\ubaraccent{b}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0A}{\dotaccent{D}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0B}{\dotaccent{d}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0C}{\udotaccent{D}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0D}{\udotaccent{d}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0E}{\ubaraccent{D}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0F}{\ubaraccent{d}}
+
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1E}{\dotaccent{F}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1F}{\dotaccent{f}}
+
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E20}{\=G}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E21}{\=g}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E22}{\dotaccent{H}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E23}{\dotaccent{h}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E24}{\udotaccent{H}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E25}{\udotaccent{h}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E26}{\"H}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E27}{\"h}
+
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E30}{\'K}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E31}{\'k}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E32}{\udotaccent{K}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E33}{\udotaccent{k}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E34}{\ubaraccent{K}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E35}{\ubaraccent{k}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E36}{\udotaccent{L}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E37}{\udotaccent{l}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3A}{\ubaraccent{L}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3B}{\ubaraccent{l}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3E}{\'M}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3F}{\'m}
+
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E40}{\dotaccent{M}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E41}{\dotaccent{m}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E42}{\udotaccent{M}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E43}{\udotaccent{m}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E44}{\dotaccent{N}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E45}{\dotaccent{n}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E46}{\udotaccent{N}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E47}{\udotaccent{n}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E48}{\ubaraccent{N}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E49}{\ubaraccent{n}}
+
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E54}{\'P}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E55}{\'p}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E56}{\dotaccent{P}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E57}{\dotaccent{p}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E58}{\dotaccent{R}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E59}{\dotaccent{r}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5A}{\udotaccent{R}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5B}{\udotaccent{r}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5E}{\ubaraccent{R}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5F}{\ubaraccent{r}}
+
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E60}{\dotaccent{S}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E61}{\dotaccent{s}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E62}{\udotaccent{S}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E63}{\udotaccent{s}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6A}{\dotaccent{T}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6B}{\dotaccent{t}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6C}{\udotaccent{T}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6D}{\udotaccent{t}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6E}{\ubaraccent{T}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6F}{\ubaraccent{t}}
+
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7C}{\~V}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7D}{\~v}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7E}{\udotaccent{V}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7F}{\udotaccent{v}}
+
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E80}{\`W}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E81}{\`w}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E82}{\'W}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E83}{\'w}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E84}{\"W}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E85}{\"w}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E86}{\dotaccent{W}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E87}{\dotaccent{w}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E88}{\udotaccent{W}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E89}{\udotaccent{w}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8A}{\dotaccent{X}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8B}{\dotaccent{x}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8C}{\"X}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8D}{\"x}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8E}{\dotaccent{Y}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8F}{\dotaccent{y}}
+
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E90}{\^Z}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E91}{\^z}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E92}{\udotaccent{Z}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E93}{\udotaccent{z}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E94}{\ubaraccent{Z}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E95}{\ubaraccent{z}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E96}{\ubaraccent{h}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E97}{\"t}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E98}{\ringaccent{w}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E99}{\ringaccent{y}}
+
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA0}{\udotaccent{A}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA1}{\udotaccent{a}}
+
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB8}{\udotaccent{E}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB9}{\udotaccent{e}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBC}{\~E}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBD}{\~e}
+
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECA}{\udotaccent{I}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECB}{\udotaccent{i}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECC}{\udotaccent{O}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECD}{\udotaccent{o}}
+
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE4}{\udotaccent{U}}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE5}{\udotaccent{u}}
+
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF2}{\`Y}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF3}{\`y}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF4}{\udotaccent{Y}}
+
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF8}{\~Y}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF9}{\~y}
+
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2013}{--}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2014}{---}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2018}{\quoteleft}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2019}{\quoteright}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201A}{\quotesinglbase}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201C}{\quotedblleft}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201D}{\quotedblright}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201E}{\quotedblbase}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2022}{\bullet}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2026}{\dots}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2039}{\guilsinglleft}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{203A}{\guilsinglright}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{20AC}{\euro}
+
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2192}{\expansion}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D2}{\result}
+
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2212}{\minus}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2217}{\point}
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2261}{\equiv}
+}% end of \utfeightchardefs
+
+
+% US-ASCII character definitions.
+\def\asciichardefs{% nothing need be done
+   \relax
+}
+
+% Make non-ASCII characters printable again for compatibility with
+% existing Texinfo documents that may use them, even without declaring a
+% document encoding.
+%
+\setnonasciicharscatcode \other
+
+
+\message{formatting,}
+
 \newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt
 
 \chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt
@@ -5692,10 +9671,10 @@ should work if nowhere else does.}
 % Prevent underfull vbox error messages.
 \vbadness = 10000
 
-% Don't be so finicky about underfull hboxes, either.
-\hbadness = 2000
+% Don't be very finicky about underfull hboxes, either.
+\hbadness = 6666
 
-% Following George Bush, just get rid of widows and orphans.
+% Following George Bush, get rid of widows and orphans.
 \widowpenalty=10000
 \clubpenalty=10000
 
@@ -5713,11 +9692,14 @@ should work if nowhere else does.}
   \fi
 }
 
-% Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth; 3) voffset;
-% 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip.  Then whoever calls us can
-% set \parskip and call \setleading for \baselineskip.
+% Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth;
+% 3) voffset; 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip;
+% 7) physical page height; 8) physical page width.
 %
-\def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
+% We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define
+% \textleading.  The caller should also set \parskip.
+%
+\def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{%
   \voffset = #3\relax
   \topskip = #6\relax
   \splittopskip = \topskip
@@ -5736,6 +9718,17 @@ should work if nowhere else does.}
   \normaloffset = #4\relax
   \bindingoffset = #5\relax
   %
+  \ifpdf
+    \pdfpageheight #7\relax
+    \pdfpagewidth #8\relax
+    % if we don't reset these, they will remain at "1 true in" of
+    % whatever layout pdftex was dumped with.
+    \pdfhorigin = 1 true in
+    \pdfvorigin = 1 true in
+  \fi
+  %
+  \setleading{\textleading}
+  %
   \parindent = \defaultparindent
   \setemergencystretch
 }
@@ -5743,76 +9736,140 @@ should work if nowhere else does.}
 % @letterpaper (the default).
 \def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
   \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
-  \setleading{13.2pt}%
+  \textleading = 13.2pt
   %
   % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even.
-  \internalpagesizes{46\baselineskip}{6in}{\voffset}{.25in}{\bindingoffset}{36pt}%
+  \internalpagesizes{607.2pt}{6in}% that's 46 lines
+                    {\voffset}{.25in}%
+                    {\bindingoffset}{36pt}%
+                    {11in}{8.5in}%
 }}
 
-% Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.5 (or so) format.
+% Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.25 trim size.
 \def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1
   \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt
-  \setleading{12pt}%
+  \textleading = 12pt
   %
-  \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5.in}{\voffset}{.25in}{\bindingoffset}{16pt}%
+  \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}%
+                    {-.2in}{0in}%
+                    {\bindingoffset}{16pt}%
+                    {9.25in}{7in}%
   %
   \lispnarrowing = 0.3in
   \tolerance = 700
   \hfuzz = 1pt
   \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
-  \deftypemargin = 0pt
   \defbodyindent = .5cm
+}}
+
+% Use @smallerbook to reset parameters for 6x9 trim size.
+% (Just testing, parameters still in flux.)
+\def\smallerbook{{\globaldefs = 1
+  \parskip = 1.5pt plus 1pt
+  \textleading = 12pt
+  %
+  \internalpagesizes{7.4in}{4.8in}%
+                    {-.2in}{-.4in}%
+                    {0pt}{14pt}%
+                    {9in}{6in}%
   %
-  \let\smalldisplay = \smalldisplayx
-  \let\smallexample = \smalllispx
-  \let\smallformat = \smallformatx
-  \let\smalllisp = \smalllispx
+  \lispnarrowing = 0.25in
+  \tolerance = 700
+  \hfuzz = 1pt
+  \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
+  \defbodyindent = .4cm
 }}
 
 % Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper.
 \def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
-  \setleading{12pt}%
   \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
+  \textleading = 13.2pt
   %
-  \internalpagesizes{53\baselineskip}{160mm}{\voffset}{4mm}{\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
+  % Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050
+  % prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm.
+  % To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust
+  % \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align.  Then
+  % do the same for \bindingoffset.  You can set these for testing in
+  % your texinfo source file like this:
+  % @tex
+  % \global\normaloffset = -6mm
+  % \global\bindingoffset = 10mm
+  % @end tex
+  \internalpagesizes{673.2pt}{160mm}% that's 51 lines
+                    {\voffset}{\hoffset}%
+                    {\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
+                    {297mm}{210mm}%
   %
   \tolerance = 700
   \hfuzz = 1pt
+  \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
+  \defbodyindent = 5mm
 }}
 
-% A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper.  Top margin
-% 29mm, hence bottom margin 28mm, nominal side margin 3cm.
-\def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1
-  \setleading{13.6pt}%
+% Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper.
+% From romildo@urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000.
+% He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small.
+\def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1
+  \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt
+  \textleading = 12.5pt
+  %
+  \internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}%
+                    {\voffset}{\hoffset}%
+                    {\bindingoffset}{8pt}%
+                    {210mm}{148mm}%
   %
+  \lispnarrowing = 0.2in
+  \tolerance = 800
+  \hfuzz = 1.2pt
+  \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
+  \defbodyindent = 2mm
+  \tableindent = 12mm
+}}
+
+% A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper.
+\def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1
   \afourpaper
-  \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}{3.6mm}{3.6mm}{3mm}{7mm}%
+  \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}%
+                    {\voffset}{4.6mm}%
+                    {\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
+                    {297mm}{210mm}%
   %
+  % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper.
   \globaldefs = 0
 }}
 
-% Use @afourwide to print on European A4 paper in wide format.
-\def\afourwide{%
+% Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format.
+\def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1
   \afourpaper
-  \internalpagesizes{9.5in}{6.5in}{\hoffset}{\normaloffset}{\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
-  %
+  \internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}%
+                    {\voffset}{-2.95mm}%
+                    {\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
+                    {297mm}{210mm}%
   \globaldefs = 0
-}
+}}
 
 % @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH]
 % Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip,
 % and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow.
 %
-\def\pagesizes{\parsearg\pagesizesxxx}
-\def\pagesizesxxx#1{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish}
+\parseargdef\pagesizes{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish}
 \def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{%
   \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi
   \globaldefs = 1
   %
   \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
-  \setleading{13.2pt}%
+  \setleading{\textleading}%
+  %
+  \dimen0 = #1\relax
+  \advance\dimen0 by \voffset
   %
-  \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}{\voffset}{\normaloffset}{\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
+  \dimen2 = \hsize
+  \advance\dimen2 by \normaloffset
+  %
+  \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}%
+                    {\voffset}{\normaloffset}%
+                    {\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
+                    {\dimen0}{\dimen2}%
 }}
 
 % Set default to letter.
@@ -5822,28 +9879,24 @@ should work if nowhere else does.}
 
 \message{and turning on texinfo input format.}
 
+\def^^L{\par} % remove \outer, so ^L can appear in an @comment
+
+% DEL is a comment character, in case @c does not suffice.
+\catcode`\^^? = 14
+
 % Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text.
-\catcode`\"=\other
-\catcode`\~=\other
-\catcode`\^=\other
-\catcode`\_=\other
-\catcode`\|=\other
-\catcode`\<=\other
-\catcode`\>=\other
-\catcode`\+=\other
-\catcode`\$=\other
-\def\normaldoublequote{"}
-\def\normaltilde{~}
-\def\normalcaret{^}
-\def\normalunderscore{_}
-\def\normalverticalbar{|}
-\def\normalless{<}
-\def\normalgreater{>}
-\def\normalplus{+}
-\def\normaldollar{$}
-
-% This macro is used to make a character print one way in ttfont
-% where it can probably just be output, and another way in other fonts,
+\catcode`\"=\other \def\normaldoublequote{"}
+\catcode`\$=\other \def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix
+\catcode`\+=\other \def\normalplus{+}
+\catcode`\<=\other \def\normalless{<}
+\catcode`\>=\other \def\normalgreater{>}
+\catcode`\^=\other \def\normalcaret{^}
+\catcode`\_=\other \def\normalunderscore{_}
+\catcode`\|=\other \def\normalverticalbar{|}
+\catcode`\~=\other \def\normaltilde{~}
+
+% This macro is used to make a character print one way in \tt
+% (where it can probably be output as-is), and another way in other fonts,
 % where something hairier probably needs to be done.
 %
 % #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print
@@ -5875,8 +9928,9 @@ should work if nowhere else does.}
 
 \catcode`\_=\active
 \def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_}
+\let\realunder=_
 % Subroutine for the previous macro.
-\def\_{\leavevmode \kern.06em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}}
+\def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em }
 
 \catcode`\|=\active
 \def|{{\tt\char124}}
@@ -5889,16 +9943,7 @@ should work if nowhere else does.}
 \catcode`\+=\active
 \def+{{\tt \char 43}}
 \catcode`\$=\active
-\def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}
-%\catcode 27=\active
-%\def^^[{$\diamondsuit$}
-
-% Set up an active definition for =, but don't enable it most of the time.
-{\catcode`\==\active
-\global\def={{\tt \char 61}}}
-
-\catcode`+=\active
-\catcode`\_=\active
+\def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix
 
 % If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file
 % name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line.
@@ -5906,46 +9951,69 @@ should work if nowhere else does.}
 % \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file.
 \def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other}
 
+% Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters even after
+% parsing them.
+\def\turnoffactive{%
+  \normalturnoffactive
+  \otherbackslash
+}
+
 \catcode`\@=0
 
-% \rawbackslashxx output one backslash character in current font
-\global\chardef\rawbackslashxx=`\\
-%{\catcode`\\=\other
-%@gdef@rawbackslashxx{\}}
-
-% \rawbackslash redefines \ as input to do \rawbackslashxx.
-{\catcode`\\=\active
-@gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@rawbackslashxx }}
-
-% \normalbackslash outputs one backslash in fixed width font.
-\def\normalbackslash{{\tt\rawbackslashxx}}
-
-% \catcode 17=0   % Define control-q
-\catcode`\\=\active
-
-% Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters
-% even after parsing them.
-@def@turnoffactive{@let"=@normaldoublequote
-@let\=@realbackslash
-@let~=@normaltilde
-@let^=@normalcaret
-@let_=@normalunderscore
-@let|=@normalverticalbar
-@let<=@normalless
-@let>=@normalgreater
-@let+=@normalplus
-@let$=@normaldollar}
-
-@def@normalturnoffactive{@let"=@normaldoublequote
-@let\=@normalbackslash
-@let~=@normaltilde
-@let^=@normalcaret
-@let_=@normalunderscore
-@let|=@normalverticalbar
-@let<=@normalless
-@let>=@normalgreater
-@let+=@normalplus
-@let$=@normaldollar}
+% \backslashcurfont outputs one backslash character in current font,
+% as in \char`\\.
+\global\chardef\backslashcurfont=`\\
+\global\let\rawbackslashxx=\backslashcurfont  % let existing .??s files work
+
+% \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other, and
+% \doublebackslash is two of them (for the pdf outlines).
+{\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\} @gdef@doublebackslash{\\}}
+
+% In texinfo, backslash is an active character; it prints the backslash
+% in fixed width font.
+\catcode`\\=\active  % @ for escape char from now on.
+
+% The story here is that in math mode, the \char of \backslashcurfont
+% ends up printing the roman \ from the math symbol font (because \char
+% in math mode uses the \mathcode, and plain.tex sets
+% \mathcode`\\="026E).  It seems better for @backslashchar{} to always
+% print a typewriter backslash, hence we use an explicit \mathchar,
+% which is the decimal equivalent of "715c (class 7, e.g., use \fam;
+% ignored family value; char position "5C).  We can't use " for the
+% usual hex value because it has already been made active.
+@def@normalbackslash{{@tt @ifmmode @mathchar29020 @else @backslashcurfont @fi}}
+@let@backslashchar = @normalbackslash % @backslashchar{} is for user documents.
+
+% On startup, @fixbackslash assigns:
+%  @let \ = @normalbackslash
+% \rawbackslash defines an active \ to do \backslashcurfont.
+% \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with
+% catcode other.  We switch back and forth between these.
+@gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@backslashcurfont}
+@gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash}
+
+% Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of
+% the literal character `\'.  Also revert - to its normal character, in
+% case the active - from code has slipped in.
+%
+{@catcode`- = @active
+ @gdef@normalturnoffactive{%
+   @let-=@normaldash
+   @let"=@normaldoublequote
+   @let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix
+   @let+=@normalplus
+   @let<=@normalless
+   @let>=@normalgreater
+   @let\=@normalbackslash
+   @let^=@normalcaret
+   @let_=@normalunderscore
+   @let|=@normalverticalbar
+   @let~=@normaltilde
+   @markupsetuplqdefault
+   @markupsetuprqdefault
+   @unsepspaces
+ }
+}
 
 % Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily.
 % This is canceled by @fixbackslash.
@@ -5959,9 +10027,9 @@ should work if nowhere else does.}
 @global@let\ = @eatinput
 
 % On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then
-% the first `\{ in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix
+% the first `\' in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix
 % that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur.
-% Also back turn on active characters that might appear in the input
+% Also turn back on active characters that might appear in the input
 % file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format.
 %
 @gdef@fixbackslash{%
@@ -5973,15 +10041,28 @@ should work if nowhere else does.}
 % Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages.
 @escapechar = `@@
 
-% These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special.  
-@catcode`@& = @other
-@catcode`@# = @other
-@catcode`@% = @other
-
-@c Set initial fonts.
-@textfonts
-@rm
-
+% These (along with & and #) are made active for url-breaking, so need
+% active definitions as the normal characters.
+@def@normaldot{.}
+@def@normalquest{?}
+@def@normalslash{/}
+
+% These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special.
+% @hashchar{} gets its own user-level command, because of #line.
+@catcode`@& = @other @def@normalamp{&}
+@catcode`@# = @other @def@normalhash{#}
+@catcode`@% = @other @def@normalpercent{%}
+
+@let @hashchar = @normalhash
+
+@c Finally, make ` and ' active, so that txicodequoteundirected and
+@c txicodequotebacktick work right in, e.g., @w{@code{`foo'}}.  If we
+@c don't make ` and ' active, @code will not get them as active chars.
+@c Do this last of all since we use ` in the previous @catcode assignments.
+@catcode`@'=@active
+@catcode`@`=@active
+@markupsetuplqdefault
+@markupsetuprqdefault
 
 @c Local variables:
 @c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp)
@@ -5990,3 +10071,9 @@ should work if nowhere else does.}
 @c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H"
 @c time-stamp-end: "}"
 @c End:
+
+@c vim:sw=2:
+
+@ignore
+   arch-tag: e1b36e32-c96e-4135-a41a-0b2efa2ea115
+@end ignore